Collected Works Of Unoponcho - Index on last page

[unoponcho]

Gentlemen! I have been lurking in the shadows of the forum for several months. I am 74 years old and decided, what the hell, maybe even at my age, I can offer something to the forum. So, I decided that I would post a story that I have recently written, solely for this forum. This is my second story that I have ever attempted to write. I am in the process of completing a sequel to the story that I am posting. My first attempt in writing is an erotic story that I hope to post in the new Erotic Stories topics when it is opened. I hope that you enjoy reading the story and I look forward towards hearing your comments.

Kevin


Old Queens’ Gang - Part One

Located in a Southern, mid-sized city is a gay bar, aptly named Bottoms Up. Unlike the other gay bars in the area, which are close to the downtown area, Bottoms Up is conveniently located in a quiet neighborhood, surrounded by homes and small businesses. Men of all ages, ethnicities, and socio-economic backgrounds frequent the bar.

Six of the regulars are older, retired men, affectionately called the “Old Queens’ Gang”. (A couple of years ago, one of the young, cute bartenders had jokingly nicknamed the six older men, and the handle stuck.) All six are single, most having had long-time partners, who are now deceased. Most are affluent, although wealth (or lack of it) never influences their choice of friends. They are just lonely people, who are good friends. Almost daily, several of them get together for lunch or dinner, movies, concerts, shopping, or just to enjoy morning coffee. And, of course, they meet at Bottoms Up three or four times a week.

At first the men resented the nickname. Chronologically, they are old, but none of them feel old, and do not think they act old. None of the men had ever been called a “queen” before in their life, and believe that they never present the characteristics of gay men they know or observe that are called “queens”. Furthermore, the term gang is, to them, a derogatory word connoting violence, illegal activities, rashness of youth, and cliquishness. The group, therefore, initially balked at the moniker, the “Old Queens’ Gang”, and decided that they were going to make an all out effort to prove to their fellow patrons, that they were not old, not queens, nor were they a gang, and were not excluding any one in the bar that wanted to be friendly to them!

So, they set a plan into action. After arriving at the bar they would gather around a table with their drinks and exchange greetings and brief conversation. Then they would break up and make a point to visit with all the other regulars, and introduce themselves to any newcomers. Oftentimes after they had met someone for the first time, they would introduce them to their friends. It was not long before everyone who frequented the bar became well acquainted with these men, and found them to be friendly, interesting, fun guys, and a pleasure to be around. Once accepted by others, they came to accept and even become proud of the nickname “Old Queens’ Gang”.

Several times during the year, the gang would decide to have a party. They would take turns in hosting the parties at their homes. As a group they would plan and make all the preparations for the parties. Each of them would contribute money covering the expenses of the parties. The gang always retained Bottoms Up to provide bartenders and the liquor, beer and soft drinks. When they had a party, there would be very few customers at Bottoms Up since most of their customers were guests at the party. There were a number of the quests at their parties, who were friends, from through out the city who had never been in the Bottoms Up bar. There were a few gay women and a number of straight (gay-friendly) guests. Several of their guests were very influential people.

One early evening, the gang was at the bar and Jason, one of the members, met a young man named Chris. Chris was an eighteen-year-old brunette, with a short, slim build, and a boyish face. Obviously he was too young to be legally served alcohol, but had apparently arrived at the bar having already had a good bit to drink. The bartender had refused to serve any alcoholic drinks to Chris, so Chris was nursing a cup of coffee instead. Jason noticed Chris because he was sitting alone, rather slumped over his coffee mug, and it was apparent that he was depressed.

Jason approached Chris with concern, because Chris looked like a young man in trouble. Initially, Chris was rather shy and unresponsive, but Jason was friendly and non-threatening, but persistent in trying to pull Chris out of his shell, and find out if there was a way that he could help.

Jason noticed that Chris had a number of bruises on his face, neck, and arms. After some time talking, Jason asked about the bruises. Tears came into Chris’s eyes and, after a moment of silence, he told Jason that his lover had beat him up the night before. Jason asked him if he and his lover lived together and if he was going back home to his lover who beat him up. Chris lowered his head and said yes, and explained that he still loved Hank, and wasn’t ready to leave him. Jason sympathetically listened.

When the conversation ebbed, Jason asked Chris to meet his friends. Jason introduced Chris to everyone and then briefly told the gang about Chris’s problem.

Everyone in the gang began to try to convince Chris that he should not go back to the apartment or to his lover, but Chris was determined to go back home. Suddenly, Chris looked down at his watch and frantically announced that he had to get back home. He was late and had to cook supper before Hank got home from work or Hank would get mad and beat him again. They decided as a group to accompany Chris home.

Upon reaching Chris’s apartment, John and Buster began cooking dinner for Hank and Chris, Bryan and Joe set the table and picked up some things lying around the apartment, and Jason and Tom sat on the sofa with Chris and tried to warn him once again of the potential danger in his situation, but Chris was still adamant that he was staying. Before the group left, Jason told Chris to call him the next morning. Jason asked Chris for his billfold, and put his card with a message for him to call along with a hundred dollar bill in it, just in case he needed money. The gang hugged Chris and said their goodbyes and left before Hank arrived home from work.

The next morning, having not received a call from Chris, Jason called Tom, and they went to Chris’s apartment. Chris came to the door wearing only his jockey shorts. Jason and Tom took notice of day-old bruises all over his chest and stomach. He was so thin that he appeared undernourished. His eyes were red and he had obviously been crying. They also noticed that he had not yet completely physically matured, still Chris had the potential of growing into be a very nice looking young man.


Jason and Tom told Chris to go get dressed, and that they were going to take him to a restaurant to have breakfast. During breakfast, Jason and Tom carried on a conversation with Chris, but never mentioned Chris’s problem with Hank. After they finished eating, they began to question Chris about the incident and his relationship with Hank. Chris explained that he met Hank shortly after the death of his father. His mother had died several years before the death of his father. He dropped out of high school after his father died, and worked as a cashier in a convenience store to support himself up until a couple of months ago, when he was laid off when the store declared bankruptcy. Chris told them that Hank and he had been together for over a year. He said that he loved Hank very much and felt like he could not live with out him, but did not think that Hank loved him at all.

Chris described Hank as about six foot tall, thin, thirty-five years old, uneducated, unshaven, and had the appearance of always being dirty and in need of a bath. After a few months into their relationship, Hank had begun continuously verbally abusing him, and recently started to beat him. The verbal abuse was always very degrading, using foul language. In most cases the abuse took place when Hank had been drinking and/or was high on drugs, which was occurring more frequently. That morning, before Hank left for work, Hank told Chris that he was a no good faggot, he was lousy at sex, he was the ugliest person he ever had met, and that he was not good enough to deserve him.

Tom explained to Chris that he needed to get out of this relationship immediately before the beatings became more severe or Hank killed him. Jason told Chris that he should file charges with the police for both verbal and physical abuse, and he should get a restraining order. Both Jason and Tom offered Chris the opportunity to come live with either of them until he could get on his feet again. Chris refused to take any of Jason and Tom’s suggestions, warnings, or offers of assistance, and asked to be taken back home.

The waiter brought the bill for the breakfast. Jason and Tom had a suspicion that because of the state that Chris was in the night before, that he did not remember some of their conversation with him. Jason slid the breakfast bill towards Chris and told him to pay for breakfast. Chris said he did not have any money. Jason told him that he thought he did have the money and for him to look in his billfold. Chris pulled out his billfold to prove that he did not have any money and was surprised to find the hundred-dollar bill and asked, “Where did that come from?” Jason retrieved the ticket and told him that he was only kidding, but that also in his billfold was his card with his name, phone number and address. Jason instructed Chris that when it got back to his apartment that he should put his card and money someplace that Hank would not find it. Jason told Chris that if he ever was in trouble or just needed to talk, he could call or come to his house day or night.

Later in the afternoon, the Old Queens’ Gang met at Bottoms Up and discussed Chris and his problems. After a lengthy conversation, all of the gang was extremely concerned about the danger that Chris was in. Buster excused himself and went to the phone and called the Chief of Police, who was also a friend. He explained the situation to the chief, but did not reveal names or any personal information about the two involved. The chief told Buster that there was nothing that he could do until the boy decided to press charges or to break from the relationship, but suggested that the young man contact a minister at one of the churches, and perhaps the church could help. At the present time, he did not know of any other facility or help available for the abused or the homeless in the city, since the abuse and homeless shelter was temporarily closed.

Buster reported back to the group about his conversation with the Chief of Police. The group then decided to go to Chris’s apartment and once again try to talk him into filing charges, or at least leave the apartment. Chris listened to their pleas but refused to file charges or leave. He said that Hank was all he had. Both his parents were dead, and he had no other friends. The gang told Chris that they were his friends and that they would help him do anything he wanted to do. Chris still refused to budge.

The next morning Bryan called a psychiatrist that he had known for a long time for advice. After giving the psychiatrist the details, the psychiatrist indicated that it was apparent that Chris had some serious emotional and mental problems that needed to be addressed, but unless Chris agreed to talk to him, that he could not be of any help.

During the morning John also made a telephone call to his minister seeking his advice. After John related some of the details of Chris’s problem, his minister said that he was willing to help in any way possible and asked John to keep in contact with him. He told John that he met regularly with several other ministers from other churches, and he knew that between them, if needed, that they could be of help to Chris.

Several days slipped by and each of those days the gang tried to think of some way to help. Then Jason, Joe and John decided that they would go see Chris again, and try to talk him into leaving. When they got to the apartment, no one answered the door. One of Chris’s neighbors was out in the hall and John asked him if he had seen Chris. The neighbor informed him that an ambulance picked Chris up that morning. He did not know what had happened, but Chris was in bad shape, and the medics spent a long time with him before taking him to the hospital. John then asked the neighbor if he knew where Hank was. The neighbor expressed his dislike for Hank in so many curse words and said he did not know where he was. He said that Chris was a real nice kid and everyone in the apartment complex really liked him, but did not care for Hank.

Part Two


Jason, Joe and John called the other members of the gang and they all met at the hospital.
They learned that the doctor who was taking care of Chris was a person that several of the group knew. The doctor came out into the waiting room where the group were and told them that Chris was in bad shape but would eventually make a full recovery. He had several broken ribs, a mild concussion, a broken arm, several broken fingers, severe bruising, and internal bleeding that would require surgery. Chris had told the doctor that he had fallen down the stairs, but the doctor did not believe his story. The doctor told them that Chris had large bleeding whelps on his back, buttocks, and back of his legs and they could in no way be caused from a fall down stairs.

Chris was in the hospital for eight days. Each day each member of the group took turns during the day and night to stay with and visit Chris. Hank never once ever visited or called. The consensus of the group was that Hank had no love or concern for Chris and that he probably considered Chris as a clinging vine that he no longer wanted around.

The second day that Chris was in the hospital, he told Jason that he needed several things from his apartment. Jason made a list and he and Tom went to the apartment to get the things Chris wanted. As they were leaving the apartment, the next-door neighbor stopped them and inquired about Chris. Tom and Jason told him that Chris was doing all right and, in time, would recover. The neighbor asked what had happen to Chris. Tom told him that they suspected that Hank had beaten him up again. The neighbor told Jason and Tom that he and other neighbors had overheard some of Hank’s yelling at Chris and loud noises coming from their apartment. The neighbors had discussed calling the police to report a disturbance of the peace, but had not done so. Jason told the neighbor that Chris had told the doctor that he had fallen down the stairs. The neighbor’s reply was “bullshit”.

The day before Chris was to be released from the hospital, the Old Queens’ Gang visited Chris and firmly informed him that he was not going back to live in that apartment again.
They told him that he now had six good friends and he could have his pick of with whom he was going to live for a while. Chris was very stubborn and informed them that he was going to go back to Hank.

Chris was discharged from the hospital and the gang was there to take him to his apartment. When they arrived at the apartment, they found that Hank had moved out. Tom went next door and asked the neighbor if he knew anything about Hank moving out. The neighbor grinned and said, “Yesterday, Hank hurriedly packed his things in his car and left, being escorted out of town by the Chief of Police”.

The neighbor stated that none of his neighbors would ever admit to, or give anyone the full details about who was involved or what happened to Hank. He came home yesterday and as he unlocked the door to his apartment, he was jumped from behind. He was blindfolded before he had a chance to see any of those who grabbed him. Before Hank knew it, he was down in the boiler room and was stripped of all his clothes. Hank was somewhat a hairy man, but with the aid of some tweezers, he left here with no hair on his chest or stomach, no pubic hairs and his eyebrows and head were shaven. Those who attacked Hank told him that he had two hours to leave town. One of the attackers also told Hank that he used to live on a ranch, and was an expert in castrating bulls. The former rancher would like nothing more than the opportunity to use Hank to exhibit his expertise to the rest of the group, and if Hank did not leave town that he could expect the worse. They left the boiler room leaving Hank with his hands loosely tied behind his back (so that he could free himself in a few minutes), blindfolded and still nude. The neighbor told Tom that he was not going to ever reveal to anyone who was involved but that he enjoyed every “pluck”. After Hank’s encounter with his attackers, Hank called the police.

After the earlier telephone conversation between Buster and the Chief of Police, the chief had called the hospital and requested to be personally informed if there were any suspected abuse cases admitted to the hospital in the next couple of months. He also had instructed his staff that he wanted to immediately be informed of any abuse situations. When Chris’s doctor reported the suspected abuse to the police, the chief was notified. The chief called and talked to the doctor to obtain as many details as possible. The doctor told the chief the young man’s name and his address. The doctor also told the chief about the six older men that were concerned about Chris. The chief asked if one of them was named Buster and the doctor said “yes”.

After the chief learned about Chris he assigned two of his detectives to investigate. The day after Chris was admitted to the hospital, the detectives arranged an interview at the hospital with the doctor and with Jason, Tom and Buster. After the interviews, the detectives decided to not question Chris. They did not believe that Chris would reveal any details or information to them, and did not want to add to his emotional and other problems.

The Chief of Police learned about Hank’s call to the police and about the threat made for him to leave town. The chief instructed the dispatcher to have the two detectives assigned to Chris’s case to answer the call. The detectives were instructed to listen to and record Hank’s statements. They were not to say anything more than necessary. They were to tell Hank that there was nothing the police could do and to then leave, but to remain in the area and observe Hank. The chief wanted to be notified, if and when Hank packed his car and prepared to leave. Almost immediately after the detectives left, Hank began to pack his things in his car.

The chief wanted to personally do the honors of seeing Hank to the city limits. As Hank neared the city limits, the chief had the sergeant who was driving the police car to turn on his flashing red lights, turn on the siren, and pull Hank over to the side of the road. The chief asked the sergeant for his ticket book, and wrote “Do Not Come Back” on a ticket. The chief handed the ticket book back to the sergeant and told him to give the ticket to Hank.

Tom reported to others in the gang and Chris what the neighbor said concerning Hank’s sudden departure. After Chris learned what happened to Hank and that he had moved out and left town, Chris was devastated. However, it did not take long for Chris to agree to move in with Tom. The Old Queens’ Gang rallied around Chris and helped make his adjustments as smooth as possible. They persuaded Chris to go for counseling and finish his high school education.

On several occasions John’s minister had contacted him and was kept informed of Chris’s situation. John’s minister and ministers from other churches had taken up a collection to cover Chris’s hospital and counseling expenses.

Before retirement Bryan had owned a very successful company. Bryan had sold the company to a person that he knew and admired. A few weeks after Chris moved in with Tom, Bryan called the new owner of the company and asked for a favor. Bryan briefly described Chris’s predicament and asked the new owner to find a job for Chris. He asked that Chris never be told about their conversation. Bryan told the new owner that Chris needed a salary that would be adequate to support his living, medical and education expenses. Bryan offered to pay the salary if the new owner, for any reason, could not financially justify hiring Chris. The new owner informed Bryan that his business had been growing and he did need an additional employee, and would hold the position open for Chris, and that the salary reimbursement would not be necessary. Chris submitted his application and was hired.

The group bought a used car for Chris’s nineteenth birthday so he would have his own transportation. Chris was very happy with his job and enjoyed working for the company. Chris had not work there long before he began to receive promotions and increases in salary.

Chris lived with Tom for close to six months, and during that time Chris received counseling and group therapy. He studied diligently, and with encouragement and tutoring received from the gang, Chris earned his GED. Both his mental outlook on life and physical well-being improved immensely. A few days after moving in with Tom, Chris began to take on various tasks around the house. He did most of the cooking, cleaned, washed, waxed and maintained Tom’s car, made neglected repairs to the house and did whatever he could in an effort to repay Tom for letting him live there. Each member of the group supported Chris’s progress as much as they could. Even though Chris enjoyed living with Tom, after six months, Chris decided that he was ready to become more independent and self-sufficient and needed to move out and be on his own.

After Chris moved out of Tom’s home, Chris made it a point to go at least once a week and visit his Old Queens’ Gang friends at Bottoms Up. Chris often expressed his thanks and appreciation to his friends for all they had done for him. He told the gang that he was very happy with his job and that he planned to start to college part time working towards a degree.

One time when Chris was attending one of the gang’s parties, Chris met another young man and they immediately liked each other. His name was Charlie. Charlie was about the same age as Chris. He was a handsome young man who was polite, shy, intelligent, clean cut and neatly dressed and Charlie was working full time and going to college part-time. Chris introduced Charlie to the Old Queens’ Gang and Charlie made a great impression and met with their approval. After several months of dating, Charlie moved in with Chris. After Charlie and Chris began dating, they would go at least once a week to Bottoms Up and/or out to dinner to be with the gang. Chris and Charlie became known as honorary members of the Old Queens’ Gang.

The Old Queens’ Gang had successfully helped Chris, but all their good deeds were not finished. There were others, on occasions, at the Bottoms Up bar that required their help, but these adventures are another story.

Old Queens’ Gang --- Oliver and the Con Man



Bottoms Up, the local gay bar in a quiet neighborhood, has now been in business for twelve years, and their business is growing very rapidly. The number of customers has doubled each year for the past three years and the bar is undergoing an expansion. The increase in business, in most part, is due to the Old Queens’ Gang, a group of six older men who are regular customers of Bottoms Up. The group, for a few years, have met at the bar three or four times a week. The owner of the bar and the bartenders attribute the rise in business to the Old Queens’ Gang. In one corner of the bar, the owner placed a table and chairs with a sign that reads “RESERVED for the Old Queen’s Gang—Tues. and Thurs 3:00PM to 7:00PM –Sat and Sun. 3:00PM to 10:00PM”.

Over time, the Old Queens’ Gang has earned the respect and admiration of the other regular customers. They have the reputation of being compassionate, considerate and friendly to everyone in the bar. For the last several years it has been the practice of the group to circulate and greet newcomers and introduce them to others in the bar making them feel more at ease and welcomed.

The Old Queens’ Gang is also known for helping those that may be having problems, needing advice, or just lonely and needing to talk to someone. The members of the group consist of Jason, Tom, Joe, Buster, Bryan and John. Those that know the members never consider the group to be “old”, “queens” or “a gang”. Originally, the nickname was a joke, and has been affectionately carried forward.

During one of the Old Queens’ Gang’s visits to the bar, a distinguished, well-groomed and nicely dressed man in his late sixties came into the bar. It was the first time the group had ever seen the gentleman. John approached the man and introduced himself and learned that the man’s name was Oliver. After talking with Oliver for a short time, John introduced him to several other people and then introduced him to the gang.

In the manner that Oliver was dressed, his jewelry, and overall appearance, would lead anyone to believe that he was, or had been, successful in whatever occupation or profession he had pursued. After meeting the gang, he pulled a roll of hundred dollar bills from his pocket and ordered drinks for everyone.

Oliver dragged up a chair and joined the group. They spent about an hour talking and getting to know each other. Oliver had retired a couple of months ago and decided to move here. Bottoms Up was the first gay bar that he visited since moving to the city a few weeks ago, and was the second time he had ever been in a gay bar. Almost immediately, Oliver began to relax and feels at ease with his new friends. As the conversation progressed, Oliver revealed that he had known he was gay since his teens, but because of conservative profession, he had to remain closeted. Now retired, he was ready to allow himself to be openly gay and explore his sexuality, for the first time. Oliver explained that he had never had a long-term sexual relationship with anyone, only a couple of discreet sexual encounters while he was in college, but remained completely celibate during his professional years. His preference was a man between twenty-five and forty years old. He had no idea how to go about meeting someone that age but was anxious to meet a younger man and eager to have a meaningful relationship.

There was a moment that everyone was talking to each other and John used this opportunity to speak with Oliver. John was trying to be tactful in offering some advice to Oliver. He began by saying, “Oliver, I know this is only the second time you have been in a gay bar. A gay bar is sometimes dangerous because you never know who is going to be in the bar. Often there are some men in gay bars that have ulterior motives and are on the lookout for easy prey, especially vulnerable older men. There are some precautions to take in order not to attract these men. I think that you may wish to think about a few things before going to a gay bar again. You wear very expensive jewelry and clothing, and you have shown that you carry a large amount of money. Someone that may try to take advantage of you could notice one or all of these things. There are a lot of crazy and untrustworthy people sometimes in the bar or hanging around the outside of a gay bar. So for your safety and protection, I am suggesting that you dress down a bit, not wear large diamonds or gemstones, and carry only the amount of money you will need at the bar. I am saying this in hopes that you may heed my advice and avoid being in danger at some point.” Oliver expressed his thanks and admitted that it never had occurred to him before.

Oliver decided that he needed to go home. He told the group how much he appreciated them being so nice to him and he thanked them for visiting with him. Tom shook Oliver’s hand and gave him a slip of paper with his name, email address and phone number and said, “Oliver, you have made six new friends this evening. If you ever need us, please feel free to get in touch”. Oliver reached for his billfold and handed Tom his card with a phone number and tells Tom that he will be hearing from him.

A week goes by and none of the gang has heard from or has seen Oliver. On several occasions the group had talked about Oliver and how concerned and sorry they felt for him. The gang, per usual, was at the bar and Oliver walked in with his arm around the shoulders of a younger man. Oliver brought the younger man over to the group and introduced him as Frank. Oliver said, “This is the love of my life. We met three nights ago in a gay bar downtown. Frank moved in with me yesterday.” The gang was appalled, surprised and shocked. Frank is a hunk, between twenty-five to thirty years old, nice facial features, neat appearance, and a trim, muscular body.

After talking with Frank for a few minutes, the gang realized that there was something about Frank that was askew. The ways and things Frank does and says, along with his personality traits, immediately raised red flags. Frank was arrogant, self-centered, loud, and abnoxious. He had no qualms about asking Oliver or others for drinks or cigarettes. Frank had been drinking before they arrived at Bottoms Up and now he was very drunk.

Oliver was acting like a lovesick teenager and was hugging, kissing, and could not keep his hands off of Frank. The gang was at loss for words and did not know what to say. Oliver took Frank’s hand and said, “Please excuse us, we want to have a few drinks alone before going home”, and they departed.

After Oliver and Frank left the table, the Old Queens’ Gang was looking at each other, shaking their heads in disbelief. Tom looked around, to be sure Oliver and Frank are not in hearing distance, and said, “I just cannot believe that Oliver is so stupid”. Buster replied with, “Oliver is so damn naive and must be out of his ever-loving mind”. Joe shook his head and spoke up, “I asked Frank what he did for a living and his answer was ‘if your young, good looking and really smart, you do not have to have a regular job’.”

Each member of the group showed concern but at this point they didn’t know what to do. A few more comments were made, and they realized that Oliver and Frank had left the bar. The consensus of opinion of the gang was that Frank was, perhaps, either a hustler or con man, trade, or both, or looking for a sugar daddy, and seemed lacking in morals.

Tom asked what everyone thought about himself and another member of their group contacting Oliver to invite him for lunch or dinner to have a talk with him. Everyone thought this was a good idea, and John volunteered to be the second person. Tom and John agreed to meet for breakfast the next morning.

The next morning, while Tom and John were having breakfast, they worked out their strategy as to how to approach Oliver with as much tact as possible. Their first hurdle was to get Oliver to agree to have lunch with them without Frank being present. Tom called Oliver and extended an invitation for lunch. Oliver agreed, but asked if he could bring Frank. Tom said, “No, John and I want to talk you about some business, and we wish to do so privately.” Oliver asked what kind of business and Tom replied that they would discuss it at lunch. Oliver agreed to meet them.

During lunch there was the usual chitchat, but as soon as Oliver finished eating, he pushed his plate towards the center of the table and asked what kind of business were they going to talk about. John looked at Oliver with a big smile and said, “Oliver, that was an excuse to talk to you alone. The Old Queens’ Gang is concerned about you and we feel that you should know about our concerns. Since you are in the process of coming out of the closet, perhaps we may be of assistance and/or offer you some advice.” Oliver wanted to know what kind of assistance and advice.

Tom explained to Oliver that coming out at any age is difficult and perhaps even more difficult at their age. “My friends and I have been out for many years and as a result, between us, we have obtained a lot of wisdom and experience that we are willing to share with you. Being gay and adjusting to a gay lifestyle is difficult at best. Perhaps it is none of our business but that is the business that we are here to discuss with you.” John asked Oliver if he wanted to hear what they had to say or if he wanted to drop the whole topic. Oliver lowered his head and replied, “Okay, I will listen to anything you would like to say, but that does not mean that I will take your advice, particularly if it has to do with Frank.” John’s response was “It sounds like what you may be saying is that you may be having some doubts about Frank, but you may not want to explore these doubts.”

Oliver admitted that he had acted very immaturely, irresponsibly, and rashly. “I am not dumb. I know that something is not right with Frank, but I guess that I just do not want to admit it to myself and give up my dream. I know that I have rushed into this too fast, but I am so lonely, and have wanted someone with whom to share my life for all these many years. Yes, I know that I should have dated Frank awhile to get to know him before allowing him to move in with me. He was so convincing and said that he was the ‘one and only’ for me, and we should start living together immediately. It was the answer to my prayers to have someone to want to live with me.”

Tom wanted to know if Oliver was aware, that there are a few individuals around that prey on other gays, and especially older people, just to get what they can and to take advantage of them. Oliver said the thought had never even occurred to him. John said, “Tom and I, as well as the rest of the gang, believe that that is what Frank is doing to you. We believe that he is a hustler and/or a con man that seeks out older gay men, such as you, for the sole purpose of either looking for a sugar daddy or obtaining money, valuables, or anything that would be beneficial to him. Because of our experiences and having been around the gay world, we summed up the possibility that Frank was a bad apple when we first met him. We could be entirely mistaken, but we feel obligated to warn you of the possibility. It is up to you to determine what you wish to do about your relationship with him. For your sake, just be careful and think things through.”

Oliver was quiet for a moment and said, “You know, yesterday Frank and I were in bed and had just had sex, and he asked me if I knew how he could become my legal guardian, so if something happened, he could take care of me. There have been some other instances where Frank had asked about my finances, insurance polices, and other questions about my personal affairs. At the time, I thought that it was a strange thing to ask, but I soon forgot about it. Another thing that I ignored at the time when Frank moved in with me, was that all he had was a couple of suitcases with some nice clothes and his car. He said he would move in his other things later. Any one in their right mind should have known that something was not right.”

Oliver continued, “I am beginning to wonder if I am in love with Frank, or if I am in love with the fantasy or dreams that I have had all these years. I guess, if I really faced the facts, I know that I am physically attracted to Frank, but I really honestly do not like the man. Right now I am just very confused, and I am, at this very moment, facing reality for the first time.”

Oliver again thanked Tom and John for their concern, and the concern of the others in the gang. He said that he had a lot to think about, but realized that he must come to some conclusions, make decisions, be firm and act rapidly.

As Oliver was leaving, he asked Tom when would be the next time the gang would meet at Bottoms Up, so that he could personally thank the other guys for their concern. Tom replied that they would get together tomorrow afternoon or early evening, but if he needed anything or needed to talk, to call him.

Tom purposely did not tell Oliver that the gang was getting together later that day. He felt like Oliver needed some time to figure out what he was going to do.

About two and half hours after Tom got home, he received a phone call from Oliver. Oliver was obviously upset and was having some difficulty in talking. In a few minutes, Oliver was calming down and was telling Tom what had happened. “When I got home, Frank seemed agitated and asked what the business meeting was all about. I told him that it was personal, and Frank became irritable because of my answer. Frank shouted, “Oh! So Goddamn personal that I was not invited for lunch”. I went to my bedroom and shut and locked the door. I looked in my jewelry box, and some of my jewelry was missing, and money in my chest of drawers was gone. I then went to my desk and found that a number of my blank checks had been taken, and I also found some of my credit cards missing.”

“I immediately decided to call the police, but Frank had come to the bedroom door, and discovered it was locked. He became irate when he discovered that I had locked the door. He began to bang on the door and was yelling at me to open the Goddamn door. I told him I was in the bathroom, and I would be there in a minute. I made a quick decision, based on believing that Frank had no reason to know that I was aware of his transgressions, and I opened the door.”

“Frank came into the bedroom and saw the lid to the jewelry box was open, the drawer in the chest of drawers had not been shut and the cover to my desk was not in place. He knew that I had discovered some of the things that he had taken. He became furious. His anger was completely out of control. He was yelling profanity and screamed at me, “Damn it, Oliver, if you had been five minutes later, I’d have been gone!” Then he grabbed me and shoved me against the wall and he slugged me and I fell to the floor, pretending that I was unconscious. I just lay there very still, and I was afraid that he might kill me.”

“I guess that he was so mad and could not control his temper that he was not thinking logically. Frank for certain had an anger problem. I would have thought that he would have grabbed his things and what he had stolen and run, but he continued yelling, throwing and breaking things throughout the house. He was also collecting other valuable items that he was going to take when he left.”

“A neighbor had heard the commotion, yelling and all, and called the police. The patrol car must have been nearby because it did not take them long to get here. I heard the police siren before they pulled into my driveway. I locked the bedroom door again, and I managed to open one of the windows in my bedroom, and I yelled, ‘Help!’ to the police, and told them there was a crazy man in the house destroying my property. The police broke down the front door and subdued Frank. They asked me, if I wanted to press charges, and I told them, ‘You better believe it.’ Frank was handcuffed and the police read him his rights.”

“One of the policemen looked in Frank’s billfold and found what he needed for identification. They took Frank to their patrol car and locked him in the back. One of the policemen called into headquarters while the other policeman came back into the house for me to give him a statement as to what had happened. I told him everything from the time I met Frank to the time the policemen arrived.”

“After the policeman finished taking my statement, he asked if he could look around. I, of course, told him he could. He made notes as to the damage Frank had done and he asked to see Frank’s belongings. All of Frank’s things were packed in his suitcases, which leads me to believe that Frank had planned on taking what he could and leaving before I returned home. Among Frank’s things, the policeman found the items that I had just discovered missing, plus a few other things that belonged to me, and he found a gun. The policeman said that he needed to take these items as evidence and that he would list the items in his report. I signed the report and he gave me a copy.”

“The policeman started to leave when he remembered that he should search Frank’s car. After the policeman searched Frank’s car he came back inside and told me that he did not find anything. I asked the policeman what to do with Frank’s suitcases because I did not want Frank to ever come back into my house. He suggested that Frank’s suitcases could be locked in the trunk of his car and he would move the car out of the driveway and park it in the street in front of the house and then give the car keys to Frank. I helped the policeman carry Frank’s suitcases and things to Frank’s car. As the policeman and I got near the car, I overheard the policeman’s partner, who had been on the radio talking to their headquarters, telling the officer that Frank had a warrant out for his arrest and that he had also broken his parole. I returned to the front doorway to my house and watched the policeman move Frank’s car. He got into the patrol car, and as the police car was leaving, I looked directly at Frank, and gave him the finger.”

Towards the end of the telephone conversation, Oliver repeated, “Thank you, thank you, thank you, Tom! You guys most likely have saved my life. I was so stupid. If you all had not been concerned, I may not have wised up to Frank. It could have been much worse, and he even could have killed me.”

Tom asked, “Is there is anything I can do to help, or would you like for me to come keep you company for awhile?” Oliver replied, “No, thank you, I am doing okay.”

Oliver was going to makes some telephone calls to try get his front door fixed and then clean up a few things. “After my front door is repaired, I am going to fix my self a stiff drink and then I am going to lie down for a spell. I am looking forward to seeing the gang tomorrow afternoon.”

Tom went to Bottoms Up, got himself a drink, and was waiting for the other members of the gang to arrive. After everyone had arrived and were seated at the table, Tom and John gave them a report as to what took place at the luncheon with Oliver, and then Tom brought them up to date as to what happened when Oliver returned home. Everyone was elated that things turned out as well as they had.

Joe raised the question, “Who do we know that we can introduce to Oliver?” They all thought a few minutes, and Jason and Bryan both at the same time said, “GLEN!!!” Buster yelled, “Perfect!” Glen is a nice looking, professional, and all round great guy, who is around forty years old. His better half was a gentleman in his mid-sixties that the gang knew and considered a good friend, but had suddenly passed away about five months ago. The gang had tried to be supportive of Glen after his partner died. Glen had had a hard time accepting the death of his lover for seventeen years. Glen has always been attracted to, and associated with, older men. He always enjoyed the company of the Old Queens’ Gang, and they liked Glen’s company.

The gang agreed that Glen was the likely candidate to be introduced to Oliver, but that in no way were they going to rush or push them on one another. Tom thought that perhaps Oliver may need some time to recover from his ordeal, but on the other hand, meeting Glen may be the best thing for him.

The next day, the Old Queens’ Gang assembled at Bottoms Up. Glen happened to be there and Jason and Bryan took it upon themselves to tell Glen about Oliver, and tried to determine if Glen may be ready to consider meeting and dating someone. Glen was a little reluctant at first, but then began to show more and more interest and asked questions about Oliver.

While Jason and Bryan were talking to Glen, Oliver arrived, ordered a drink for himself and for the members of the gang, and then joined them at their table. Jason and Bryan brought Glen over and introduced him to Oliver. They all had set down and the bartender brought the drinks Oliver had ordered, and he asked the bartender to also bring a drink for Glen. Oliver offered a toast to the Old Queens’ Gang and told them how much he appreciated their concerns for him and what they had done for him.

Light conversation and jokes continued for a while and various members of the gang began to excuse themselves to circulate and visit other regulars and men visiting the bar for the first time. It was not long that Glen and Oliver were the only people left at the table. They found no problem in talking and getting to know each other, and were enjoying each other’s company. About fifteen minutes went by before the gang members began to reassemble at the table. Everyone was having a great time. As it was getting a little late in the evening for the Old Queens’ Gang, various members began to say it was time for them to go home, and within a few moments they all agreed that they must depart. Each began to say goodbye to each other and to Oliver and Glen. As the gang started to leave, Oliver announced, “Glen and I have a date tomorrow night for dinner.” Everyone hugged each other and the gang was on their way home leaving Oliver and Glen in the bar.

Frank went to court for his hearing and trial, at which time Oliver testified. The judge revoked Frank’s parole and sentenced him for two more additional years, due to what he had done to Oliver. Frank will be in prison for at least eight years, without a chance for parole, and may receive additional years, if found guilty, when he goes to trial for the outstanding warrant for the other case against him.

Several months elapsed, and Glen and Oliver had become a serious couple, and they seemed to be very content and happy. They had decided to continue to date each other for another couple of months before officially moving in with each other. They were practically living together anyway. If Glen was not at Oliver’s home, Oliver was at Glen’s home, or they were out somewhere together.

So, the Old Queens’ Gang is, again, successful in doing a good deed for others, and is always ready for their next challenge

Note: The following story is a sequel to Old Queens’ Gang and Old Queens’ Gang --- Oliver and the Con Man. These two stories are posted in Everything Under The Sun forum since they are not erotic in nature and would be inappropriate in this forum. I hope you will read and enjoy the above two stories as well as the following story.

I would appreciate your replies and comments.

Kevin


Old Queens’ Gang----Jay and the Internet

By Kevin

Bottoms Up, the local gay bar, was near capacity and everyone was enjoying himself. The laughter and noise coming from the bar was more than what the quiet neighborhood generally experienced. The Old Queens’ Gang was all assembled together at their table for the first time in two weeks. Bryan and Buster had just returned from their vacation trips. Bryan had spent two weeks in Paris and Buster had been in Miami. Jason, Tom, Joe and John had been meeting together at Bottoms Up as the Old Queens Gang had done for several years but Bryan and Buster were missed and it had not been the same without them.

Oliver and Glen came over to the Old Queens’ Gang’s table and greeted everyone and announced to the gang that they had just moved in together and that they were very happy. They again thanked the gang for introducing them to each other.

Glen told the gang that he and Oliver had invited a person to come to the bar with them and his name was Jay. Jay was in the restroom and as soon as he returned that he wanted the gang to meet him. Glen told the gang that he had just meet Jay through his business and that he was concerned about Jay. Jay had been making contacts with individuals on the internet and they were coming to his house and having sex. Glen had had several conversations with Jay and tried to warn him of some of the dangers that he may be subjecting himself but Jay had not taken any of his advice seriously. Glen asked the gang if they would talk to him and that was the main purpose of inviting Jay to come to the bar.

The gang discussed the matter for a few minutes and came to the conclusion that they would talk to Jay, but that they should wait until the next time they saw him. They did not want to jump in and immediately start giving Jay advice moments after first meeting him.

Jay returned from using the restroom and came over to the gang’s table where Oliver and Glen were and Glen introduced Jay to everyone.

Jay was in his early thirties, about five foot eight inches, long unkept hair, beard that needed to be trimmed, average build, clean clothes but very worn, and obviously had spent a lot of time in the sun.

Everyone greeted Jay warmly and welcomed him to the bar. The gang, Oliver and Glen continued their conversation and occasionally asked Jay questions about himself trying to get to know him. They learned that Jay was a construction laborer and that was the only trade that he had ever been involved. Jay was a very likeable person, somewhat reserved and shy, insecure, and had a very low opinion of himself.

Joe excused himself from the table and told Jay to bring his drink and come with him that he wanted to introduce him to some of the other people in the bar. After Joe had introduced Jay to a couple of people, they set down on a couple stools at the bar and talked. Jay and Joe got to know each other better and had a good rapport in a very short time. Jay was relaxed and found it easy to talk to Joe. He began to respect Joe and had confidence in him and realized that Joe was the type of person that he would like to have as a good friend, nothing sexual but just as a friend. Jay told Joe that he never liked going to gay bars because no one would ever talk or have anything to do with him. This was the first time that he had ever been to a gay bar and ever had a good feeling about being there.

Joe and Jay returned to the gang’s table just as Oliver and Glen were hugging and telling everyone goodbye. Jay shook everyone’s hands and a quick hug and was just about to leave, when Joe told Glen to bring Jay back to the bar the tomorrow afternoon. Glen turned to Jay and asked him, “Can you join us tomorrow?” Jay replied, “It is so nice to be wanted. As soon as I get off work and clean up, it would be great to see you guys again”.

After Oliver, Glen and Jay left, Joe told the gang that Jay was a real nice guy with very little education but very smart who was very lonely, unhappy, and needed a good friend or friends. He felt that the gang could help Jay in more ways than just discouraging him from making dangerous sexual contacts using the internet.

Early in the evening the next day, Jay showed up at the bar by himself and joined the gang at their table and told them that Glen and Oliver may join them later that something had come up and they did not know if they could join them or not.
After a few moments of conversation, Jay whisper into Joe’s ear, “May I talk to you alone for a few minutes?” Joe picked up his drink in one hand and took Jays arm and lead him outside to the patio where they set down with no one else on the patio. Jay said, “Glen has told me that he disapproves of me making dates on the internet and I guess I do not know why. It is the only way I know how to get someone to have sex with me. Even when I do make contact with someone over half of them see me and walk away. I do not know what to do”. “Jay, Glen does not disapprove of you using the internet to arrange sexual contacts. He thinks that you should take more precautions and meet the contacts in a public place and get to know them before inviting them to your home”, Joe replied. “I know that is what I should do and I have tried to meet a couple of guys in a nearby coffee shop, but as soon as they see me in person they turn around and leave”. Even when they come to my house most of them immediately leave but I do have better luck sometimes when they come to my house”.

Jay looked down at the floor and both he a Joe were silent for a moment. Jay broke the silence and said, “I did get lucky last night, after leaving you guys. I had met a guy on the internet and had made a date for him to come to my house late last night. I had taken another shower and was waiting on him with nothing on except a towel wrapped around me. From previous experiences I had learned if I greeted the guys at the door either naked or near naked that I had a better chance with having sex. Anyway, last night after waiting a half hour after he said he would be there, I gave up and
lay down on my bed and was jacking off when the doorbell rang. I had already turned the outside light and the living room lights off before going to my bedroom. There was only a small lamp on in the bedroom and it was the only light on in the house. I went to the door with my towel wrapped around me. My cock was sticking straight out from the whacking that it was receiving when the doorbell ring. When I opened the door this real hunk of a man stepped inside and I shut the door. I dropped my towel to the floor and my dick was rock hard. I could see that his eyes immediately went to my crouch and his cock was getting hard in his pants. Then he look up and look me in the face and started to look at me all over. He began to back towards the door saying, ‘No way, No way’. I reached over and cupped his nuts in my hand and with the other hand unzipped his pants and began giving a blow job. He dropped his hand from the doorknob and said, ‘What the hell. If you want to suck my dick, go ahead’. In no time, I had him undressed and in my bed. The more I sucked on his dick the hornier he became. He was almost ready to shoot and he reached down with his hand and removed his dick and started stroking himself while moving down and took my throbbing cock into his warm mouth. After he had gone down on me several times, he pulled his mouth away from my dick and looked up and said, ‘Damn man, you have a perfect size dick for sucking. I love to suck a real hard dick that is the right size’. He began sucking my dick again and I knew that he was getting a lot of enjoyment while doing so. He soon had me seeing stars and it had been a long time since my cock had been so big and hard and feeling so good. We positioned our selves so that we could each give each other a blow job at the same time. Both of us shot off in each other’s mouths. After we recovered, I made us some coffee and we drank our coffee and smoked several cigarettes. When finished with our coffee and cigarettes, he took me by the arm and we went back to the bedroom and he fucked my ass for almost an hour before we both shot again. He lay down beside me and wrapped his arms and legs around me and we both went to sleep. This morning when we woke up, he got up and we drank a cup of coffee before he left. He told me that, ‘you are a good fuck and I like your dick’”.

Jay looked at Joe and apologized for being so vivid and giving so many details about his sexual encounter of the previous night. He said that the point that he was trying to make was that he had difficulty in finding sexual partners. The use of the internet had been the most successful way that he had found to contact guys who were interested in having sex with him.

“Jay, your detail description of your sexual escapades last night was not necessary but being at my age, I enjoyed your relating to me your night of passion. However, listen to me and think about what I am going to ask you. I do not expect an answer to my question but just think about it. What if, when you palmed that guys nuts last night, and he responded by knocking the shit out of you or beat you to a pulp?

Joe reached over and put his hand on Jay’s shoulder and said, “Come on and let’s go back and talk to the gang about this thing of picking up sex partners on the internet. I think that they will give you some other things to think about ”.

After Joe and Jay had rejoined the gang, Joe waited for the right moment in the conversation and then said, “Heads up you guys, Jay and I have been talking about him contacting potential sex partners by using the internet. Why don’t you guys offer some of your wisdom and advice on the subject?"

Jason was the first to say anything. “Jay, you are old enough and been around long enough to know that when ever you pick up or being picked up whether it be in the grocery store, local park, movie, gay bar, internet or anywhere, that there are risks and danger involved. If you do not know the person, you may be getting yourself into serious trouble. Unfortunately there are a lot of idiots out there. You know and we all know about the possible danger but sometimes we ignore or need to be reminded that they do exists”.

Tom chimed in, “Yea, there are people who hate the gays and even gay themselves, will go out of their way to do harm. Some of those people hang around the gay web sites with the intent to entrap some unsuspecting gay, to beat up and/or rob or even kill a gay person.”

Bryan offered his two cents, “If a guy is so horny and he thinks it is absolutely necessary to have quick sex, there are a few but not many places that he may be safer than taking them to your home. For example, the gay bathes or any place where there are a lot of other gays are around. I do not condone this but even here in the restroom of the bar, often gay guys get their rocks off.”

John’s advise, “What we all are trying to say is to get to know the person and find out as much about the person before inviting him to your home or going to his home or to a motel room or any other place that you would be placing yourself in danger. Take your time and date the person for a while before going to bed with him. Before long you may have a long lists of guys that you may want to have repeated sex with.”

Buster said, “If you have a friend or someone that you know introduces someone to you, generally you would be safe to pursue a sexual encounter. Another idea for you to consider, here in the bar if someone comes onto you, ask around and see if anyone knows the guy. Those bartenders over there are full of information. If someone has had a bad experience with someone, one or all the bartenders generally know about it and if so they will tell you to stay clear of the guy”.

Joe hugged Jay and told him that he had friends here that are concerned and want him to be careful using the internet to arrange sexual contacts. Joe added, “I know several couples that come to this bar and others who have meet each other by using the internet, so it is a wonderful source to meet someone but you just have to be careful.

Jay expressed his thanks to everyone for their concern and their advice and said he was going to go home and reevaluate the situation that he had been placing himself. He told the gang that he would be back to see them in a couple of days.

A week had gone by and no one had seen Jay. Oliver and Glen came into the bar and Joe motioned to Glen to come over to the gang’s table. Joe asked Glen if he had seen Jay. Glen told Joe and the gang that he had not seen Jay in over a week. The gang expressed their concern and had been wondering if they had said anything to Jay that may have offended him.

Glen went to the bar to use the telephone. He called Jay’s house and no one answered and then he called Jay’s boss and his boss said that he had not seen Jay in two days and that he had not called in sick or anything. Glen came back to report what Jay’s boss had just told him. Joe suggested that Glen and he go to Jay’s house and see if they could find out anything. Glen and the gang agreed that this would be a good thing because everyone was beginning to really worry. Jay had always seemed depressed and not very emotionally stable.

Joe and Glen returned to Bottoms Up after going to check on Jay. It was apparent that both were upset. They said that Jay’s house was locked up; there was a damaged window screen and some dried blood on the porch floor. As they were leaving that they observed dried blood on the driveway.

Buster excused himself and used the telephone on the bar and called his friend, the Chief of Police. Buster explained why he was concerned about Jay and he asked the chief to check to see if there had been any disturbance calls at Jay’s address. The chief asked Buster for a telephone number that he could call him back. Buster gave the chief the phone number at the bar and he set down on a stool and waited for the chief to return his call. In only a couple minutes, the chief called and informed Buster that the police did receive a call three days ago and that someone attempted to murder Jay and that he was probably still in the hospital.

Buster report to Oliver, Glen and the Old Queens’ Gang what the chief had just told him. They immediately left the bar, climb into two cars and headed to the hospital. Upon arriving at the hospital they were told Jay was in fair condition, he had been stabbed seven times, had lost a lot of blood, and had regained consciousness that morning. Jay could have company for fifteen minutes but only with two people. Joe and Glen were the obvious to be the two people to visit with Jay.

Jay was real glad to see Joe and Glen. They asked Jay what had happened. Jay said that in the middle of the night he was in bed asleep and heard someone banging on his front door. He went to the door and a man pushed his way inside the house and knocked him down on his back onto the floor. The man straddled him and he had a knife and grabbed his testicles and penis with one hand and was yelling, “You God damn faggot, I going to cut your fucking balls and cock off.” I started to fight him off and he stabbed me in the stomach before I could get away. I got up and decided that I would jump through the open window to get away from him and when I did I knocked out the screen. I got up and started to run and he tackled me on the driveway and began to stab me over and over again. I blacked out and did not come to until this morning here in the hospital.

Joe asked, “Who was this that did this to you?” Jay closed his eyes and said, “I think it was a guy that I meet on the internet that agreed to have sex with me about two weeks ago. He never showed up. I am not for sure if that is who it was or not”. Glen asked, “Can you identify the man?” Jay replied, “Hell yes, and that is what I told the police this morning and they are going to bring some mug shots in for me to look at.”

Joe told Jay that he had eight friends that would be available if he needed anything and the other six friends were outside his room and some of us will be back to visit you later. The nurse came in and told Joe and Glen that they needed to leave. Glen took one of Jay’s hands and Joe took the other. They gripped his hands real tight, smiled at Jay, before leaving Jay’s room.

Joe talked to one of the nurses in the hall and asked how long Jay would be in the hospital. She told Joe that she would guess that if all went well that he should be released day after tomorrow but that he would need someone to care for him after he went home.

Joe and Glen joined Oliver and the rest of the gang and briefly told them what they had learned. Jason suggested that they all return to Bottoms Up and talk about what and how they could help Jay.

After the Oliver, Glen and the gang had gotten something to drink they set down at their table and began to discuss and make plans as to what should be done to help Jay. Glen said that, “The first thing I should do is to call Jay’s boss and let him know what has happened to Jay”. Glen left to go to bar and use the telephone to make the call. Glen returned to the table and told everyone that Jay’s boss is going to hold his job open and that he had not realized how much work that Jay had been doing and how much he had been depending on Jay. Jay would have an increase in salary when he returned and would receive sick pay while he was away from the job and that his company had insurance that would cover Jay’s hospital and doctor’s bills.

Joe broke the silence. “Jay is going to need someone to care for him after he gets out of the hospital. I want him to stay at my house until he fully recovers and can take care of himself. I do not think it is safe for him to return to his house. That bastard may come back and try to finish the job that he started”. Everyone agreed and they all volunteered to assist with taking care of Jay.

They made out a schedule so that two of them would visit Jay during each visiting hours at the hospital. John pointed out, “Joe is right. Jay is not going to be safe going back to his house until that creep is put behind bars”. Bryan said, “I think that as soon as Jay has recovered he will want his own place to stay. I will start looking around to see if I can find a suitable place for him to live”. All agreed that Bryan was right and they could not think of anything else that they could do at this time. Oliver stood up and raised his glass and loudly said, “You guys are doing it again. Always coming to the aid of someone in need of help”. A number of people in the bar, that overheard Oliver, yelled, “Hear!!, Hear!!”.

After Jay was released from the hospital he was very glad that Joe had offered him a place to live while he recovered. Jay also expressed that he was afraid to return to his home and he expressed his appreciation to Bryan for looking for a new place to live.

Bryan found an apartment that he thought that Jay would like and paid the deposit and first months rent. Bryan also contacted Jay’s landlord and explained Jay’s situation and his landlord agreed to let Jay out of the lease agreement and refund his deposit.

With eight people working together, within three hours, Jay’s things were packed, moved to the new apartment, unpacked and made ready for Jay to move into after he had fully recovered. Tom and John packed Jay’s clothes and were appalled in the condition of his clothes. John suggested that they pick out a couple of changes from his better clothes and put the rest of them in a bags which was not to be unpacked when they got to the new apartment. John told Tom, “We have got to do something about his clothes and shoes. They are worn out and should go to the trash.”

Jay made a full recovery and John and Joe took Jay to his new apartment. Jay was thrilled to death and was surprised that everything was unpacked and put in its proper place. John instructed Jay that most of his clothes were in a bag in the closet and that he was not to unpack them for a few days. He also told Jay that after he finished his first day back at work tomorrow, I want you to come to Bottoms Up to be with the Old Queens’ Gang and have a drink with us.

It was Friday evening and Bottoms Up had a huge crowd for happy hour. The Old Queens’ Gang had made their rounds greeting everyone and was seated at their table. Oliver and Glen were also somewhere in the bar. John had talked to one of the guys who came to the bar often and this young man was a hairdresser. John had asked the hairdresser if he would do a complete makeover tomorrow on Jay if he could talk Jay into it. John told him that he would pick up the bill. The hairdresser said that he would be happy to do it and that he would not charge anything because he had heard what Jay had been through.

John knew, that the hairdresser’s lover owned a men’s clothing store. John talked to the hair dresser’s lover and asked him if he would help Jay select a new wardrobe of clothes and shoes both for everyday use and work clothes. John told him that he or the gang would pay for whatever he picked out for Jay. After some discussion Jay was to go to the men’s clothing store after the hairdresser had finished the makeover. The owner of the men’s store agreed to help Jay select the clothes and shoes but insisted that everything would be charged at costs to the Old Queens’ Gang.

Jay came into the bar and got himself a drink at the bar and joined the gang. Oliver and Glen also joined the group. After all the greetings were over and everyone was relaxed, John moved around Jay’s back and put his arms around his shoulders and announced “Jay, the rest of the gang and I have a surprise for you. We want to give you a complete new wardrobe, shoes and a makeover. If you would accept our offer, the hairdresser and owner of a men’s clothing store is standing over there and you need to introduce yourself to them and make an appointment for tomorrow. Now this offer is made on the condition that tomorrow afternoon when you are finished that you come back to Bottoms Up and show us the new you and then we will take you out for dinner.”

Jay stood up and said, “I, I, I don’t know what to say. Sure, I’ll do it. Why not? Thank you. Thank you”. John motioned to the hairdresser and his lover to come over to the table and he introduced them to Jay.

Saturday afternoon, the Old Queens’ Gang had assembled at their table and was anxiously awaiting Jay’s arrival. They did not know what to really expect. Suddenly, someone near the table said “Hi guys”. Everyone did a double take. They did not recognize Jay. His hair had been cut, his beard was gone and he was dressed in new comfortable everyday clothes. He looked terrific. Everyone stood up and waited their turn to hug Jay and tell him how great he looked.

Buck who owned the bar, noticed what was going on at the Old Queens’ Gang’s table, came from behind the bar and to the gang’s table and took Jay by the shoulders and looked him in the eyes and said, “Man, you are one more good looking dude. I did not even recognize you when you came in. I thought you were a new customer”.

A little latter on Jay went to the restroom. When he came back to the table, he said, “I can not believe this. When I was in the john, a guy made advances towards me. I could not believe that he was actually interested and talking to me. Then on the way back to the table another guy offered to by me a drink. What is going on?” Everyone was laughing and happy for Jay. They began talking about going to dinner. Buck came back to the table and whispered into Jay’s ear. Jay got up and went with Buck a short distance from the table where they talked a few minutes. Jay returned to the table and asked, “What in the fuck is happening? I have a date tomorrow night with Buck. We are going out for dinner and then to a party”. Jay said he was confused. “A short time back I overheard someone talking about Buck and James. I thought Buck and James were lovers”.

Tom explained to Jay that Buck and James were lovers and about three years ago, James disappeared. No one has seen or heard from James since. The police believed there might have been foul play and Buck for a long time was their primary suspect. For months, Buck, James’ family and police searched for James and never found a trace. Buck and James loved each other very much and were devoted to each other. Buck and James were roommates and lovers while in college and remained together after college for a number of years until James disappeared. Something horrible happened to James and we just do not know why and how he could have completely disappeared. “Jay, you are the first person that Buck has ever dated or had anything to do with since he lost James”.

Buck and James had three more dates. Then one afternoon the Old Queens’ Gang was at their table talking. Buck came up and set down with them. He said, “Gentlemen, I think I have fallen in love with Jay. We have a date tonight for dinner and Jay as agreed to spend the night with me. It will be the first time we have had sex and I want everything to be just right. I have bought several dozen scented candles, roses, bubble bath soap, new large fluffy towels, matching bathrobes, fruit, appetizers, brandy and champagne. I have selected some nice background music. I do want tonight to be perfect. Do you have any other suggestions as to what I might do?”

Jason laughed and said, “Good grief man. You have got it bad. I think you have everything under control. You and Jay have a good time tonight.”

Buck stood up and loudly said, “ATTENION EVERYONE, Tonight I am going to get laid. Drinks are on the house for everyone”. Tom yelled, “DAMN BUCK, Did you have to tell everyone we were going to have sex?” Buck began to blush and turned towards Tom and gave him the finger.

A couple of months of Buck and Jay being together most of their free time, they moved in together and are very happy. Buck told the gang that “Jay was a wonderful person and he loved him very much. He was a friend, lover, partner, soul mate and terrific in bed.”

Jay’s makeover not only changed his appearance, his luck with gay men, but most important of all, the way Jay feels about himself.

Mark up another success story for the Old Queens’ Gang. What will happen next to keep the gang occupied?

[Nathan]

Kevin........welcome to the forum and I really enjoyed the first part of this story. My first love was verbally abusive but I got the hell out before It turned physical. Still don't understand why people let themselves be abused. Very low self-esteem Is part of It I suppose? Anyway..............GOOD JOB!

[Herzeleid]

Still don't understand why people let themselves be abused. Very low self-esteem Is part of It I suppose? Anyway..............GOOD JOB!

Low self-esteem is part of it. Another is an internalization of the opression to the point of believing it yourself, which can be seen in Battered Wife Syndrome. The abused often feel that they can't do day-to-day activities without the abuser. They become dependent upon him or her.

[gayfilam]

Welcome Kevin. Your story was truly amazing. I do agree that low self esteem is part of it. #-o #-o #-o #-o #-o #-o #-o

[Stryfe]

Hi Kevin, that was a nice story! Can't wait to see how it turns out...it could prove to be a good lesson to many of the younger ones here...Thanks for sharing...

Stryfe

[unoponcho]

Thanks Guys for reading the first part of my story. I appreciate your remarks. The continued part which includes the ending of the story will be posted later on today.

Kevin

[unoponcho]

My Bare Ass Cowboy ----Part I

By Kevin


There is a very large ranch located in the foothills of the Rocky Mountains in New Mexico. The ranch is approximately 95,000 square acres and the property is about equally divided in the foothills at an elevation about 6500 ft to about 10,500 ft. of very rugged mountainous areas. The main portion of the headquarters, buildings and living quarters are in the lower elevations of the ranch. On the ranch are several herds of cattle, a herd of sheep and a large string of horses. Also on the ranch is an abundance of wildlife such as grouse, pheasants, raccoons, porcupines, turkeys, antelope, deer, elk, bear, mountain lions, bobcats, a few wolves, coyotes, squirrels, chipmunks, and are in the process of reintroducing buffalo which they have a small herd. There are many kinds of birds ranging in size from humming birds to both bald and golden eagles.

To properly operate and maintain a ranch of this size, required a very large number of employees of varying talents and education. The employees are from several ethnical backgrounds. There are hispanics, a few blacks, native indians, as well as caucasians. The majority of the employees are single but there are married personnel living on the ranch that in most cases both man, wife and sometimes their children are employed. These employees ranged from maintenance, cooks, cowboys, office personnel, to management positions. The majority of the personnel are full time but some are temporary.

During the summer before beginning my senior year at my university, I was employed at the ranch to work in an office. My duties were varied and I was doing everything from accounting, payrolls, personnel records, to purchasing supplies. There was a bunkhouse and mess hall near my office. The bunkhouse had about thirty bunks, showers, toilets, and laundry room. Most of the occupants, such as the cowboys off for a few days, were there for only a short time before going to work at other locations on the ranch.

The first four weeks on the job, I worked from early in the morning to mid-night seven days a week, except time to eat, do my laundry and sleep. My boss was every far behind and I made an all out effort to help in catching up with the work that needed to be done. After the fourth week on the job, my boss called me into the office and expressed his appreciation for what I had been able to accomplish and told me that there would be a big bonus as well as an increase in my salary. He also insisted that I immediately take off for four days.

There was a young sixteen-year-old Indian boy who was the dishwasher in the kitchen of the mess hall with whom I had talked to several times. He found out that I was going to have several days off and wanted to know what I was going to do. I told him that I wanted to hike up into the high country but did not know enough about the area to know were to go. He told me about an old log cabin that had been built a long time ago that used to be used by the cowboys when they took the cattle up to a nearby meadow to pasture or graze during the summer. He did not know if the cabin was still standing. It had been four or five years since he had been up there and no one probably even knows or remembers the place. He told me that it was a full day of hiking, probably about ten miles, and he thought if I wanted to be alone, that I would enjoy being up there, There are no trails to that area but would be easy to find. The reservoir not to far from the headquarters was built to supply everyone with water and was filled by a small river coming from the ice, snow and springs in the mountains and all I had to do was to follow the stream up to the cabin.

The old cabin sounded like a place I would love to visit, so I began to prepare for my hiking trip. I went to the commissary and picked out dehydrated and other food that would be easy to carry. I packed my backpack with the food, cooking kit, canteen, matches, small axe, hunting knife, flashlight, light jacket, toilet articles, fishing lures, ect. I tied my rod and reel, poncho, and bedroll to the backpack. I was going to travel as light as possible and only took what I thought I would have to have. I did not think I would need any other clothes than what I would have on. I laid out the clothes I was going to wear with my socks and hiking shoes. I was ready to go the first thing after breakfast the next morning.

Just at sunrise, I was up and had breakfast and was on my way to hike to the cabin, looking forwards towards being by myself and getting much needed relaxations during my time away from the office. It did not take me very long to reach the reservoir and along the way I saw a few antelope near some pinion pines. As I started to circle the reservoir I saw several buck muletail deer. By the time I found and started up the river, I had discovered that I was not in condition for the hike that I thought I was. Not being used to breathing in high altitude was part of my problem which I was experiencing. I had to stop and rest numerous times before finally reaching the cabin. Each time I stopped to rest I took advantage of the opportunity to enjoy the wild life and nature. Even though my feet, legs and back were aching and difficulty in breathing, I was really begin to relax and enjoy my hiking experience.

I was passing through some of the most beautiful country that I had ever seen. I was hiking up a rocky canyon with this small river of stream cascading down occasional creating falls making soothing sounds, the sounds of the birds and the wind in the trees and the sun shining made it a perfect day. Just above the rocky cliffs were all kinds of trees, some which I could not identify since I was not from this part of the country. But I did know the douglas fir, colorado spruce, quaking aspen, and several others.

About two thirds on the way up to the cabin, as it often does in the mountains, within in moments, it clouded up and down came the rain. It was a cold rain and I put on my lightweight jacket and poncho and continued my hike. The rain was hitting my face and I was feeling great to be alive and to be out of doors. Suddenly, the canyon and stream made a turn, and as I went around the corner, about fifty feet from me was a female mountain lion with two cubs. She was as surprised to see me, as I was to see her. She snarled and made this loud noise that I was able to understand her meaning without a doubt. I began to back up around the corner to get out of her sight. I almost tripped moving backwards so fast. Once out of her sight I began to climb up the cliff and upon reaching the top, I made a wide circle around her and then returned to the canyon to continue my journey to the cabin.

Just as I came out of the canyon was a beautiful little green meadow with wild flowers. On the other side of the meadow was a huge grove of aspen trees. Close to the stream was the old very small log cabin in great need of repair and was almost surrounded with aspen and Colorado blue spruce. A short distance from the cabin and up stream a little ways was a very large beaver dam. With the wind and rain there was a chill in the air. The sight was breath taking even in the pouring down rain. I stood there in awe for several minutes.

I went to the door of the cabin and was able with some effort to open it and looked inside. As I opened the door several chipmunks ran out and others ran out as I entered the very small one room log cabin. Towards the back of the room was an old iron stove. The stovepipe had fallen down but the stovepipe and stove was in fairly good shape. The inside of the cabin was a mess. It had dirt floors and there was a small table made from small logs. Everything had dust, dirt and chipmunk and other animal feces on it. I removed my backpack and took my axe and cut off a couple lower branches of a near by spruce that was wet from the rain. I used these branches to sweep off everything and then swept the dirt floor. After cleaning up the best I could, I fixed the stovepipe and started a fire with some firewood that someone had left inside the cabin years ago.

Once I felt like I had done what I needed to do on the inside of the cabin, I went outside and gathered some firewood and took it inside in hopes that it would dry out and could be used later. It was getting late in the afternoon and it would be dark soon. I had done all I knew that I needed to do on the outside so I went inside and closed the old door the best I could. It was really cold by now but the stove was putting off a lot of heat and the cabin was starting to warm up. I removed my poncho to discover that the clothes I had on were dripping wet due to condensation on the inside of my poncho. My poncho being waterproof and air tight and with my body temperature higher than the temperature on the outside caused me to sweat as well as the condensation forming. I was very cold and I hurriedly fixed something to eat and unfold my bedroll on the dirt floor.

After I finished eating, I knew that I could not go to bed with wet cloths. It had gotten real dark, and it was still raining. Using my flashlight, I took some of the fishing line off my reel and strung it up across the room to hang my wet clothes to dry out. I chunked some more wood in the stove in hopes that it would burn all night and keep the inside of the cabin warm. Quickly, I removed all my wet clothes and threw them over the fishing line to dry. I removed my wet hiking boots and crawled into to my bedroll naked as a jaybird. It had been a long day and I was not accustom to all the physical exercise that I had experienced. I went into a sound sleep.

Sometime during the night the fishing line either caught on fire or melted and my clothes had slid down and landed on the stove. The next morning, I awoke to find that my only clothes I had were in ashes. I did not know what to do. I got up and there were still coals in the stove and I put the remaining dry wood I had into the stove and fixed breakfast. The sun was out and the birds were singing and here I was naked up in the mountains with no clothes to wear. After I finished breakfast, I decided that since no one would see me that I would go around bare ass naked and later face how I was going to hike back home and to get into the bunkhouse before anyone saw me.

It was such a beautiful day. The sun was shinning and it was getting warm. The air was fresh after the rain and I could smell the trees, grass and flowers. The sound of the river and all was making me relaxed and comfortable even though I did not have anything on. I was just going to make the best of the circumstance and enjoy my days off.

I put on my wet boots, picked up my rod and reel and fishing lures and went to the beaver dam in hopes of catching some fish. I had been fishing for a couple of hours, when I heard something behind me. I turned around and there was this good-looking cowboy about ten feet from me with a big grind and staring at me. He took off his backpack and laid it on the ground and walked over to me and introduced himself. His name was Chuck. I told him my name was Kevin. He said that he never knew that you would have better luck fishing in the nude but that he was willing to try it if he could catch some trout. I explained to him what had happened to my clothes and he thought that it was hysterical.

He told me that a couple days ago that he was riding around on his horse and discover the cabin and this area. He was working with some other cowboys about four miles from here. They were looking after a herd of cattle that they had brought up into the mountains to pasture or graze in a large meadow during the summer. He had some days off coming to him and he decided that he would spend them here. He asked if I mind sharing the cabin with him. I told him that I would be glad to have his company, but that I was embarrassed about being nude. As Chuck picked up his backpack he smiled and made the comment, “I’ll get used to you if you can get used to me”. Chuck headed towards the cabin.

I kept on fishing without even having a strike and shortly Chuck appeared butt naked with some soap and a towel and washcloth. He told me, if I could go around naked, so could he, and maybe that would put us both more at ease. As Chuck was walking out on a dead aspen log that was out over the ice cold water, he asked me if it would disturb my fishing if he took a bath. I told him at this point nothing would disturb my fishing because they were not biting. Chuck had gone way out on this log and was stooping down and throwing the cold water on his body and soaping himself down. I could not keep my eyes off this beautiful creature and he knew I was starring at him. I had also caught him looking at me for long moments at a time.

All of a sudden, the dead bark on the log slipped off and Chuck went into the cold water. I could not help from laughing. He came up gasping for air and I was laughing so hard that tears were coming down my cheeks. A frown came across his face and he told me that he had hurt his leg and he thought it was broken. He said that he could not get out of the water by himself. I immediately crawled out on the log to assist him. I reached out to take his hand. He grabbed my hand and pulled me into the water. I came up gasping for air. He then begin to laugh and told me that would teach me to laugh at him. He started to pull himself back onto the log and some more of the bark slipped off and he was back under water again. I tried not to laugh again but could not help myself. Chuck made it out of the ice-cold water and stood up on the log with his back to me. He looked down and then he turned half way around and said that now he was embarrassed. He said that the cold water must have scared the living hell out of his dick and nuts because they had shriveled up and were in hiding from the shock. He then helped me out of the water. We picked up our things and went to the cabin.

As we entered the cabin we realize that it was nearing sundown and that we needed to fix and eat supper before dark. We combined his food with mine and picked out a few things to cook. I stoke up the fire again and we enjoyed a meal together. As I was cleaning up after our meal, I was aware that Chuck had unrolled his bedroll and was fooling around with it. I put some more wood into the stove and by this time it was black as the ace of spades outside and our only light was from the stove. Chuck came up from behind me and gently slapped me on my butt and said it was time to hit the sack.

As I was getting into my bedroll, I became aware that Chuck had zipped our bedrolls together. He knew that I had discovered what he had done and as he was getting into the bedroll he told me that we could help each other keep warm and besides if we shared our food together that we should be able to sleep together.

Chuck asked me if it was all right for him to snuggle up to me so both of us could warm up. Of course I had no objections at all but I was confused that this macho cowboy with no clues at all that he might be gay was acting the way he was. I decided that it would be best for me to wait for him to make the first move. We laid there in the dark and talked a long time. He told me that this was his third summer working on the ranch and that the salary that he was making almost covered his university expenses. He was also to start his senior year majoring in animal husbandry in the fall. He told me about the other cowboys that he was working with and about some of the wild experiences they had had over the three years during the summer. I told him what I had been doing at the office and that it was my first year here and that I was also a senior majoring in business administration.

I related my experience with the mountain lion and cubs when I was hiking up to the cabin. He said that there were a lot of mountain lions around and that they would not bother you unless you got to close to their cubs. He explained that there were to many deer, elk, and other animals around for them to eat and that they were shy of humans.

We continued to tell stories, jokes, and talking about all kinds of interesting things, but I was beginning to have a hard time staying awake and I had given up that Chuck might be interest in having sex with me. We were lying there very quite for several minutes and I was just about asleep and this loud noise, clawing and shaking at the door caused me to become wide awake. I started to feel around for my axe to defend myself. I asked Chuck, what in the hell is at the door. Chuck whispered that it was a bear then he rose up and yelled, “Come on in you son-of-a-bitch, I am hornier than hell and I fuck your asshole until you wished that you were a hundred miles from here”. Everything got real quiet and we assumed that the bear had gone.

Chuck lay back down and I asked him if he realized and meant what he yelled at the bear. He said that he had yelled at the bear without first thinking about what he was saying but that everything he said was true, including about being horny. I asked him what we could do about his problem. He laughed and said, “I thought you would never ask”. He told me that he had had his eye on my ass and my cock ever since he had arrived and he had had a hard time from getting an erection. Chuck turned me on my side and snuggled up to my back. His erected dick slid under my buttocks glancing off my asshole and hitting my nuts and he began to hump me. At the same, time he reached over me and took hold of my cock and began to stroke it. He kissed the back of my neck and told me that it had been a long time since he had had sex with a good-looking man. He asked me if I would object to us taking our time and having real great sex together. I told him I had all night, tomorrow and tomorrow night.

Without warning, Chuck rose up again and yelled, “Bear! I have a man in here and we are having sex. If you want to make it a threesome, come on in, otherwise go somewhere and fuck yourself.” After Chuck laid back down, I kissed him as I was holding his dick and told him that I had been wanting to warm up his cock and balls ever since he got out of the ice cold water this afternoon. I started to kiss his chest and nipples, moving to his navel and down to his cock that was standing long and tall. I gently put my lips around the head and licked and sucked. Being that we were out of hearing distance of any human being, Chuck was screaming “My God! My God! –Suck me! Suck me!—It feels so good”. I went all the way down on his beautiful hard endowment until I could smell his nuts. Chuck screamed out again, “Oh Shit –don’t quite –don’t quite” I was sure that the chipmunks that had been coming into the cabin and any other near by wild animal had left for higher country. I proceed to lick Chuck’s shaft and a around the head of his cock and judging from the sounds he was making that he was thoroughly enjoying what I was doing. While I was sucking and tantalizing his dick, Chuck was jacking me off. Like Chuck, I was thoroughly enjoying what he was doing. I made him stop and he had me stop several times to keep from loosing our loads. I had maneuvered my head around so that I could reach his testicles and his asshole. I had licked and sucked his nuts and had spent considerable time rimming his asshole. Chuck had turned in a position so that he could get to my dick and he had it all the way down his throat and giving it hell. I had never had oral sex before that was so gratifying. He certainly knew what he was doing and I was trying to be as accommodating to him as he was to me. Before I realized what I was doing I was yelling, “Holly Shit – Holly Shit” It was great to be free to loudly express yourself while having sex without someone hearing you. I had never had that experience before.

I told Chuck that I was also horny before we started to have sex but he had managed to get me beyond just being horny. My dick was aching it was so hard. I had an erection of all erections in my life. My dick wanted to cum so bad that it was throbbing but I wanted to enjoy the pleasure that Chuck was giving me as long as possible. Chuck knew and was sharing the sensations that I was having and he was aware when I was about to shoot my wad. He stopped sucking my dick and he lifted my leg so that he could rim my asshole and did so until it was completely relaxed and he had enough spit inside and outside to easily get his big cock into me. I had been going all the way down on Chuck and he was ready to fuck the hell out of me. His dick was so big that I was not for sure if I could take it all up the ass. It had been a long time since I was last fucked. I had Chuck to lie on his back and I straddled him and slowly pressed my asshole down on his dick. It was still slippery from my sucking on it and it was not long before it was all the way in. I leaned over and tenderly kissed his neck several times and then kissed his lips. His tongue was darting in and out of my mouth and I was doing the same to him. I began to rise and lower myself on Chuck’s cock. I was better able to control his cock hitting my prostrate in this position and kept yelling “Shit –Shit” As Chuck was laying under me he began to fuck me as I was straddle on top of him. I moved my legs around and made a 180-degree turn while is cock was still up my ass. I reached between his legs and found his asshole with my finger. His asshole was moist and I easily inserted two fingers and began to finger fuck him while I was still setting on his dick and he was fucking me. After sometime in this position, he yelled, “Stop, Damn It, Stop”

We changed positions and he said he was about to ejaculate and he needed to let his prick rest for a while. He had me lay down and began to suck on my raging hard again. He went all the way down on me but this time he gagged and came up and said, “Man, You have got a bid one”. Then he went down on me again and his nose was hitting my sack. He was going up and down on my dick very fast while sucking, and licking at the same time. I was moaning, groaning, twisting and turning and Chuck knew that I was not going to be able to hold it any longer. I started to stop Chuck when he rose up and told me to shoot my wad anytime I was ready, that he was hungry and for me to give it to him. He took me all the way several more times before I began to ejaculate deep down his throat. Both of us were moaning with pleasure. If it was possible, he seemed to enjoy my shooting off more than I did. He continued to suck on my dick until it became to sensitive and I pulled away from him.

He got up and lay down on top of me and we begin to passionately kiss again. His dick was just below my stomach and he was bouncing up and down on me while we embraced. Both of us were perspiring and his dick was sliding up and down on my stomach and it must have been feeling good to him because he remained in this position for several minutes before he moved down and put his dick in between my legs just below my balls and began to gyrate. This continued for a while and I had obtained another erection and this time it was me that had my dick slipping up and down between our stomachs while he fucking me between my legs.

Chuck got off of me and told me to turn over on my stomach. He lie down on top of me and put his prick into my asshole and began to fuck me real hard. Most all his weight was on me and he had me pined down and was really going after it. I kept tightening and loosening my asshole hoping to give him more delight while he was fucking my ass. He kept pounding and I felt his nuts hitting below my asshole. He reached under me and held my penis as he was fucking my butt. The rhythm caused my penis to slide up and down in his hand. From the excitement of our activity, I was nearing a climax again. Chuck speeded up his fucking motions and I could feel his body on top of me to began to tense and was breathing real hard so I knew that he was about ready to cum. As he began to shoot his load he had tighten his grip on my penis so tight that it was somewhat painful but as he was as far in my ass as he could be he let go of a huge load and at the same time I ejaculated for the second time in his hand and onto the bedroll. Chuck raised his head and yelled out, “Okay you God damn bear. See what you got me into”. We both laughed and Chuck remained on top of me and kept hold of my dick until we both became flaccid and Chuck’s dick slipped out of my ass.

Chuck eventually moved off me and lay down beside me. He kissed me and said that he was so relaxed that he was going to be unable to stay awake much longer. I rolled over on my side and he moved up next to my back and put his arm around me and grabbed my dick and told me that he loved that thing.

Before we went to sleep, he said I do not know what time it is and don’t really care but it is way pasted mid-night so later on today after we get up, I want to have sex with you again as many times as you and I can get a hard on. Both of us went peacefully to sleep and we could care less if the bear had fucked himself or not.

About mid-morning, I woke up and Chuck was stroking my dick again. I was as hard but possibly one of the reasons was that I needed to take a piss real bad. Chuck was snuggled up to my back had his cock sticking between my legs. I reached down and rubbed the head of his cock that was exposed on the front side of my legs. Chuck kissed the back of my neck and told me that he had to go and piss. I made him a deal. He was to get up and do his thing and then come back in and put some wood on the coals in the stove before he came back to bed. I would help him get warm. After he was warm again, then I would go and piss and then we could have sex. The deal was made.

Chuck ran out side and quickly returned to report that it was real chilly outside. He also told me that our visiting bear was a huge one. The bear had left tracks in front of the door and had claw marks high above the door. Chuck said that the bear would have had no trouble breaking down the door but guessed that the yelling had scared him away.
Chuck had put more wood into the stove and returned to bed shaking from being chilled.
After Chuck got warm, I went and did my thing and hurriedly returned to bed and to his waiting arms. After I got warm, I rose up and looked into Chuck’s eyes for a long time then he winked at me and we both smiled. Chuck started to hug me real tight and both of us were thinking that it was so nice to be close and relaxed with each other.

As we were laying close to each other, hugging and kissing, the heat from the stove had warmed the inside of the cabin and it was comfortable. Chuck threw the bedroll off of our bodies and suggested that we have quick sex and then have breakfast because he was starving. Without saying anything more, it was like we were reading each other’s minds, at the same time we moved into a position where we could suck each other cocks. Just being close to Chuck and looking at his beautiful shaped erection made me extremely horny. We both proceed to give head to each other and it was not long before Chuck was shooting off deep inside of my throat and the amount of cum was difficult to swallow. Only moments later I ejaculated into Chuck’s mouth. Chuck was gripping and massaging my butt while we lay there recovering from our climaxes. Chuck was the first to say anything. He said, “Now that we have had breakfast –Why don’t we go fishing”. We both laughed and got up and together we fixed breakfast.




My Bare Ass Cowboy ---Part II

After breakfast, while Chuck was cleaning up, I went outside to fine some more firewood for the stove. When I came back into the cabin and put down the wood, Chuck came over to me and put his arms around me and told me that I was real sweet and wonderful and he was so glad that we were together. I told him that it was great to be with a man that was so handsome and with such a wonderful big penis. We hugged each other and I decided that I was going outside to lie down on my poncho and enjoy the warm sun.
I had not been out in the sun very long when Chuck came out of the cabin with a pan of hot water, washcloth, shaving cream and a razor. Chuck had shaved and he came over and kneeled down in front of me and asked if he could shave my face. I asked him if that is all he wanted to shave? He said, “You name it and I’ll shave it”. We were laughing and Chuck grabbed my head and kissed me on my lips real hard. He then told me that he thought that he was falling in love with me.

Chuck felt like he needed sometime to himself to evaluate is emotions and his feeling towards me. He suggested that we both go fishing for a couple of hours. He was going to go upstream from the beaver dam and I could fish either at the beaver dam or down stream. We got our fishing gear and walked together to the beaver dam. Chuck and I put down our fishing gear and hugged each other. Chuck placed his hands on my rear and pulled me real close to him. We both instantly obtained a hard and Chuck pulled away and grabbed shook his dick and said that it too needed some time. Each of us reached for each other dick and gave a couple of strokes before Chuck went up stream to fish.

After an hour or so fishing without ever getting a strike, I returned to the cabin. I lay down on my back on the poncho and enjoyed the warm feeling I was getting from the sun. It was such a beautiful day. I looked at the clouds passing by overhead and then I shut my eyes and listened and smelled the wonders of nature. I was also thinking about what Chuck had said about that he might be falling in love with me. It suddenly occurred to me that I also might be falling for him. I certainly was not looking forward towards leaving him tomorrow to hike back to the bunkhouse and to work. Without intending to, I fell asleep.

As I was waking up, I realized that Chuck was between my legs and he was stroking my hard dick with one hand while his other hand was stroking and massaging my nuts in the same motion. I had the feeling that I was fucking his hand with my nuts the same as with my dick. I looked up at Chuck and he was grinning and yelled “Good afternoon, sweetheart”. I came unglued. Tears began to fall down my cheeks. He fell on top of me and kissed away my tears and held my head as he planted kisses all over my face and lips. Chuck was incredible and it was such a joy to be near him.

Chuck got over me on his hands and knees with his big dick hanging directly over my face and he began to take my ridged prick into his warm mouth and tease me. I looked up and the view of his cock and balls hanging above my face caused me to tremble as I took his well endowment into my mouth and began a sucking rhythm up and down his shaft. He lowered his rear so his dick was entirely down my throat and he began to fuck my face. His balls were bouncing up and down on my nose and forehead. He had lower himself were he was on his elbows and his hands where grasping my buttocks with a finger from each hand up my asshole and at the same time he was rapidly sucking my engorged penis. I knew from Chuck’s body language that he was nearing a climax. He raised his rear up so his cock no longer was in my mouth to prevent cumin. He continued to give my cock and asshole attention. I was again in ecstasy and I screamed, “Hey! You God Damn Bear—Are You Watching”. Chucks body was laughing and sounds of laughter were coming from him but he never let go of my dick. I had about decided that Chuck was ready for me to begin sucking on his cock again when he pulled off my dick and said “I am ready whenever you are”. I took his dick again into my mouth and he again lower himself and began to fuck my face. He rammed his dick down my throat all the way and began to shoot cum down my throat. As soon as he began to shoot I also released my load. Chuck had not been real comfortable in the position he had been in and he got up off me and turned around and lay on top of me and we kissed sharing each other’s cum with one another.

Chuck rolled over on his back next to me and put his arm under my neck and pulled me close. We lay there quietly looking up at the clouds. I turned my head towards Chuck and he was starring at me. When our eyes meet he winked at me and reached over and kissed me. After a few minutes, he told me that his horse would be jealous. I asked what he was talking about. He said that he and his horse have this thing going. “Whenever I get really horny, I get on my horse and we go off were no one is around. One time I got off my horse and jerked him off. He has one hell of a prick. It is real long, very big around, and is ugly and mean looking to look at but it is real smooth, feeling like satin, and he shoots a hell of a load. Anyway, I take off my chaps, jeans, and underwear and get back in the saddle. Just beneath the horn on the saddle is a hole. Most of the times when I am riding I get an erection partially from bouncing up and down. My dick fits perfectly into this hole in the saddle and as the horse is galloping along the saddle is jerking me off. My horse has this big spot on the back of his neck from my depositing my cum that has dried. That damn horse has learned when I yell Oh Shit, that means I have shot off and he can began walking instead of galloping. Another thing about my horse is when I go to get him to go to work, when he sees me, he will come running to me. The other cowboys have to chase their horses to catch them. They do not understand why my horse will come to me and theirs will not. I am not about to tell them that I jerked him off once and have I sex while on my horse and we love each other”. Chuck said that when he got back to work that after all the sex we had that it probably be awhile before he needed to make another deposit on his horses neck.

The afternoon had gone by so fast and I began to think about supper. I rolled over and slapped Chuck on his butt and told him that he needed to get his ass in gear so we could eat before sundown. Chuck told me that he had everything under control and then he asked how many fish I had caught. I told him that the fucking fish were not biting. Chuck informed me that he had caught four trout and they were cleaned and ready to be cooked. He had built a fire outside the cabin and by now there should be coals just right to cook the fish. He suggested that we put the fish over the coals to cook and while they were cooking that we could take a bath in the river. After shivering from the thought, I agreed that he had a good plan.

After Chuck had gotten his bath soap and a washcloth, we waded into about a foot of the cold water. Both of lay down in the water just long enough to get wet. When we stood up, steam was coming off our bodies because we were so much warmer than the water. Chuck applied soap all over my body and then I did the same to him. We both lower ourselves back into the cold water to rinse off the soap. In total we had taken our bath in less than five minutes and were swatting each other’s rears on the way back to the cabin.

We went into the cabin that was really warm because Chuck had added a lot of wood to the stove when he put the fish on to cook. Chuck took me in his arms and held me real close until we began to get warm after our bath. He looked into my eyes and asked “Would you fuck me tonight?” I told him I would be happy to do anything he wanted to do providing he could get me hard again. Chuck replied that he thought he could manage that as he grasped my cock and winked at me. I had never had anyone wink at me as much as Chuck did. It really was so personal and a turn on for me and his big smile was so comfortable and effortless.

We ate our dinner and especially enjoyed the fish even though we did not have any seasoning. We had cleaned up after the meal and Chuck put some coffee on the stove and we decided to take a walk before the sun went down. With our arms around each other we went up on top of a ridge overlooking the cabin, beaver dam and meadow below. I could not believe the peace and serenity we were experiencing. By this time being nude was no problem to either of us. I was modest at first but now it had become a convent and a very natural thing to do. I of course knew that I would be modest with any one except Chuck. Both of our bodies and privates were exposed and I was enjoying the feast of being able to look and admire his beautiful features. As we on our way back to the cabin, I told Chuck that I did not want this to end and I did not want to leave him in the morning. He stopped me and put his arms around me and hugged me and told me that he felt the same way but that we would be having some more days off in a few weeks and that maybe we could meet here again. Another one of those damn winks and I was feeling better.

By the time we reached the cabin we both were chilly and glad to get back. Chuck pored us a cup of coffee and we sat down on our bedrolls. We talked about our families, our universities, and our hopes in the future. During our conversation we both learned that neither one of us had ever had a long-term sexual relationship and as a matter of fact that neither one of us had ever had many sexual encounters of any kind. Both of us had tried dating girls but always knew from early childhood that we were gay and dating the opposite sex was a waste of time. As we were drinking the last of the coffee, Chuck began talking about his university and how dissatisfied he was with the department in which he was majoring. Then he said I have heard that your university has a great department in my major. He paused for a moment and asked, “What would you think about my transferring to your university and for us to be roommates”. I answered that it would be great –but you would have to keep your clothes on because we would always be having sex all the time and I would flunk out of school. We both laughed and Chuck said that he was really going to give it some serious thought and check into the possibility.

Chuck and I went outside to relieve ourselves before turning in for the night. Before we came back inside the cabin, Chuck put his hands up to his mouth and yelled out, “Bear! Hear this—You had your chance last night---Tonight is my night with this big stud”. We both were laughing when we came back into the cabin. Chuck went over and cleared off the crudely made log table and took it over and used it to wedge the door shut. He told me that the barricade would not keep the bear out but would slow him down. I put some more wood in the stove and we crawled into our bedrolls.

I was lying on my stomach and Chuck began to gently rub my neck and shoulders. He asked if I minded for him to give me a massage. I told him I certainly did not mind. He laughed and told me that the idea of giving me a massage was just an excuse to feel my body and my smooth skin. He liked the feeling of my mussels, skin, and liked my body odour. He thought by touching me that he could better remember how I look Chuck was very good at giving massages and when he was finished, both of us had stiffs. Chuck straddled my back and his cock was sliding up and down the crack of my rear as he leaned over and was gently biting my ear lobe.

Chuck instructed me to turn over on my back so he could suck on my dick and get it ready to fuck him. He again straddled me and his asshole was in my face and he was taking my dick down his throat. I begin to play with his asshole with my tongue and it was no time before I could stick my tongue an inch or so up his anus. He had gotten me to the point of nearing a climax. He rolled over on his back, lifted up his legs and said “Give it to me stud”. I got on my knees, pulled his legs up on my shoulders and he raised his butt and was ready to be fucked. Chuck screamed, “Hey World---I am going to be screwed”. Then he told me to start putting my cock in but to watch his mouth. I should stop pushing it in when the head of my penis started coming out of his mouth because he may in the excitement bit it off. I slapped his butt and he said, “Man, That feels great---Now bit my royal ass”. I told him to shut up because if I lost my concentration that I may loose my erection. He told me that would be all right that it would just give him the pleasure of getting it hard again. I spit in my hand and applied it to his asshole and continue to apply spit until I could slide three of my fingers in. Then I put spit on my rod and it went in all the way. I begin to slowly fuck him and he began to moan and move his ass up and down. I noticed that when I was all the way in his hole that I was hitting his nuts that were hanging down. I told him hold his low hangers up before they got crushed. He reached down with one hand holding his nuts and with the other hand began masturbating while I was fucking him. I was fucking him real fast and hard and my nuts were bouncing off his ass. He was tightening and loosening his asshole sending spasms through my cock. Chuck asked me if I thought I could fuck him all night. He said it was feeling so good. I laughed and said I don’t think it would be a good idea since you have some hiking ahead of you tomorrow. He told me that I was right but he did want me to send a large enough load up his ass that he could taste it in his mouth. I gave him another slap and continued to bang his ass with my now engorged cock. He begins to say “Yea, Yea, Yea” so I assumed that I was hitting his prostrate. The way he was moaning and tightening his asshole, I thought that he was about to reach an orgasm. I told him that he better not cum because I wanted him to cum in my mouth. He laughed and told me that when he felt like cumin that he would wonder what it would be to be a female and the whole idea was so disgusting to him that his desire to shoot went away. Another slap on the rear and I push my cock all the way in his ass and then pull all the way out and ram it in again. As I continued to fuck him and he was jerking himself, I leaned over and kissed him and our tongues were battling each other to get into each other’s mouths. I then move down and kissed, licked, and gently bit his nipples. Chuck shivered and said “Hey Man, How do you expect me you not cum when you are doing that to me?” This time I slapped him on his other buttock.

I had fuck him so long and hard, so many near orgasms, that I had just about exhausted myself. Chuck asked me, “Jesus Man, How long do you have to fuck someone before cumin?” I said, “You asked me to fuck you all night”. Chuck explained that he was only kidding me and for me to let go when I was ready. I was ready and I fucked him with all the energy I had left and I shot load after load up his asshole. I could feel Chuck was also having a climax at the same time. I remained up his ass and continued to slowly fuck him until I was no longer steady and had to lie down and recover. I removed his legs from my shoulders as my dick eased out of his hole. I bent over and licked up his cum off his stomach and chest and moved up and kissed him depositing some of his cum into his mouth.

I lay down on his stomach and he put both arms and both legs around me and started rocking back and forth. He apologized for cumin when I had asked him to wait. I told him that it was all right because right now I was too exhausted to do anything. He put both of his hands on my head and ran his fingers thru my hair as he was telling me that no one had ever fucked him the way I had and he was never so gratified. I scooted my body off of him leaving my head and chest on his chest and I reached down and held his flaccid dick. While Chuck was still running his fingers thru my hair, he said, “Honey, It is still there and in a few minutes it will be loaded again”. I let go his dick for a moment while I slapped his butt again.

To get a little more comfortable I moved off Chuck’s chest and lay down on my back. Chuck turned on his side facing me and put his arm under my neck with his hand holding my shoulder. He began to kiss and lick my ear until it began to tickle and I move over a little bit. He reached down with his other hand and was playing with my soft dick and I also had a hold of his. Chuck whispered in my ear, “You know what, you are a lot more fun than my horse”. I let go of his dick and started to swat him again but he grabbed my hand and returned it to his semi hard dick. He kissed me on the cheek and told me that his reservoir was once again full of cum and anytime I wanted that his dick was ready for another round. Then he told me that I was probably sleepy and if so I should go to sleep. He was not sleepy and wondered if it would bother me if he played with my cock while I was asleep. I told him that I did not think it would bother me but I would not guarantee that I could keep it hard while I was asleep. He said it did not make any difference. He enjoyed playing with it while it was soft and being hard just was an extra bonus. I told him that I thought I would go to sleep but if I woke up in the middle of the night would he be upset if I gave him a blowjob while he was asleep. He told me to go for it but he probably would wake up and enjoy my efforts to please him. I fell asleep and several times during the night I would wake up just enough to know that Chuck would be jacking me off and I was still holding on to his now fully erected prick.

Just before daybreak I woke up and both of us were still holding each other’s cocks. Chuck was sound asleep and snoring softly. I carefully lifted my head off his arm and moved down and took his dick into my mouth. I swirled my tongue around his head and then began to lick the shaft. Chuck began to moan and moved around a little. Just as I started towards trying to suck and play with his balls that hanging low between his legs, he moved his legs wide apart giving me access not only to his balls but the area between his scrotum and asshole. I took full advantage of this opportunity and I knew from the sounds that Chuck was making that I was causing him pleasure even though he was asleep. I move back to his cock and took it all the way in my mouth that caused him to really moan loudly and to start humping my face. I backed off and only had the head in my mouth and with my hand around his shaft I started to stroke in unison to my sucking his dickhead and part of his shaft. Chuck woke up and said, “What a pleasant way to wake up”. Then he told me turn around so he could get to my dick that he had been wanting to give me a blowjob all night.

Our lust for each other was ever evident and with Chuck playing with me most of the night I was primed and ready for great oral or any other kind of sex. Both of us were really getting with it and we just could not get enough of sucking each other. Chuck pulled away from me a moment and told me to suck his fucking dick hard that he was about to cum. I released Chuck’s dick and told him that I was also about to shoot. Chuck had a grip on my buttock and was pulling me in rapid motion towards him while he had my dick deep in his throat. Because his grip was getting tighter I knew he was nearing ejaculation. I reached around and inserted my finger all the way in his anus and began finger fucking and massaging his prostrate while orally taking him as far as I could. My finger detected that Chuck was nearing his peak and that there was no holding back and then he began to shoot. I could feel the cum hitting way down my throat and I was swallowing just as fast as I could but he just kept on cumin. His climax spurred on my climax and I was just exploding load after load. We kept on sucking each other until both of us were completely dry and began to loose our erection. Chuck rose up and asked me, “Where in the hell did all that cum come from? It was if you had been saving it up for months”. Then he said, “I have not finished with you yet” and returned to sucking on my soft dick as I continued sucking his.

It started to rain and was coming down steadily. We were still mouthing each other dicks and each beginning to obtain another erection. I told Chuck that I did not know if I could cum again or not. He told me he could and he knew damn well that he could get me to cum. Neither one of us wanted to get out of bed so we continued to give oral sex to each other.

The inside of the cabin was a little chilly but not enough to be uncomfortable. The rain coming down set the mood for us to stay in bed and have sex. There was just one important problem. I badly needed to piss and I told Chuck that I was sorry but I had to go. Chuck informed that he also needed to go but did not want to go out in the rain. We decided that we would open the cabin door and piss out the door into the rain and maybe we would not get too wet. Chuck removed the log table that was a barricade for the door and we stood in the doorway pissing out in the rain. While I was pissing Chuck reached over and tried to stick his finger up my asshole. I let out a few words of profanity.

We quickly shut the door and I put some more wood in the stove and joined Chuck in the bedrolls. Chuck put his arms around me and asked for forgiveness. He said he just had a naughty finger that he sometimes could not control. We were lying side-by-side just looking at each other’s eyes. Chuck winked at me again and I told him that fucking wink of his had gotten him to a lot of trouble and if he kept it up to expect more trouble. I reached over took his limp cock in my hand and Chuck said that it was ready for action but suggested that we wait and complete our sex just before I had to leave.
We both agreed and got up and fixed breakfast.

After we had breakfast, finish the last of the coffee, and clean up, we put our arms around each other and just held each other for a long time without saying a word. We both pulled away from each other and again glaring into each other’s eyes for a long time and then I winked at Chuck. He said, “You Bastard” and whacked me on my rear.

Each of us packed our backpack and was ready to leave. Chuck had even packed his clothes and said that if I had to hike naked back to headquarters that he would hike naked until he almost reached the cowboy camp. Chuck had also left out his towel that he spread out on the dirt floor. He told me that he wanted me to give him one more blowjob and then he would give me one. He did not want us to do it in unison because he wanted the recipient to just concentrate on the pleasure he was receiving and not be distracted by wondering if he was giving pleasure to the other. He wanted to know if I wanted to be first to receive or if I wanted him to be first. Without hesitation I dropped to my knees on the towel and preformed oral sex on Chuck. After his ejaculation, he took me by the shoulders and helped me to my feet and gave me a long kiss. Then he got on his knees and gave me oral sex. He got up and wrapped his arms around me as my body was trembling. After we had kissed once more, Chuck said he would let me know when he would have some time off again and we agreed to meet here. I told him I would be looking forward towards another great time with him. I asked him if the next time we were going to run around naked. He looked at me, smiled and winked.

As I was putting on my hiking boots, backpack and raincoat, I told Chuck that I sure hoped that it would be raining at the headquarters when I got there. With my poncho on maybe no one will ever no that I came back naked. Chuck told me that if it wasn’t raining to walk in with my head up and announce that you were returning from a nudist colony and not give any further explanation. I kissed and hugged Chuck and as I was walking towards the door, He said that he hardly recognized me with my poncho on and that I looked better in the nude. I reached the door and turned around, smiled and gave Chuck a wink and quickly ran out into the rain and started my hike back home.

It was still raining we I got to the bunkhouse so no one ever knew that I had been naked for several days in the high country. Chuck and I meet at the log cabin two more times during the summer and we picked up each time were we left off previously. At the end of the summer, both Chuck’s and my boss called us into their office and told us that there would be a full time job waiting for us after graduation. Both my and Chuck’s bosses were going to retire and we had been selected to replace them. Chuck did transfer to my university and we were roommates until we graduated. Chuck and I accepted the positions at the ranch. We both hold top management positions on the ranch. The owner and his wife decided to move to Florida and requested that Chuck and I live in their beautiful six bedroom furnished home, since we were in complete charge of operating the ranch. Chuck and I have been together for seven years. With the authority I have with my position, I sent a repair crew to the old log cabin and many needed repairs were made including a bear and chipmunk proof door. Together, we both (naked) still visit the old log cabin as often as possible.

*******************************

Author's Note:

Chuck graduated with the highest grade point average in history of the university in his major of Animal Husbandry. Chuck contributed his success to me because of our great sex and always being sexually satisfied. At least I am good at something.

[unoponcho]

Seduction or Temptation

By Kevin


Ken was a tall handsome man in his mid thirties who had faithfully exercised to maintain an enviable physique. He had received his Bachelors degree. Served in the military during the Korean War and had received a number of metals and commendations before his discharge. He returned to his university and earned his Master’s degree.

From a very early age, Ken knew that he was gay but because of the circumstances at that time, pressure from society, family and friends, he decided that he had no other choice than to get married and do the normal family thing. In the profession that he had chosen, being gay was not an alternative choice. After receiving his Master’s he married a very beautiful lady and they had a son and daughter. Ken had convinced himself that he could suppress his homosexual desires and make his marriage work. He had always been a very devoted husband and father. He loved his children and respected and admired his wife, despite having some difficulty having sex with her, had always had been faithful.

Ken had a position as a University Administrator with a large University. He had worked very hard to achieve the status and responsibilities that he had obtained. He understood without a doubt, that any hint or incriminating evidence of homosexual involvement on his part would cause him to loose his job. Ken was responsible for the operation of a number of recreational facilities on campus including the University Union and the programs and activities that it sponsored. Among these facilities was an outdoor Olympic size swimming pool with diving boards and a high platform for diving.

The pool was located just outside of Ken’s second floor office and the high platform was about eye level and ten feet from his office window. Students, staff, and faculty and their families had access to use the swimming pool all day Saturday and Sunday and Monday through Friday except from 1:00 PM to 3:00 PM when it was reserved for the University’s Swimming and Diving Team.

On Ken’s staff was a young man, whose name was Buck. Buck was the manager of the swimming pool and responsible for maintenance, operation and hiring and training of the lifeguards. In the Athletic Department was a man named Robert who was the coach for the University Swimming and Diving Team. Buck and Robert worked very closely together to coordinate the teams’ needs and activities.

In the basement below the manager’s office and dressing rooms was a mechanical room for the swimming pool and a workout facility used by the swimming and diving team.

When Ken was seated at his desk he could observe all the activities in and around the swimming pool. From his office, the view of semi-nude bodies was an eye feast whether straight or gay. The swimming and diving team were especially attractive because everyone wore very brief and thin swimming suits and had worked hard to shape their bodies. As well as the pool other facilities for which he was responsible also provided constant involvement with good-looking people. Opportunities for sexual relationships were a daily temptation to him. For a person who was gay and trying to be straight, life for Ken was a living Hell.

One day, Ken began to notice this very good-looking well-built diver on the diving team on the high diving platform and he kept staring at him through his office window. This young man was waiting his turn to dive as there was another diver preparing to make his dive. When it came time for the young man to dive, he gave Ken an okay signal with his hand as if to say, “watch me make my dive”. Ken did not think much about it and tried to concentrate on the work he was doing at his desk. A few minutes later the young man was again on the platform strutting around while looking at Ken and then he stopped and started rubbing his crutch and was getting an erection, which was easy to see because of his thin and brief swim suit. Quickly he turned around and made his dive. Ken’s cock was getting hard but he again returned to his work at hand and tried to think about something else besides this beautiful creature outside his window. The young man reappeared on the platform and when Ken looked out he saw the young man bend over as if he were exercising, touching his toes with his ass facing the window. As the young diver was bending over, he reached around and gripped his buttocks and pulled them apart. He stood up and turned around to see if Ken was watching and smiled real big just before he dove off the platform.

Ken realized that this young man was flirting or teasing him. Ken’s cock was fully aroused and standing straight out in his pants. He waited a few minutes hoping that he would loose his erection and he could then close the window blinds. His cock would not cooperate and remained stiff, so he got up anyway and went to the window. The young man was on the platform again and saw Ken’s hard cock. He smiled and gave Ken the thumbs up sign and proceeded with his dive. After Ken closed the blinds and returned to his desk, he thought to himself, “That bastard is not going to get me to do anything that will get me in trouble”. Ken tried to forget and ignore the whole incident.

The next day, the young diver again appeared on the diving platform and Ken looked up just in time to see him pull down his swimming suit, take a hold of his exposed dick and shake it, pretending to be adjusting himself before making the next dive. Ken’s dick immediately became hard as he saw the young man but he got up to shut his blinds but the young man saw once again that Ken’s penis was stiff. Ken closed the blinds and made a promise to himself that tomorrow before he went to lunch that he was going to close the blinds and they were going to stay closed all afternoon.

The next day Ken did remember to close the blinds but he could not restrain himself from taking a peek to see if the diver was using the platform. Sure enough he was there looking at the office window but unaware that Ken had seen him.

The following day, around 3:30 p.m., Ken received a call from Buck who told him that the sump pump for the swimming pool was not working properly and wanted Ken to come take a look at it. Buck thought that it would need to be replaced and Ken had to get information from the pump to place the order. Ken grabbed a pen and pad but before he left the office he looked out the window to see if the young diver was anywhere around. There was no sign of him and Ken went down to the pool to meet Buck. As Buck and Ken headed towards the mechanical room in the basement, Ken described the young diver to Buck and asked him if he knew his name. Buck replied, “Oh, that’s Carl”.

They went down the stairs opened the door to the basement and just to their right was another door to the mechanical room. They could hear that one of the swimmer or divers was using some of the equipment in the workout room but they did not pay much attention and went directly to the pump. It was obvious to both of them that it had to be replaced. Buck looked at his watch and asked Ken if he could leave him to get the information that he needed as he had six or eight students in his office that he was to interview as lifeguards. He would be tied up for a couple of hours. Buck left and it only took Ken a few minutes to get the information he needed.

Ken came out of the mechanical room, locked the door and turned around to go out the other door. Carl was standing in front of him naked with a huge hard. Carl started towards Ken and Ken began backing up asking, “Carl, what in the hell are you doing?”
Carl kept moving closer to Ken and soon had him pinned to the wall. Carl put his face in front of Ken’s and said, “So, you know my name? You want my body and a taste of my cock the same as I want yours.”

Ken told Carl, “I am not going to have anything to do with you. If we were caught, you would be expelled and I would loose my job.” Ken was trying to get away but Carl started to undo his pants. Carl said, “Man, you do not have a choice. If you don’t have sex with me, I am going to tell my diving coach that you came on to me”.

Carl managed to get Ken’s pants and shorts down around his ankles and Ken’s dick was sticking straight out. Ken reached for his pants and shorts saying, “This is too risky”. Carl said that he had locked the door from the inside and if anyone tried to enter they would have to go back upstairs to get a key from Buck, giving them plenty of time to get dressed.

Ken was still trying to reach for his pants as Carl knelt down and put his knees on them and took Ken’s throbbing dick in his mouth and began oral sex. Ken was certainly enjoying the sensation and thrill but was apprehensive of the whole situation. Ken begin to remember his gay encounters before marriage and realized what it was like to have sex with a man. Ken began to relax and was enjoying Carl giving him oral sex. Carl certainly knew how to tease and suck a dick. It was evident that he had had a lot of practice. Carl was using one hand to masturbate and the other hand was alternately played with Ken’s nuts and stuck a finger up his asshole. Carl being a pro recognized when Ken was about to shoot and would back off until his urge had subsided. Ken almost reached a climax several times and had to bit his tongue to keep from screaming.

Carl stood up and said, “Okay, You cocksucker, suck my dick”. Ken reached down and took hold of Carl’s enlarged endowment and stroked it for a few minutes. Ken was thinking to himself that it had been a long time since he had enjoyed holding a man’s erection. Ken knelt down and took Carl’s dick all the way down his throat. Carl moaned real loud and Ken automatically remembered how to suck a guy off. Ken was enjoying what he was doing and was relaxing and getting into the whole sexual encounter. After giving head to Carl for sometime, Carl pulled away and said, “He was about to cum, but he wanted to be fucked first”.

Carl took Ken by the hand and led him to one of the exercise benches. He leaned over the bench with his ass facing Ken and told him to fuck him good and hard. Ken spit into his hand and began to work the spit up Carl’s asshole. After getting Carl ready he spit in his hand again and put it on his cock and started inserting it into Carl. Carl was twisting and bucking as Ken’s dick buried itself as far as it would go. Ken then proceeded to fuck Carl. Setting up a steady rhythm, he was very aware that Carl was pleased to be getting a good fucking. Ken reached around Carl sliding his hand underneath him and took a hold of his cock. Carl said, “Careful man, I am just about to shoot”. Ken said, “Good, I have plowed your ass long enough. Get ready to receive my cum”. Ken fucked Carl more rapidly, his body began to tense and he started shooting. As Ken began releasing his load, Carl was cumin in Ken’s hand.

Carl stood up and said, “I knew all a long that you would be a great sex partner. Now, don’t tell me that you did not enjoy yourself”. Ken smiled and reached down and pulled up his shorts and pants.

As they were going out the door, Carl asked, “When are we going to do this again?” Ken lowered his head and quietly said, “We will see”. When they got up the stairs, Buck stuck his head out of his office and asked Ken “What have you been doing down there? I thought you had left a long time ago.” Ken replied, “Oh, Carl has been showing me how to use some of the weight lifting equipment”

All the way home, Ken was having mixed emotions about his sexual experience and he was feeling real guilty about having cheated on his wife. It bothered him so much that he was unable to sleep. As he was lying in bed he decided that as much has he had enjoyed being with Carl that he must never let it happen again.

The next day, he was still upset that he had betrayed himself and his wife. Off and on he tried to figure out how to prevent it ever happening again. That morning Carl’s coach, Robert, came to his office and asked Ken’s secretary if he could speak to him. When his s secretary came in to tell him that Robert was outside and wanted to talk Ken’s immediate thought was that the bastard had told his coach that they had sex.

Robert entered, they exchanged a few pleasantries and then Robert started telling Ken the reason for his visit. He explained that for several days past that Carl was not concentrating on his dives and was not diving up to his capabilities. The swimming and diving tournaments were to start in a week. Carl was a senior and was the best diver he had. He could not figure out why he was so distracted and diving so poorly. Robert said that he had been watching Carl very carefully and he thought he had finally figured out Carl’s problem. “Carl is gay, he does not know that I am aware of his homosexuality. He likes older men. He has in the past made approaches to other coaches from other schools during tournaments. The competitions coming up will be his last before he graduates in a few weeks. I have observed his actions on the diving platform and I think he has a crush on you. I am asking you, if someway, you could avoid being in your office during diving practice until we go to our next competition.”

Ken agreed to be out of his office. Robert told about two of his best swimmers that he knew to be gay and they were roommates but they did not let their affair interfere with their swimming. Robert thanked Ken before leaving his office. After Robert left, Ken set down at his desk and felt relieved. He was aware that Robert knew that Carl was gay and that if Carl follows through with his threat that he made a pass or had sex with him that Robert would most likely not believe him. So, he did not feel so much pressure anymore. He only had to avoid Carl.

About eight weeks passed and Ken had not seen or heard from Carl. Robert showed up at Ken’s office and reported that Carl came in first at all the tournaments including the State and did real well at the nationals but was not one of the medal winners. Ken shook Robert’s hand and told him, “Congratulations, Carl had a good coach”. Robert thanked him and left.

The next day, the day before Carl’s graduation it, was late afternoon, his secretary had gone home and Carl walked into Ken’s office. Ken was surprised to see him. He was glad in a way to see him, yet he had reservations. Ken stood up, shook Carl’s hand and congratulated him on his success at the tournaments. Carl looked surprised and asked, “How did you know?” Ken told him that Robert had been in and told him. They both sat down and Carl began to apologize for his behaviour on the diving platform and in the workout room. He said that he had acted like very immature ass and regretted making threats forcing him to have sex with him. Ken said, “Forget it. No harm done”. Carl looked Ken in the eye and told him that he did enjoy their brief sexual encounter and he thought that Ken had equally enjoyed their time together. Ken did not answer but smiled at Carl.

Carl got up and started to leave. He turned around and asked Ken, “Would you please attend my graduation tomorrow? None of my family are going to be there and I would really like for someone that I really care for to be with me.” Tears were coming into Carl’s eyes. Ken came around his desk and hugged him and assured him that he would be at his graduation if that was what he wanted. Carl reached over and quickly kissed Ken on the lips and put his arms around Ken and held him real close. They both obtained a hard and their dicks were rubbing each other through their pants. Ken pulled back and told Carl, “Not again! I really thought that I could resist you”.

Ken closed and locked his office door and turned around and Carl started removing Ken’s clothes as Ken was tugging on Carl’s. They stood in the middle of the office naked and held each other. Then Ken backed up pulling Carl to his desk. Ken sat down on the edge of his desk, spread his legs and pulled Carl in between. They kissed each other, as they stroked each other’s dicks.

Ken reached around and picked up the phone and dialed. He said, “Hi, It’s me. A couple of really big things have come up at the office and I will be late getting home. Bye.” After Ken had hung up the phone, Carl said, “Yeah, something big and real hard came up”. They both laughed and kissed each other again. Carl started to kiss and licked Ken’s neck, then nipples and on down to the ultimate goal that he desired to take into his mouth. Ken leaned back on the desk and was overcome by the erotic feelings and lust that Carl was causing. Carl was sucking and using his tongue to cause as much excitement as he could for Ken. Both were exhibiting their pleasure with soft moaning, groaning, and body movements. Carl would deep throat Ken’s pulsating cock and then completely release it and take it all the way down again. Ken said, “Man you are so hot. You are making me feel so good. Please! Suck my dick more”.

Sometime later, Carl stood up and kissed Ken and asked, “Can I have my turn?” They switched places and Ken lowered himself and began oral sex on Carl. Carl took a hold of Ken’s head and began running his fingers through his hair and then started to pull Ken’ head towards his dick and started to fuck him in the mouth. Ken moved his hands around and grabbed Carl’s muscular buttocks and encouraged his fucking motions. Carl pushed Ken away and said, “I am about to unload and wanted to wait and come up your ass”.

They switched positions again and Ken bent over and laid his upper body on the desk with his ass exposed for Carl to fuck. Carl rimed Ken’s ass until Ken was begging Carl to ram his cock into him. Carl slowly pushed his cock into Ken’s asshole and began to pound away plowing in and out of his hole. Carl proved that he was as good on top as he was on bottom. He was hitting Ken’s right spots and Ken was asking for more deeper and harder. Carl was soon popping his cork and cum was spewing deep into Ken. Carl keep on until he had deposited the last drop and was completely drained of cum as well as energy. Carl withdrew his cock that was all too rapidly becoming soft. He turned around and sat on the desk and Ken joined him.

They put their arms on each other’s shoulders and kissed. Carl leaned over and whispered in Ken’s ear and said, “I am going to get my graduation gift in just a moment after I have rested a bit”. They smiled at each other and Carl put his hand on Ken’s dick and began to gently stroke. In a few moments, Ken told Carl, “You had better stop stroking that thing, or I am going to shoot off, and my cum will be all over the ceiling”. Carl removed his hand and asked, ”May I have my graduation present now? He went all the way down on Ken’s pride and joy and Ken softly yelled “Fuck, Fuck, You don’t know what you are doing to me”. Carl set up a steady motion of moving his head up and down and around while sucking and licking Ken’s big engorged dick.

Carl was aware that Ken was nearing his climax and he reached between his legs and with one hand he was massaging Ken’s nuts and with a finger on the other hand he had up Ken’s asshole massaging his prostrate. Ken could not delay his ejaculation any longer and let go a steady stream of cum deep into Carl’s throat. Carl continued sucking until Ken dick became flaccid.

Carl stood up and pulled Ken up off the desk. They kissed each other and held each other for a good length of time. Carl lowered his hands and grasped Ken’s butt and squeezed real tight and told Ken, “Now that was good sex especially for an old man”. Ken whacked him on the rear and they laughed.

Ken told Carl that he had to get home and that he would see him at the graduation ceremonies tomorrow. They got dressed, kissed and hugged each other again before they left the office.

On the way home, Ken was again feeling guilty but decided that Carl was going to be his last gay sex encounter. He was going to have to straighten up and deal with his problems the best way he could. He certainly would never reveal his recent indiscretions with his wife or anyone else. He knew that his wife and children loved and respected him and with God’s help maybe he would be strong enough to be the man that society expected him to be even though it was not his preferred sexual preference.

Ken went to the graduation ceremonies and saw Carl receive his diploma. Afterwards, Carl joined Ken and expressed his gratitude to him for being there. Carl asked Ken if he would walk him to his car and Ken agreed. Upon arriving at Carl’s car, Ken noticed that it was packed with all of Carl’s belongings and that he was ready to go home. Carl put his arm around Ken’s shoulders and gave him a brief hug. He shook Ken’s hand and told him that he was wonderful handsome dude and it was great knowing him. Carl started backing away towards his car door and in a very low voice said, “Thanks again for coming to my graduation and thank you for cumin last night. It was the best graduation gift that I will get and may be the only one.” Carl got into his car and Ken waved good-bye to him as he drove off.

In the future, will Ken be able to resist temptation and seduction?

[jakect]

Kevin excellent story keep it up (no pun intended)
Is this a true story?

[jakect]

Kevin you are very talented this story is awesome. I had to stop twice to relieve myself.

[unoponcho]

jakect

Kevin excellent story keep it up (no pun intended)
Is this a true story?


Yes, it is based on a true story with a few liberties taken. Such as I was never tall and my name was not Ken.

Kevin


Autolycus

Oh, to have an office ovelooking that swimming pool!

Great stuff! [Again no pun intended]



For three years I enjoyed my office and I miss it.

Kevin

[unoponcho]

Thanks jakect. I have just recently started to write stories. I am trying to learn and improve. Your encouragement is appreciated very much. I am glad you enjoyed the story.

Twice to relieve yourself---I must have accomplished something. I wished that I could have been there in person to have witness my success. Ha, Ha.

Kevin

[lunarus]

Very VERY Good! Keep up the good work Kevin. Loved the story. If you need any help just ask, but I really dind't see where you would need it. :=D:

[unoponcho]

College Roommates

By Kevin

Located in a small town in the southeast part of Texas is a College. The students and faculty are very friendly and the enrolment is small enough for everyone to know each other. On campus are two large dormitories for the female students and four smaller ones for the male students.

The male dormitories are two storied with the rooms are arranged in pairs so sharing a bathroom. When using the bathroom and wanting privacy, you can lock the door to the other room but need to remember when leaving to unlock it again so the occupants of the other room can gain access to the facility. The doors to the bathroom also have locks on the inside of the room so that it is secure and prevent others from coming into your room as, otherwise anyone could gain access by going through the bathroom instead of having to go out into the hall. Each room has two large closets, twin beds, a lavatory with a mirror, built in drawers for clothes and two large tables providing space for PC’s and studying.

Al was my roommate and we shared our bathroom with Hoss and Bill our next-door neighbours. Al was a “gym rat” and had been working out for several years. He had a very hard well-defined body with a six-pack and just enough muscles to be really attractive. He had jet-black hair, bluish green eyes, no hair on his chest but a trail of hair from his naval to his private area. Al was five foot eleven inches the same height as me. Al and I were both were due to graduate in four weeks providing we successfully completed our theses and passed our final exams. Al was a Physical Education major and I was majoring in History.

Hoss was big man with big shoulders. He had been reared on a farm/ranch where he was used to manual labor such as lifting hay, harvesting watermelons, etc. As a result he had a muscular neck, chest, arms and legs. He had blonde hair and a covering of blonde hair on his chest, stomach, legs and arms. His weight was in proportion to his six foot two inch height. Hoss was a senior majoring in Agriculture and was also due to graduate in four weeks time.

Bill was the complete opposite to Hoss. He was about five foot six inches; well proportioned for his height, reddish-brown hair, smooth skin with no body hair but a few freckles, baby face. He needed to shave only once a week. Bill came from a big city and hated the small town we were in. Bill’s outstanding features were his big smile and very attractive nipples the size of a quarter. Bill was a senior majoring in Business and he was preparing to take over his father’s business shortly after he graduated in four weeks.

From the time that Al and I moved in together, we were very comfortable and compatible. We both slept in the nude, and we felt at ease being either nude or wearing just our briefs while in the room together. We were both having to study long hours and were having difficulty writing our theses. The dormitory was extremely noisy so we often use earplugs or would sometimes go to bed real early, setting our alarm to wake us at 1:00 am when the dorm was quiet and we could study or use our computers in peace. On such occasions we never bothered to dress as we felt it unnecessary. There were those occasions when one or the other of us would display an erection but nothing was ever said.

Early one morning around 4:00am, Al and I had been studying for several hours as usual. Al got up and made coffee and brought a cup to me. He said, “It is time for a break”. I took my coffee and set down on my bed. Al came over, set down next to me and asked, “Why don’t you date girls?” I was rather shocked by his question and I repeated the same question to him. Al looked at me and lowered his head and said, “I hope that what I am about to say is not going to come between our friendship but I prefer men. I am gay”. I put my coffee down, and started to smile and I broke out into laughter. Al did not know how to take my reaction. He said, “Do you want me to move out?” I put my arms around his shoulders and told him that I was also gay. Al turned around and was hugging me and told me, “We are a pair of fools. I have wanted to have sex with you since I first met you and moved in here three months ago. We have wasted all this time together”.

Al got on his knees and started to give me oral sex. Somewhere along the way, Al had learned how to suck a man’s dick. It was in no time at all that I was having the most delightful sensations and I was so excited that my buttocks had pulled the sheets up between my ass. He was moving up and down my cock taking in all the way and releasing it from his mouth and going all the way down on it again over and over. I looked down and saw Al’s erection and I could not wait to get it into my mouth. I pulled him up and told him to lock the bathroom door, cut off the lights and to come to bed with me.

Al crawled into my bed and we positioned ourselves so that we could suck each other’s ridged cocks. He was sucking my cock and I was sucking on his like we were trying to make up for time that we had lost. Al was licking the head of my cock and then he put it in his warm mouth and twirling his tongue around it. I got real tense and he reached over and began to massage my back and my butt. I was moaning and groaning from the excitement and thrill and he pulled off me for a moment and told me that I was going to wake up our neighbors. I began to concentrate on giving him satisfaction and it was not long before he too was moaning and groaning. I slapped him on the rear and he realized that he was making too much noise and started to laugh while still holding my dick down his throat. I released his cock from my mouth and began to lick and suck his balls and he started moaning again and I slapped his rear again and started to lick between his balls and his legs and then took his cock all the way down my throat. His cock was getting bigger and harder and was jumping in my throat. As he was about to ejaculate he rose up and told me that he was about to cum. I began to go up and down on his cock real fast. Al had increased his speed on my cock and I was also almost ready to release my load. Al’s cock had tasted so good and I was ready to taste his cum. Al started to face fuck me and he began to shoot his cum into my mouth and throat. He shot four or five huge globs and for some moments I did not think he was ever going to quit pumping cum into my mouth. When he had deposited all the cum he could muster, he relaxed his body and began to bring me to a climax in full earnest and it did not take long for me to release my load. When I did shoot my wad, he began to moan and I whacked him on the rear again.

We both were laughing and got up and set on the side of my bed with our arms wrapped around each other’s shoulders. We were telling each other how much we had enjoyed our first sexual encounter as through the window we observed the sun was coming up.

Al asked when my first class was that day and I told him, ‘In three hours.’ He said that was the same as his first class and reached for the clock to set the alarm so as to give us a good thirty minutes to get to class. He told me that we could meet after class and have breakfast together. He put his arms around my neck, kissed me on my forehead. We lay down on my bed and as he wrapped his arms and legs around me we fell into a sound sleep.

For the several days following, Al and I had sex at least once during the daytime but sometimes as many as two or three times during the day or night. Al had not slept in his bed but in my bed with me during this period of time. We discovered that we both enjoyed being both top and bottom. We each enjoyed giving and receiving blowjobs but also enjoyed fucking each other. During these few days we realized that we were more relaxed and were able to better concentrate on our studies and we were making real progress on completing our theses.

One evening Al and I came into the room after having supper together and we removed our clothes and set down at our desk to work on our theses. After a short time Al got up to piss. He came back into our room and said, “You want believe this, Hoss and Bill left their door to the bathroom open a crack and Hoss is fucking the hell out of Bill”.

I thought he was kidding me so I went to take a look. Sure enough, Bill was leaning over the foot of his bed and Hoss was behind him fucking his asshole. As I turned to go back into my room, Al was behind me and whispered into my ear, “Let’s go join them”. Just the thought of it caused both of us to have erections. Al returned to our room and got a tube of KY and smeared some on his hard cock and told me to follow him. As we slipped into their room, neither Hoss nor Bill was aware of our presence. Al walked up behind Hoss and grabbed his rear. Both Hoss and Bill were startled and Hoss screamed out, “You scared the shit out of me”. Al replied, “No problem, I going to replace your shit with my cock”. Hoss and Bill started to break away from each other but Al told them to continue what they were doing saying, ‘Joe and I are going to join your fucking party.’

I got on my knees on the bed with my stiff cock pointed near Bill’s face and asked him if he wanted to suck my cock. Bill looked up at me with this big smile and said, “I have been wanting to suck your beautiful big dick for a long time”. He put his hand on my cock and pulled me closer and began giving me oral sex while being fucked up the asshole by Hoss. In the meantime Al had put KY up Hoss’s asshole and had rammed his cock all the way in joining Hoss’s fucking motion. All of us were enjoying the pleasure of our sexual activity when Hoss said, “Holy Shit, I never have been screwed in the ass while I am fucking someone else. This is great. This is the ultimate. All I need now is for someone hanging from the ceiling fucking my face.”

Everyone laughed but quickly got back to the activity of servicing each other. Bill was giving my cock all kinds of pleasure and he was a good cocksucker. Actually Bill was not having to move his head up and down my nearing climax cock because of the fucking he was receiving was pulling his body back and forth while I remained still, my cock was going in and out of his mouth. I told Bill that he was really good and was making me to want to cum. Hoss said, “Yeah, Bill is good. I taught him how and he has had a lot of practice”. Then Hoss slapped Bill on the rear and said, “Bill, You must be in hog heaven with a cock up your ass, a cock in your mouth and I am jacking you off”. Bill just softly moaned never releasing my cock.

As I was nearing my climax, I told Bill that I was about to ejaculate and asked him if he wanted me to cum in his mouth. Hoss spoke up and said, “Hell man he would not have it any other way. Give it to him, man”. Hoss was a little bit late with his statement because I was spewing cum into Bill’s mouth and throat while Bill was moaning. I back away from Bill and I got off the bed and was moving into a position that I could replace Hoss’s hand and suck on Bill’s dick. As I moved into my new position, I looked at Al and he had his head way back with his eyes rolled back and I could tell that he was close to shooting his wad up Hoss’s ass. Hoss had his eyes closed and he also appeared to be enjoying the moment of near eruption.

Hoss removed his hand and I swallowed Bill’s cock. I was having a little difficulty because of my awkward position and because the fucking that Bill was receiving kept moving his body and penis but I did my best to keep in rhythm of the movement. Bill loudly said, “Fuck me harder, Hoss. I am about to give Joe a mouth full of cum”. Moments later Bill did exactly what he said he was going to do. I could not swallow fast enough and began to gag. After I had drained Bill dry, I pulled away from Bill and went behind Al and reached around and played with his tits while licking and biting his ear. That must have been all that it took for Al because he began to shoot deep into Hoss’s asshole that trigger Hoss to let go his sperm into Bill.

We all set down on the beds while everyone was recovering from a gruelling sexual experience. Hoss and Bill were surprised that Al and I were gay and we told them that we were surprised that they were gay. A comment was made by someone about the odds of four gay men being roommates and living next door to each other. As Al and I were leaving to go back to our rooms, Hoss said, “From here on, when Bill and I are having sex, we will make sure that our bath room door is cracked or maybe wide open”

Al and I took a shower together. We took turns in soaping each other and after rinsing off we held each other in our arms and enjoyed the hot water hitting our skin. We got out of the shower, dried each other off, and returned to our room this time not locking our side of the bathroom door.

Up until now Al and I really did not know much about Hoss and Bill, but we knew that after tonight that we would become better friends. Al and I put our naked butts down in the chair in front of our computers and went back to work.

The next evening, Al and I were again was at our computers and Bill and Hoss came into our room. Both of them were naked and they set down on the bed. Hoss said, “It’s all Bill’s fault for our visit. HE wants a repeat performance of last night”. Bill blushed and called Hoss “A fucking shithead”. I looked over at Al and he was getting an erection. He was embarrassed and got up and started towards the bathroom. Hoss jumped and stopped him and took a hold of Al’s dick and said, “Let me help you with that”. Hoss started to stroke Al’s cock and Al begins to stroke Hoss’s stiff rod.

Bill quickly moved towards where I was seated in my chair and took my cock into his mouth and began giving me head. Being full erect and enjoying Bill’s efforts to please me, I was feeling somewhat guilty that everyone’s cock was receiving attention except Bill. I pulled Bill up and we moved to my bed so that we could suck each other’s dick. I liked Bill’s dick almost as much as I like Al’s. Bill and I had not been having oral sex long before I became aware that Al was playing with my asshole and was applying KY up my hole. Hoss was on the other side of the bed. Al tossed the tube of KY to Hoss and he was giving Bill’s hole the necessary treatment for Hoss’s invasion. Before long Al had his big dick all the way up my ass and Hoss had his dick up Bill’s ass and they were fucking our butts. Bill and I continued our sucking each other’s dicks while being fucked. Everyone was in a lustful mood and really getting with the action that continued for a length of time.

Four adult males on a single bed was crowded and uncomfortable especially to Al and Hoss who had to make an effort to keep from falling off. Hoss was the first to pull out of Bill’s hole and stood up and said, “Al, this bed is to damn small. Let’s go into my bedroom. You fucked my ass last night and now I want to fuck yours”. As they were leaving Bill said, “Al, Hoss has an elephant size dildo in there. Don’t let him try to stick it up your asshole. No respectful queer would let anyone stick that thing up them”

Al and Hoss disappeared into Hoss’s room. Bill and I resumed giving pleasure to each other. We accomplished our mission very successfully with both of us having shot a full load down each other’s throat and continued to suck each other until we became flaccid. Both of us agreed that we were completely satisfied and that we just had enjoyable sex. We remained in the same position and Bill put his arm over me and gently patted my rear. Everything was real quiet in my room and we could hear the sounds of Hoss and Al still going after it.

Bill and I fell asleep and the next thing we knew was Hoss slapping Bill on the rear and telling him to get up and go to his own bed. Al said, “Goodnight Bill and you to Hoss. I am claiming my rightful position in bed with Joe”. Al set the alarm clock for 1:00AM, crawled into bed with me, put his arm over me a took a hold of my limp dick. We both went to sleep almost immediately.

***********


College roommates - Part II


The notice said, “Please do not disturb us for the next few days. We love you but we have to study”.

Al had typed the message on his computer and placed it on the door facing the inside of the bathroom. Al and I spent the weekend working on our theses only to taking out time to eat and a single sex break. By Sunday night we had our theses completed two weeks earlier than due and ready to turn in on Monday morning. I had to prepare for one final and Al had two finals coming up in two weeks time. At last, we began to feel the relief from the pressure that we had been experiencing.

Monday morning we turned in our masterpieces and waited to hear if they were acceptable by the faculty reviewing committee. Then we would have to go before the committee to defend our efforts. Monday afternoon it began to snow, something that is very unusual for that area. No one had expected such a change in the weather, so it was a complete surprise.

It snowed all night and the College cancelled all classes for two days. Al and I stayed in our room or in Hoss and Bill’s room pulling on our clothes only to go for our meals. The heat was turned up in both rooms so it was comfortable to be nude or in our briefs. Hoss and Bill had picked up our habit and they also had begun running around in their briefs or nude.

Hoss and Bill’s study load was heavy. Each of them had five finals coming up and end of term papers due shortly. They took advantage of the snow break and kept their noses in their textbooks and class notes. Only one time did the four of us get together for a quick sex session. The rest of the time Al and I took full advantage of the opportunity and made up for some of that time lost when we were together before learning that the other was gay. We had sex almost continually from early in the morning until late at night. By Thursday morning, when we went to class, our dicks were sore and had a welcome rest during the full day of lectures.

Friday morning Al and I were called in and were told that with a few minor changes, our theses had been accepted and we were to return that afternoon for the defense. By the time we returned we had made the minor changes and were both were successful in defending our work.

Even though it was against the rules to have alcohol in the dorm, after dinner Al bought a bottle of champagne and snuck it into our room. He went to Hoss and Bill’s room to find them studying. Al invited them to take a break and come to our room and have a glass of champagne with us. Hoss made a toast to Al and I congratulating us on our achievements. After Hoss and Bill finished drinking their champagne they excused themselves to return to their studies. As Bill was going into the bathroom he turned around and with a broad grin said, “don’t you guys fuck your brains out and loose all that knowledge you have up there!” Giving us another of his big winning smiles he shut the bathroom door behind him.

After Bill and Hoss left, Al and I finished off the bottle and straightway proceeded to ignore Bill’s parting warning. Al and I fucked and sucked each other until after midnight. Both of us had two ejaculations before we went to sleep holding each other’s limp tired pricks.

Al and I never seemed to get enough of having sex. The lust and desire for each other only went away for a few hours before we were ready to go at it all over again. We made sure that each day that the other was completely satisfied sexually.

The night before my final I stayed up and was cramming until past midnight. Al was asleep on the bed and was softly snoring. I was at my study desk, my earplugs in my ears and concentrating on what I was reading. All of a sudden I felt someone touching my relaxed cock. I scooted my chair back and discovered Bill had slipped into our room and was under my study table looking up and grinning at me. I removed my earplugs and asked what in the hell was he doing. He said, “Hoss and I just got through giving each other a blow job and he fell asleep. I could not sleep and was taking a piss when I saw your light still on. I am here to give you a blow job”. I told him that Al and I had sex twice during the day and I did not think I could get another erection. Bill said, “ I can not only get you to have another hard but I can get you hot enough that you will cum”.

He took my flaccid cock into his warm mouth and began to suck and lick. Within no time he had gotten me fully erect and I was thoroughly enjoying the sensation of his expert cocksucking. With my ass perspiring, the sweat made it easy for me to slide my bare ass back and forth in my chair. Bill got me hot and after he sucked me nearly to a climax he withdrew and started giving attention to my balls and working down towards my asshole. I raised my legs up and put my knees on the study table, scooting my ass forward on the chair, while Bill rimmed my asshole. He pulled my legs back down so my feet were touching the floor and he licked his finger and inserted it into my hole and began to finger fuck me as he sucked my cock down his throat.

Soon I let go of a big load of cum that I did not think was left in me. Bill looked up and said, “Thanks, I needed that. I told you I could make you cum”. I reached down and ran my finger around his big attractive nipple and gently pinched. Then I ran my fingers through his reddish brown hair and told him, “If you keep on sucking a guy’s dick like that you are going to loose your cute freckles”. Bill stood up, put his face real close to mine, looked into my eves, smiled real big and told me goodnight. He gave me a quick kiss on my lips, and turned towards Al who was sound asleep, blew him a kiss and quietly left the room.

The next morning, Al woke me up saying it was time to go take our exams. I had just one exam left and Al had two scheduled. I finished my exam and felt sure I had passed but I would be able to find out my grade early in the afternoon. I went to my room took a shower and waited for Al. I had fallen asleep and was awakened by him. He had straddled me on the bed still fully dressed and was bouncing up and down yelling, “ I passed those fucking exams. I know I did”. He lay down on top of my naked body and hugged me real tight. In a few minutes, he said, “I need to go to the gym and work out and when I get back I want you to get dressed when we will eat lunch and then take walk around the campus”. I knew that it would be at least an hour before Al returned and I went back to sleep. When Al came back I woke up as he was coming in the door. I jumped up to get dressed and he pushed back on the bed and told me to forget about the walk that it was pouring down rain but you do need to get your ass dressed and go for lunch.

After lunch it was still raining, Al and I returned to our room and we removed our clothes. He lay down beside me and pulled his leg up over me covering my cock and placing his head and chest on my chest. Then he began to play with and tease my nipple. Al had not taken a shower after his work out and I could smell his intoxicating male odors. He reached up and kissed me on the lips, smiled and asked, “Are you comfortable? I would like to take a nap like this for awhile”. I reached over and patted his head. Al said, “You know we only have a couple days together before graduation”. I reached over and squeezed and patted his buttock. We slept like this for an hour before going to check our grades. Both of us had made A’s on our finals.

After returning to our rooms, Al put his arms around me and held me closely for several moments. He backed away and looked at me, our eyes locked together and said, “Tomorrow night will be our last night together and the day after tomorrow it is graduation. I would like for tomorrow night to be the time for the greatest sex that we have ever had together. What would you think about us not having another climax until tomorrow night? That way both of us could build up for a great explosion of cum”. I told him that “I did not know if was possible if I could live up to such an agreement or not”

Later on, Hoss came into our room and told us that he and Bill were taking a sex break from studying and invited us to come and join them. Al told Hoss, “Joe and I are refraining from sex for a while”. Hoss grinned and said, “You two are not having sex - what is this world coming to?” As Hoss was leaving he said, “Well I guess that Bill and I will just have to have a quickie, fucking each other silly, before we start cramming again for tomorrow’s finals”.

After Al and I finished having supper together, we had that walk around campus that Al had wanted to take earlier. Everything was very still and quiet. There were very few people out and we walked slowly side by side not saying anything. This was our last tour of the campus.

When we got back to our room, we undressed and decided that we would take a shower together. As we went into the bathroom, Hoss opened his door to the bathroom and was standing there holding his towel and shampoo. Al told him to come on in and he would join him in the shower and soap him down and shampoo his hair but there would be no sex. Both Al and Hoss stepped in the shower together and I went into visit with Bill. Bill was sitting on his bed wearing only his briefs, I set down on the bed beside him. Bill reached over and grabbed me around the neck and started to cry. He said, “Tomorrow, after graduation we all will be leaving and will probably will never see each other again. I don’t have any gay friends at home”. I hugged him real tight and ran my fingers through his beautiful hair. Shortly Bill raised his head and smiled at me as I wiped away his tears. He apologized for crying and said, “Queers like me should not cry”.

Hoss and Al came into the room and I asked Bill if he wanted to take a shower with me. Grabbing his towel, he beat me to the shower. I followed and I told him “There can be no sex because Al and I had a big night planned”. Bill and I enjoyed the feeling of each other’s hands as we soaped and massaged our bodies. We made sure that the soap covered every square inch and paid particular attention as we cleaned each other’s private parts. Both of us became stiff and with soap stroked each other until fully aroused. Bill soaped up my rear and stuck his finger up my asshole and told me that he had to clean me down there, so I returned his thoughtfulness. After we had rinsed off we held each other with our cocks rubbing together while the water hit our sensitive skin. Bill broke our embrace and smiled and said, “Boy, Hoss is going to get it tonight. I’ll give him something to remember.”

We stepped from the shower and dried each other off. Both of us had erections when we went into Bill and Hoss’s room. I walked up behind Bill and slipped my cock in the crack of his ass so the head of my cock was touching his balls. I reached around Bill and took hold of his erect cock and began to jack him off. Hoss and Al were setting on the bed watching, both with erections. I whispered into Bill’s ear, “Go Get Him, Tiger”. I backed up and slapped Bill’s rear. He turned around and smiled and gave me a quick kiss before going over and pushing Hoss onto his back. I reached out and took Al’s hand and pulled him up off the bed and taking hold of his hard dick, led him into our room.

I closed the bathroom door and joined Al on the bed. We were both straining at the bit to give each other the maximum amount of sexual pleasure that two people could give each other. Al was lying on his back and I straddled him giving him access to my quivering dick over his face as I took his large endowment all the way down my throat. I could smell the odor of the soap remaining on his testicles and pubic hair. He smelled so good!

Giving pleasure to this handsome man was all that I could think of at the time. Al had pulled me down and had my dick all the way down his throat and his hands were on my butt encouraging me to fuck him in the face. We continued to suck each other’s cocks until both of were about to cum. Al had his finger up my asshole while I was fucking his face. He pulled his finger out and released my dick and asked me if I were ready to be fucked.

Al got up and got the KY and began lubricating my asshole. I got on my hands and knees and told him to fuck me with his love rod. Al reached down beside the bed and picked up a bottle of glide lotion reached between my legs and applied it to my cock and nuts and then applied it to his own cock. He got on his knees behind me and his cock went all the way into my asshole and he began to fuck me slowly. While he was fucking me he reached around me and with one hand he was stoking my slick aching cock and the other hand was massaging my nuts. With the attention he was giving me with his cock up my rear and his hands doing his thing on my cock, I was in the highest state of ecstasy that I had ever experience before.

Al asked me to lie down on my stomach. I did so with his cock still in me and his hands still holding on to my cock and balls. We just slid easily down into this new position with Al still fucking me and now hitting my prostrate and causing chills to run up and down my spine. I was close to loosing consciousness from the delight I was feeling.

The plowing he was giving my ass as I was jacking myself off with him just holding on to my cock and balls between the bed and me. Fighting off my ejaculation trying to wait until Al was ready to shoot his cum into my ass, I was tightening and loosing my asshole striving to pleasure him as much as I could. Al began to quietly moan and his body to tense with head and shoulders pulled back as he began to pump cum way up my ass. Some of his cum was coming out of my asshole and running down on his nuts that were bouncing against my butt. Al kept jamming his cock into me until I shot off onto the bed while his hand held my exploding dick.

Al lay down on my back keeping his cock up my ass, still holding onto my exhausted cock all the while. With his other hand he was running his fingers through my hair and massaging the back of my head. Al was still breathing hard and was relaxing and trying to recover. He then whispered, “Joe, you have the best asshole that I think I will ever get to fuck”.

After Al regained his normal breathing, he pulled his still erect penis from my ass and removed his hand from my hard penis and rolled over beside me. I rolled over facing him and reached down and gently stroked his big cock. He meanwhile was stroking mine. We laid there facing each other, jacked each other and fondled each other’s nuts for about a half of an hour. Al rolled over on his back and told me to fuck him. I got the KY and moved down and started grease up his puckered anus. I got three fingers up his ass and was hitting his prostate causing him jump and wiggle around and his asshole was gripping my fingers. I then raised his legs and put them on my shoulders and stuck my cock as far as it would go and my balls were hitting his butt. I started to slowly fuck him and then began to speed up the momentum. I was pulling my cock all the way out and slamming it back in hitting his rear so hard that it was making a noise.

I reached up and kissed him and then went to his nipples and kissed, sucked and gently bit them. He told me to stop or I was going to make him loose his load. I pulled back up and increase my speed in fucking him. I reached for his cock and began stroking to the rhythm that I was fucking is ass. I had not realized how close Al was to reaching and climax and all at once he was spewing cum onto his stomach and chest. I kept own whacking his cock while shooting my load. I bent down and picked up some of his cum in my mouth and share it with him when I kissed him.

I lowered my body on to his with my dick still in his asshole. I laid for there for sometime with my head on his chest and I could hear his heart beating. I realized that Al had fallen to sleep. I went to sleep with my cock still up Al’s ass. I must have been asleep a couple of hours when I woke up and rolled over onto the bed. Al turned over on his stomach and was still asleep. I put my hand on his buttock and went back to sleep.

When I woke up, Al was up and I lay there watching him shave. When he was finished he turned around and saw that I had been staring at him. He picked up a washcloth, the shaving cream and razor and came to the bed and told me to set up that he was going to shave me. After he finished, I had to go take a piss. While I was in the bathroom I looked in Hoss and Bill’s room and they were lying on the bed together holding each other and sound asleep. I noticed that the top sheet was on the floor and the sheet they were sleeping on was in a mess and not covering the bed. I returned to my room and told Al that Hoss and Bill must have really enjoyed having sex last night because of the disarray of their bed and they were asleep holding each other. Al said, “They could not have had half as good of sex as we had. The sex we had was the ultimate”.

Al went next door and slapped Hoss and Bill on their rears and told them if they wanted breakfast that they had better get their asses out of bed because they would stop serving breakfast in thirty minutes. Hoss rolled over and said, “We had our breakfast last night. Go away and leave us alone.” Al and I went for breakfast and returned to our rooms. We began to pack our things to put in our cars and be ready to leave after the graduation ceremony scheduled for 1:00PM. While we were packing both of us tried to avoid looking into each other’s eyes. Finally. We had everything ready to put into our cars. We went over and set down on the bed together. Al smiled at me and said, “Well, I guess that we are going to leave this college with an education that the college never intended on us having. I think we deserve an A++ in sex education. Joe, you are one good teacher. You should get a job here teaching and demonstrating sex to all the gay guys that come here”.

I put my hand on his leg and told him that he is the one that provide great sex last night and he deserved an A+++. We were setting there holding hands when Al looked at the clock. He said, “Where in the hell has the morning gone? We need to get off our fat asses, shower, dress for the graduation ceremonies, eat lunch and get to the auditorium”. I looked at Al and said, “Who needs lunch. Would your settled for giving each other a quick blow job instead?” He replied, “Hell Yes!” I suggested that we do it in the shower and he thought it was an excellent idea.

We headed to the shower. We lathered each other up and in doing so we touch each other’s bodies in every place possible. The shower was turned on full blast and both of us had full erections. After we had rinsed off, Al dropped to his knees and gave me one of the best blowjobs that he had ever given me. I in turned dropped to my knees trying to duplicate the pleasure he had just given me. Both of us were so involved that we did not hear Bill come into the bathroom. Suddenly we heard Bill say, “Are you two cocksuckers at it again? Please don’t let me interrupt you, I just need to take a piss”. Bill had not bothered us in the least. I was performing oral sex to Al to the best of my ability and from the body language and sounds coming from Al, I was doing a damn good job. After Al had ejaculated I stood up and we embraced for a long time. The water was cascading down our bodies and we were very much at peace. Then we heard Hoss said, “When are you two fucking Queers going to get out of the shower. You been in there so long that the whole bathroom has steamed up and I know that it was not from the hot water. Please, Bill and I have to shower before we get dressed to go to the Graduation”

Al and I got out of the shower and apologized to Hoss. Hoss laughed and said, " I was just pulling your leg. Bill and I took our showers earlier."

Al and I put on our suits and our graduation robes and got to the auditorium just in time. After we received our diplomas, Al, Hoss, Bill and I walk back to our rooms. Hoss and Bill helped Al and I carry our things to our cars. After we had packed our cars we all went back to Hoss and Bill’s room. Hoss and Bill had not started to pack their things and did not seem to be in a hurry to do so. Each of us took a piece of paper and had the other three put down their home phone numbers and we promised to call each other and their new their email addresses. Al and I hugged Hoss and Bill and told them goodbye. Al and I went into our empty room to tell each other goodbye. After holding each other for some length of time, Al kissed me and asked that I leave him in the room because he did not want to see me drive off.

Five years passed and the four of us have kept up with each other either by phone calls or emails. It took awhile for us to adjust to being away from each other. Three months after Al and I left college, Al and I arranged to meet at a hotel that was half way between where we were living. Both of us enjoyed a weekend together. We did have great sex and a real nice visit, but it was not the same as it was while in college. Al, Bill and I have found partners that we hope to spend the rest of our lives with. All three of us have finally been able to convince our new partners that the four of us were once fuck buddies in College and that we are now just friends. Hoss is still foot loose and fancy free. Living on his farm and ranch does not give him much of a chance to meet someone, but he is looking.

Two years after we were out of college, I and my lover and Al and his lover went on vacation together. We all became good friends and enjoyed being together and the vacation was one to be remembered. Al’s and my partners have joined us in sending emails to each other including emails to Bill and his new lover and Hoss. We hope and talk about all of us getting together for a visit but several hundred miles separating each other makes it difficult.

[CowboyDuke]

Fuck, what a great story Kevin. It made me rock hard. Only thing I would have added was the two of you having sex with just your cowboy boots on, and some rimming.

[CowboyDuke]

Zorro, I personally have had sex with my boots on without spurs. Though adding the spurs could spice things up even more.

[unoponcho]

CowboyDuke and Zorro,

Thanks for your remarks and for reading my story. If I ever write another story about cowboys, I will consider your suggestions about cowboy boots, spurs, and rimming. Depending on how well this story is received, I have another story in mind about two other gay cowboys on the same ranch and their sexual encounters.

Kevin

[unoponcho]

Body Paint

By Kevin

As it often happens, people are sometimes in the right place at the right time when something interesting in their lives occurs. This is what took place in my case.

I was attending a party one night and ran into a friend of mine. He was involved in designing sets for a movie that was being made. He was having difficulty in coming up with a design to be used for a dance routine, the setting for which was to be some sort of African theme. Now, one of my hobbies was sketching and painting in both oils and watercolors. After talking to my friend for a few minutes, I took a napkin and roughly sketched out an idea that occurred to me. He thought my idea was great and asked me if I would pursue it and make a few more sketches in watercolor and get the in touch with him again in a day or so.

By noon the next day, I had completed the sketches and scenes so I called my friend and he came to my apartment to pick them up that afternoon. The scenes were very simple and basically of two zebras grazing against a bak ground of African green trees and shrubbery. That night my friend called me and told me he had shown my ideas to the dance choreographer and the director of the movie and they wanted me to come their studio and talk with them the next morning.

The director, choreographer, my friend and I met and the director told me that they liked my idea. After he and the choreographer had a brief discussion they had changed their concept of the dance routine they previously had in mind. They came up with a new approach, after seeing my watercolor scenes. They want to omit the two zebras and have male and female dancers dancing a routine wearing body make-up resembling zebras. The background set would be the same scene that I had submitted but perhaps with a giraffe in the far background.

They asked me to make a few sketches of a male and female dancer made up to look like zebras. I was also asked if I would assist the make-up people in putting the make-up on the dancers. I agree to make the sketches and told them I would have them ready for them later in the day and I would be glad to help with the make-up

The dance choreographer selected six males and one female after auditioning several hundred dancers. When doing so he not only wanted people who could dance but wanted the men to be tall and have similar and good physiques since they would be dancing partially nude. The choreographer was gay and had an excellent choice in men.

The people responsible for the music meet with the choreographer and had composed the music that would accomplish what he had in mind for the sequence. The intent was for the routine to be artistic and in very good taste and in no way vulgar, crude, or obscene. Each of the male dancers would be given the opportunity to come forward from the other men in the line up dancing in the back of the female and do a special dance with the female exhibiting their individual dance steps. The choreography of the entire routine was to mimic the movements of a zebra as if it had a human form. The dance scene would take only a maximum of seven minutes and was only a small but very important segment of the movie.

The dancers had been rehearsing for a week and the two male and one female make-up artists and I observed the dancers in two rehearsals. The costume department had provided a black wig resembling the mane of a zebra. The males were wearing their wigs and black T backs and the female was wearing her wig and a very brief black bikini. The intention of the choreographer was to get the dancers used to dancing practically in the nude.

After observing the dancers, I made a few changes in my sketches to better portray the muscles, anatomy and movements of the dancers. I meet with the people who were going to apply the body make-up and we decided that we should obtain a model and apply the body make-up on him and take photographs so each of us could look at the photographs as a guide while making up the dancers. We agreed that no two zebras have the exact same stripes and therefore it was not necessary for each dancer to be exactly the same. The female was going to put the body make-up on the female dancer and the other two guys and myself would work on the six male dancers each of us having two individuals.

When we put the body make-up on the model, we were able to estimate that it would take a maximum of four hours to do each dancer.

The day before the dance routine was to be filmed, the director decided that the dancers would dance in the nude instead of wearing a brief bikini or posing straps as originally intended. So adjustments were made in the body make-up to de-emphasize the private parts of the dancers bodies and the camera crew were directed to not take close ups of the dancers’ genitals.

The dancers came in after the last rehearsal and their bodies were completely shaved except their pubic hair that were trimmed to all looking alike. Three of the male dancers were asked to come in the next morning at 8:00AM to have their bodies painted. The other three males and female was asked to come in at 11:00AM. The filming of the scene was scheduled for 4:00PM.

Promptly at 8:00AM the three male dancers showed up. The two make up artist each took a dancer and I took Bo into a private make up room and we shut the doors to begin work on applying body paint.

Bo went to a locker and removed all his clothes and came and stood in front of me. I began by applying a basic lotion to his body both to be a base for the body paint and to make it easier for removal after the filming was completed. As I was applying the lotion and rubbing it into his skin, I got an erection that I tried to hide from Bo. I had covered his entire body except his penis and testicles. I kept wondering to myself if I could touch his private area without ejaculating in my pants. I grit my teeth and grabbed his flaccid cock and did my job. Bo immediately obtains an erection but I ignored it thinking that even a straight person would obtain an erection if his privates were massaged as I had done.

As I was applying the basic lotion, I could not help but notice the structure of Bo’s body. There was not an ounce of fat. His body was as hard as a rock. When I was working on his legs, buttocks, back and chest, I could feel his muscles that he had obtained because of dancing. All of the male dancers were built like Bo.

I then began to put white make up over his body and when I got to Bo’s private area he still had an erection sticking straight out into my near face. I started to take hold of his cock when I realized that that area was going to be covered with black body paint. So I had no excuse to give this area of his body any attention at this time. As I began using a grease pencil to sketch where I was going to put the gray and black the stripes on his body, my throbbing cock was straining to be released in my underwear. I was as horny has I have ever been.

I managed to finish sketching his feet, the backside of his legs, buttocks and back. I went and stood in front of Bo and started to sketch his face. Bo’s erection was sticking me in the groin. Bo backed away from me and asked, “Your queer aren’t you?” I took a hold of my hard cock in my pants and asked, “Am I that obvious?” Bo replied, “Well I am not gay and the whole idea of gay sex is disgusting to me personally, but being a dancer I have a lot of gay friends, so I don’t have any bad feelings toward you. Just do not get any ideas. I just am having difficulty with my pecker and do not know what I can do about it. If you were a female and handle my manhood like you have been doing, by now I would have raped you”. “Well then Bo. Look at me. Think about putting that big cock up my ass and that should make it go down”. Bo began to laugh and he looked down at his cock and it was flaccid, then he looked up at me and smiled. He said, “That works”. I looked down at my cock and it to was no longer erected. I told Bo, “Well, it worked for me”. Bo grinned real big and suggested that we proceed with the body paint.

I finished my work on Bo and stepped back and looked at him and admired my work. I had done a damn good job and Bo looked like a handsome zebra. Bo looked in the mirror and said “Wow”. He reached around and picked up his wig and put it on. I looked at my watch and it was a few minutes before 11:00AM. I was ahead of scheduled.

Bo and I left the make-up room and went out into the outer office and the other three dancers were waiting for their turn. All of them began pointing at Bo telling him how great he looked. I escorted Bo into another room were he was to wait until everyone was finished and all go to the set together.

Shortly after we got into the other room the other two dancers with their body painted came into the room. It was amazing to see the three guys together. They all looked alike and you could hardly see any difference in the three.

When I came back into the room where the remaining three dancers were waiting for their make up. One of them jumped up and said, “I am next. This is the man I want to make me look like a zebra”. After we got into the make up room, he turned towards me and smiled, winked at me and said, “Hi! I’m Mark, Lets get this show on the road”. Mark threw his wig over on a long leather bench and went to a locker and undressed. I had had the pleasure of shaving Mark’s magnificent body the evening before. Mark was standing nude in front of me and he complimented me on the make up job that I did on Bo.

As I had done on Bo’s body, I began to apply the base lotion and rubbed it into to Mark’s skin. Mark kept telling me how great I was making him feel. I was thinking how great it would feel if Mark was massaging lotion to my body. My full erection was again in my pants and I could feel the precum oozing out my dick onto my underwear. When I got on my knees to put lotion on Mark’s privates, Mark back off and said, “Just a minute please. I am going to have to have a talk with Buster”. Mark looked down and took a hold of his semi hard cock and said, “Now Buster! Just because this nice man is on his knees does not mean that you have to come to attention”. Mark looked at me with a smile and said, “Buster has a head of his own and never listens to me”. I informed Mark that I had the same problem and Mark said, “I’ve noticed”. I put some more lotion on my hand and looked up to see that Mark’s eight and half inches was in my face. I applied the lotion to Mark’s cock, balls and his asshole area. Mark’s cock was dripping precum and I gently wiped it off. Mark was squirming and grinning.

I applied the white make-up and finished sketching the strips and as I finished paint on the strips on Mark’s backside and started to paint his face, Mark backed up and told me, “Buster has been ever patient. He is now demanding relief. Would you please jack Buster off? That is the only way he is going to behave himself”. I looked at my watch and I had plenty of time to finish making up Mark. So, I dropped to my knees again and it did not take long for me to get Buster off. Mark’s cock shot cum through the air onto my hair, eyes and on my T-shirt. Mark was grinning ear to ear and handed me a wet towel to clean up with. I finished with body painting and Mark too looked great. Mark put on his wig and pranced in front of the mirror admiring himself.

Just before Mark and I were about to leave the make up room, Mark looked me in the eyes and said, “Man, your cock has been hard most of this afternoon. When I have finished with this film and after I get all this crap off me, I want to have a good sucking and fucking session with you”.

Mark and I joined the other male dancers and one of the make-up artists was spraying something onto the body of one of the dancers. He told me that what he was using would cause their bodies to glisten under the spotlights. He said that he had touched up the make-up on everyone. He also had decided to glue the dancers’ penises to their scrotum to keep them from moving around during their dance routine. Mark was the last to be sprayed down and glued.

Someone came to the door and told us that they were ready to begin filming and they wanted the dancers on the set. One of the make-up guys knock on the door of the female dancer and told her to join us on the set in a few minutes but to give the male dancers time to get on the set first. As we were leaving the choreographer meet us at the door and compliment us on the make-up job that we had done. As the dancers walked down the hall we followed observing their movements with their butts swinging and walking with a stride that only the way dancers can walk. On their backs, the stripes coming together just right to accented the movement of their spines. We were proud of our small herd of zebras.

The filming of the dance performance went very smoothly and was completed in three takes. The performance was magnificent. It was evident that the dancers had had training in ballet as well as other forms of dancing. It was not only wonderful the witness the beauty of the graceful dancers but the music also was appropriate for the performance.

The director announced, “It’s a wrap”, he asked everyone to stay in place for a moment that he had something to say. “I have been directing movies for many years and I have never seen a group of dancers as professional as you guys and gal. You gave a tremendous performance and one that you and many of us as well as viewers will remember for a long time. Your greatness has now been capture on film and it has only taken us a little over an hour. This is Friday and we will not be filming any more until Monday. To you dancers and make-up people it means that you will not have to go through repeating the long process that you have been through today. I also want to thank the brilliant choreographer, the musicians, the people who built the sets, to all the crew that has been involved and especially to this gentlemen over there that triggered the whole idea for this performance. I know all of you are tired and want to get home. Have a nice weekend.”

As everyone else, I was proud, elated, pleased and thrilled about the successful day. As I walked down the hallway following these graceful, beautiful, young dancers with their zebra body paint, prancing down the hall to the make up rooms, I was horny, experiencing lust, desire and anticipation to have sex with Mark. Now that was about all that mattered and Mark even considering me as a choice flattered me.

When we got to the make-up rooms everyone was in a hurry to get their make up off and go home. I followed Bo and Mark into our room and shut the door. I had to apply another material on their bodies to help them take off the body paint when they showered. Bo was first and he announced that he had a date that night and wanted to leave as soon as possible.

As I applied the substance and rubbed it into Bo’s skin, I could not help but become erect. Mark was seated on the long leather bench waiting for his turn. Mark also had an erection that he quickly covered by taking off his wig and holding it in his lap. Bo went to the shower and I was about half way through rubbing the material on Mark’s body when someone knocked on the door. My cock was as hard as a rock and was tenting my pants out, I picked up Mark and Bo’s wigs, holding them in front of me, Mark turned his back to the door, and I went to the open the door. One of the make-up artists was standing there and told me how much he appreciated my help and that everyone was gone except two dancers still in the shower. He asked me to close and lock the door when I left. I handed him the wigs, closed and locked the door again.

My cock had begun to behave and I noticed that Buster was also soft. As I was turning around Bo was out of the shower and finished drying off and was dressing. I returned to putting the substance on Mark. Bo finished dressing and as he started to the door he said, “Mark, I know you to well. You two queers have great sex after I leave. My girl and I are going to get it on tonight. I will wait outside until the other guys leave and will lock the outside door”. Shortly after Mark got into the shower, I heard Bo say “Goodnight everyone” and I heard the outside door being locked and shut. I immediately removed my clothes, turned off all the lights except a small lamp on the dressing table and joined Mark in the shower.

When I got into the shower, Mark said, “Welcome to my shower, now maybe you can help me get this zebra shit off me”. I took a bar of soap and rubbed it all over his body and was amazed how fast the paint was coming off and was amused by how long it took me to apply it in the first place. When I looked down, I saw the paint running down the drain and I also saw Mark’s big cock jutting straight out. I looked at my cock and judged that Mark was at least one or two inches larger than me but mine was a little larger around.

After I had scrubbed Mark down from his head to the bottom of his feet and especially between the cracks of his ass, around his asshole, nuts and Buster, Mark took the soap and told me, “Now it is time for me to touch and massage your beautiful body and make you feel as good as you have made me all day”. I was tired and feeling the strain from the days activities. The warm water from the shower was hitting my skin and Mark’s hands were all over me and I began to feel much better. Mark remarked, “Man, I can feel you relaxing. You were so tense. Are you apprehensive about having sex with me?” I said, “No, I just surprised that you would want to with me”. He smiled and gently kissed my lips while running his fingers through the wet hair on my chest.

He put his arms around my shoulders pinning my arms to my side and began to kiss my neck and on down to my nipples. He then raised my arms and kissed and licked under each armpit, then back to my nipples on to my navel where he swirled his tongue for a long time. Mark had moved his arms wrapped around my body still pending down arms. As he went lower so did his arms and as he neared my cock, my arms and hands were free and I put my hands on his head and gently pushed him to my raging cock that was waiting the warmth of his mouth. He took my cock all the way down to the base and was deep throating me. It had been so long since I had had sex that I had almost forgot what a sensation could occur by having my cock sucked. I was about at the point that I was going to shoot, when I took hold of Mark’s head and lifted him up were I kissed him running my tongue deep into his mouth. I could taste the precum that I had been depositing into Mark’s mouth.

Mark had beautiful round tits surrounded by muscles causing them to extend out from his chest. I bent down and began to suck and lick them and the way Mark reacted I knew that he was enjoying what I was doing. Mark said, “I love to have someone to play with my tits”. I looked up and said, “I’ll remember that”. I continued to kiss, suck, tickle and gently bite his tits until he placed his hands on my shoulders and guided me to his cock. I placed my fingers around his cock and stroked it and while stroking, I swirled my tongue around the head and he began involuntarily tremble. Very fast, I swallowed his dick and had my nose buried in his wet pubic hair that tickled my nose and upper lip. I tasted the precum in the back of my throat and it was a wonderful intoxicating taste. I had reached my arms around Mark and was griping his hard muscled buttocks while I continued to suck his cock that was jumping up and down in my throat. I could feel his strong buttocks tensing up and relaxing as he was gently and slowly fucking my face. Mark was certainly enjoying the moment almost as much as I. Mark reached for my head and pulled me up and as I was getting up, he said, “Buster is going to start spitting unless you stop”.

Mark put his arms around me and took hold of my butt with both hands and one finger pressed on my asshole and he pulled me close and kissed me several times and then asked, “Are you ready to get out of the shower?” Without saying anything, I took hold of Mark’s cock, turned off the shower with the other hand and opened the shower door. We quickly dried off and I went to the leather bench and removed my clothes that I had left on the bench, and put them on the floor. We moved the bench out from the wall and Mark had me lye down on my back. Mark moved to the back of my head and began straddling the bench and working him self down until his asshole was directly above my mouth. I rimmed his puckered asshole for a few minutes and Mark told me that, “Buster has found a home in your mouth and he likes it there. Can he come inside again?” I welcomed Buster all the way down my throat.

Mark leaned over while his dick was in my mouth and began deep throating my rod. Both of our bodies began to tense and our breathing was becoming irregular. I did not know if Mark wanted to climax at this time or not. He appeared to be ready to shoot at any time. He had said earlier that he wanted to fuck. I knew that if he did not stop that I would have no choice. I pushed him up to get his cock out of my mouth and told him that I was about to cum. He immediately pulled away from my dick and began to squeeze it real hard and said, “Don’t you dare. I want you to unload that thing up my ass”.

Mark got off me and went over to the dressing table and picked up a jar of moisturizing cream and asked, “Will this do? I have never used it before”. I told him that I did not know that I have never used it for this purpose. Mark reached in his locker and came back with two rubbers and the cream. He put one of the rubbers on the floor with the cream and opened the package of one of the rubbers. He bent down and took my dick deep down his throat and bounced up and down a couple of times leaving my dick very wet with his spit and then put the rubber on my cock. He reached down and got the cream and put it on my cock and then bent his knees down in a setting position and applied the cream to his asshole and worked it up inside.

Once again he straddled the bench and me, with both feet on the floor, he began to lower his asshole towards my dick. As I entered into him he would stop a moment and moan and then lower himself further until I was all the way in his hole. He began to move up and down fucking my dick with his ass. His cock and nuts were slapping my abdomen in rhythm to his movements. In a short time, I looked up and he was moving his arms and upper body in sequence with his hip movements and it was as if he was hearing music and dancing on my dick. This was the first for me. I had never seen anyone to enjoy being fucked in this manner. He continued this action for awhile then he set all the way down on my dick and put all his weight on me and began to swing his right leg forward and his left leg back and was doing the splits while on my cock and then he would reverse his legs and do the same thing. As he did this, his asshole would get real tight around my cock and is butt would move up and down in a fucking motion. He continued this action for about five minutes. It was as if this dancer was exercising or practicing his moves, while both satisfying himself and my cock and my cock on the inside him was the only thing that kept him from flying through the air. I had taken a hold of his cock while he was doing these acrobatic motions and his dick had been sliding up and down through my fingers.

Mark lay down on my stomach with my dick still in his asshole and he put his arms around me and his head on my chest and asked me, “Are you about to cum?” I told him, “Yes, that I could not hold off much longer”. He said, “Man, let it go when you’re ready. Give that cum to my fucking asshole”. He continued to lie on my chest while his buttocks and asshole went up and down on my cock. I was enjoying being fucked with his hole and my ass had been sweating on the leather and my buttocks was tightening and relaxing as I attempted to fuck Mark. My cock began to shoot again and again until nothing was left. Mark continued with his movements until I became flaccid and slipped out. Mark and I were almost out of breath as he lay on top of me until we both had recovered. I still had a hold of Mark’s hard cock between our bodies.

Mark got off of me and removed my rubber and leaned over and sucked all the cum off my flaccid dick. It felt so good but did not respond so far as to get hard. Mark went into the bathroom and flushed the rubber down the toilet and returned knelt down beside me and began to massage my chest and shoulders.

After a sometime, he asked if he could fuck me. I asked in what position. He wanted me on my stomach. I turned over on the bench and he pulled up my rear and I got on my knees and he began to rim me. It was only moments that his tongue was so far up my asshole that it felt like his entire eight and half inches was there. Mark picked up the jar of cream and applied a generous amount up my hole. I was more than ready to be fucked. I wanted his glorious cock inside me. He helped me slid my legs so I was again lying on my stomach.

Mark put on the other rubber and applied cream to his covered cock. He once again straddled the bench and me and lay down on top of my back. His cock was between the crack of my butt and he was sliding it up and down fucking my crack between our bodies. He then moves himself back and reached around and aimed his cock into my asshole. Slowly entering me and if I moaned he would stop and then continued until it was all the way in and his nuts where close to my butt as if they also wanted to enter. He began fucking me slowly and gradually increasing speed. He set up a rhythm and he was pulling all the way out of my hole and ramming it all the way back in.

Mark’s movements again began to be as if he was hearing fast music and dancing with his dick fucking me. His nuts were slapping my rear as though my ass was a drum. I was sweating and the sweat was causing my whole body to slid up and down with each thrust that Mark made while plowing my hole. I became Marks dancing partner and I had another erection and it was also sliding up and down between the leather bench and my stomach enjoying the dance movements. Mark was also sweating and I felt sweat from his body on my back. Even his nuts were sweating and his sweat dripped down between my ass onto my nuts.

Mark set up, without removing his cock inside of my asshole, and he had a leg on each side of the bench and began to fuck me from his new position. He was hitting my prostrate almost every other thrust. I was ready to climb the walls with the enjoyment that he was giving me. Mark was going strong and again his arms were moving in the air as if he were directing a band. Mark said, “Buster is about to explode”. I told him that I was about to shoot also. I had barely gotten the words out of my mouth and I shot off onto the bench and my stomach and my asshole began to spasm causing Mark to increase his speed and let go pumping cum into his rubber far up in my hole. I could feel the warmth of his cum and Buster had let go a big load.

Mark collapsed on my back bringing his feet and legs up on top of my legs with his dick still inside me. His full weight was on top of me but it felt so good to be so close. Mark slid his hand underneath me and took a hold of my semi hard dick. He said, “Man you made a big mess down there”. We both laughed and we remained in this position for a while until I began to feel uncomfortable from Mark’s weight on top of me.

Mark stood up and helped me off the bench. I reached over and got a towel and wiped off the cum and sweat from the leather bench. I set down while Mark flushed his rubber down the toilet. He joined me on the bench and put his arm around me and kissed me on my lips and my forehead. Mark put his hand on my leg and asked, “Why don’t we take another shower, get dressed and go get something to eat. We have not eaten all day and I am starved”. I got up and started running towards the shower and Mark reached out and pinched my ass.

After we had showered, dried each other off, dressed, we pushed the bench back into it place. Mark recovered the wrappers for the condoms and put them in his pocket and we looked around to see if there were any more evidenced of our sexual activity before we left.

There was a restaurant a short distance from the studio and Mark and I drove our cars and meet there. We both eat a big meal and enjoyed talking to each other. I asked Mark, “Why a good-looking guy like you has never settled down and found a lover to live your life with?” Mark replied, “Who is going to put up with a dancer who is constantly moving around from city to city following jobs available to him. Hell, I would not put up with someone like me. If I ever get a job in a theater on Broadway, Las Vegas or someplace and going to be there for awhile, maybe I will find someone”. Then he said that, “He was going to leave in a few hours since his job was finished here and drive to Las Vegas where he had a job and rehearsal that will begin Tuesday. Maybe this job will last a long time and I will be able to settle down”.

Mark asked me, “Why haven’t you settled down”. I explained that “I had been in a long term relationship for a number of years and my partner and I split the covers six months ago. You have been the first person I have had sex with since my ex an I broke up”. I reach under the table and took hold of Mark’s hand and told him, “Mark, the wonderful sex that we enjoyed tonight is greatly appreciated and has help me realize that there are beautiful people like yourself that may be interested in me. I have been so depressed and insecure for these past six months and now I am ready to come back to the real world and I thank you from the bottom of my heart for that”. As Mark and I were holding hands, he took his other hand and patted my hand and said, “You are more than welcome. We did have the best sex together that I have had in a long time”.

We paid our bills and I followed Mark to his car. Mark got in and rolled down his window and I leaned over put my arm through the window patted his shoulder and looked him in the eye and said, “Goodbye and Good Luck Zebra”. He smiled and said, “Goodbye Body Painter”.

Mark and I never have seen each other since but I do have a copy of the movie that I watch often and each time, seeing him and with the memories of our sex together causes me to get an erection. I hope that Mark and “Buster” are having a good time.

[offcentered1]

Great stories unoponcho! Wouldn't it be great to have an Old Queen's Gang in every city? I enjoy your writing style. Keep them coming!
:=D: :=D: :=D:

[unoponcho]

Thanks Offcentered1,

I appreciate your replying and to know that you enjoyed reading my stories. Writing is a new adventure for me and at my age is one of very few things that I am able to do anymore. Learning to write and develop my own style is very difficult for me.

Posting a reply is the only sure way I know that someone read my stories. Thanks for taking your time to post a reply and for your remarks.

Kevin

[unoponcho]

Sex Slave

By Kevin


During the Korean War, I was drafted into the Army. I was neither physically nor mentally ready to go into the service. The real fact of the matter was that I was not suitable for the service. I was gay but was not ready to admit to the world that I was gay and choose to deny that I was gay when I was inducted into the Army. I did not feel that I could ever purposely injure or kill another human being and if it got down to a choice, I would sacrifice my own life rather than take someone else’s life. I hated the service from the day I was drafted until the day I received my honorable discharge.

Upon arriving at the base where I was to receive my Basic Training, a Sergeant Walker, who had this snotty attitude, greeted all the new recruits and me and we were told to “fall in”. I learned very quickly what the command to “fall in” meant and had to do that many times while I was in the service. We were taken to this building and were issued our uniforms and then taken to our barracks and told to put on our fatigues and boots. My pants were very tight and uncomfortable.

Our Sergeant Walker must have had extra training to have been the most disagreeable, cocky, and unlikable person I had ever meet. He was about six-foot tall, 26 years old, in top physical condition, custom made uniforms, loud voice, crew cut hair, very very masculine and wore a smirk on his face most of the time. The Army was his career and he was proud to let every one know that he was regular Army. There was no way that any of us could have ever liked this man. He was evil through and through, even though he had nice facial features and beautiful dark brown eyes, his personality was disgusting.

It was his responsibility, along with the other cadre, to see that we got the training we needed to be good soldiers and ready for combat duty. This meant everything from learning to march; use of various weapons such as M-1 rifles, BAR, carbine, mortars, pistols, grenades, etc.; getting us in physical shape; to learning to obey commands or take orders without questions.

A few nights after we arrived on base, just before lights out, the Sergeant came into the barracks and ordered everyone to take off all their clothes except our boots and put on our raincoats and be ready to fall in within five minutes. After we fell in, the Sergeant went back into the barracks and a Corporal stepped forward and told us that we were going to have a “short arms inspection”. I had no idea what he was talking about. He begins to call out names and we were told as our names were called, we were to go back into the barracks.

When my name was called, I went into the barracks and just to the left was our restroom and showers, the Sergeant was seated in a chair just inside the restroom with rubber gloves on his hands. He motioned me to come in and told me to open my raincoat. As I stood there in front of him exposed, he began to examine my penis and nuts. I had no idea what this man was doing but he stroked my penis for several moments and looked up and said, “Very nice. Before I am through with you, your body is going to be in shape that is worthy of what you have here, while still holding on and referring to my dick”. He then had me turn around and lift up my raincoat, bend over and he grabbed my buttocks and spread them apart and examined my anus. When he was through patted my butt and said, “Great ass”. Then he yelled at the Corporal, “Next”.

As I was putting on my underwear, I asked the guy in the next bunk to me, what was that all about? He said that he thought that the Sergeant was checking to see if any of us had any signs of venereal disease. I thought that was odd because before being inducted I received a through physical exam by the Army doctors. I also thought that the Sergeant had spent a little more time with me than he did with the others and that he was paying a little too much attention to my dick and balls than necessary.

Our training was very demanding on us physically and mentally. We were awaken at 4:30AM and were on the go until lights out at 10:30PM. Everywhere we went rain or shine, we ran. Sometimes we would run while in formation several miles at a time. Each day we spent an hour and half doing calisthenics. Every one was exhausted and when we had short breaks, I and some of the others, would take naps even if it were only for a few minutes.

Every time any of us did something that the Sergeant could find wrong or disliked, he made us do push-ups. His favorite trick with me was while I was doing push ups he would stand next to me yelling at me and he would put his foot on my ass and make me lift the weight of his foot and leg as well as my own weight. Just out of pure devilment he sometimes would put pressure on me with his foot so that I could not do the number of push-ups that he ordered me to do. He would remove his foot and tell me to start all over again.

The bastard would come up to me while at attention and undo a button on my uniform and say, “Soldier, you have a button undone. Give me fifty push ups”. I would get down and start to do the push ups and he would drop down on the ground beside me and do fifty push up’s before I had finished. He would jump up and say, “Soldier, you are to damn slow. Give me fifty more”.

Within three weeks, I noticed that my uniforms were fitting me and as time went by, the uniforms were loose. I had not loss weight but I had loss my excess fat and obtained more muscles. I was not having the difficulty in breathing while running or exercising as I had at the beginning.

The Sergeant had managed to break my spirit and self-esteem and if it had not been for me hating this man so much, I do not think I could have survived Basic Training.

About the sixth or seventh week were going through this course where we had fixed our bayonets on our rifles and were in training to use the bayonets and were stabbing theses dummies on this course. The Sergeant was standing on the side of the course yelling out commands. I was running this course stabbing these dummies saying to myself, “Take that Sergeant Walker”. I realized that the Sergeant had taken away my self-respect, my morals, and had turned me into something that I did not like. I could have killed the Sergeant and have no remorse about doing so.

One night just before lights out, another guy, named Rob Alexander and I had taken our showers and as I was drying off, and Rob asked me if I would put a new bandage on his upper back. He had received and injury and could not reach the place on his back to apply a clean bandage. I had just finished putting on the bandage and was still standing close to Rob’s back when Sergeant Walker and another sergeant were walking by the entrance to the restroom and showers. They stopped and looked in and saw Rob and I standing close together naked.

Two days latter Rob and another soilder were caught having sex. They both were court marshaled and given dishonorable discharges.

At the end of the eighth week of training, the company was really shaping up and I guess that our Company Commander was pleased with our progress. Anyway he gave us a two-day weekend pass. There was a small town not far from the base and I rented a hotel room for one night. After checking into the hotel, I went to my room and took a shower. I stepped out of the shower and looked into a full size mirror for the first time since starting my Basic Training. I hardly recognized myself. My shoulders were wider and more muscular, my arms and legs were more developed and had an appealing shape and I had loss two or more inches around my waist. My buttocks were nicely shaped and my chest, stomach, and abdomen were firm. I was in the best physical shape than I had ever been in my life. This was the first time that I had had the opportunity to see myself in a full-length mirror. The mirrors in the barracks are just large enough to shave and brush your teeth. I stood in front of the full-length mirror for a long time in amazement. I thought to myself, “Sergeant Walker is still a bastard but he did accomplish building up my body in a manner that was worthy of my dick and balls”.

It had been so long since I had been alone by myself that I was not really for certain whether my dick still worked. Before I got dressed to go to a movie, I had to make sure and I jerked off twice and released two big loads. After the movie I had to check again just to be sure that it was functioning properly. After I returned from eating, I removed my clothes and lay on the bed naked playing with myself until I fell asleep.

When I woke up Sunday morning my cock was as hard as a rock and I just lay in bed and took my time and masturbated until I shot my cum all over my stomach, chest and neck. I even had a drop on my chin which I licked off and enjoyed tasting. I enjoyed my two days leave being able to become acquainted with myself once again. I did not want to go back to the base. We were to go on maneuvers leaving a 5:00AM the next day.

After we had arrived at the site of the maneuvers and after we had set up our tents, Sergeant Walker yelled for us to fall-in. He called out names and assigned the guys into squads. Each squad was to go on patrols and perform exercises as if they were in a war situation. The sergeant did not call my name and I asked him which squad he wanted me to join. He informed me that I was to stay with him for the day.

After the squads left on their missions, the Sergeant poured coffee for each of us. He lit up a cigarette and set down about six feet in front of me and drank his coffee and smoked his cigarette and I kept catching him starring at me.

He was trying to begin a conversation with me and I just did not have anything to say to this man that I disliked so much. He asked me where I was from and I answered by giving the name of the town. There would be more silence and he would ask me another question and I would give him a very brief answer. Finally, I was feeling bad because I knew that in his way he was trying to be friendly. I asked him if he were married. He replied, “Not any longer. I was married for six months and the fucking bitch divorced me and ran off with an Army Captain. It was a mistake to marry her in the first place. We only had sex three times during our marriage and she was lousy in bed”.

After a few minutes of silence, he added, “Hell, I had greater sex fucking the asses of young Korean boys, when I was overseas, than I had with my fucking wife”. I did not know what to say and I got up and got us some more coffee.

By this time the sun was directly over us and it was getting warm. We finished our coffee and the Sergeant had smoked several cigarettes. He got up and field strip his cigarettes and picked up a tarp and told me to come with him. He took off into the woods in the opposite direction from which the squads had gone. I had no idea where or why the Sergeant was going but I followed him. We went deep into the woods, by a small creek, about five hundred yards, out of sight from where our tents were.

He spread the tarp out and told me to get my clothes off and get on the tarp. I looked him straight in the eye and asked, “What in the hell. I am not taking my clothes off and getting on the tarp”. He just smiled at me and said, “Yes you are and I am going to fuck that beautiful nice ass of yours”. I could not believe the gall of this man. I said, “The hell you are” and I turned to walk away. The Sergeant said, “Remember Rob Alexander? Remember me and my sergeant friend seeing you and Rob naked in the shower? The sergeant is a witness and I can have you court marshaled for being a damn queer. You have no choice but to be my ‘sex slave’ until Basic Training is over. Get your Goddamn clothes off and get down there on your hands and knees”.

I did not know what to do. It seemed that I had no other choice. I knew that my being seen by Sergeant Walker and his sergeant friend may have looked suspicious but there was no sex involved. However, if Sergeant Walker was to make a charge against me, an investigation into my past might reveal past gay sexual relations that I had had before being inducted into the service.

As I began to remove my uniform, so was Sergeant Walker. It was the first time I had seen the Sergeant out of uniform and in the nude. He had a body to behold and most any queer such as myself would go apeshit to be with this man. My only problem was to try and not think about what a bastard he was.

I was down on my hands and knees and I looked up and the Sergeant was standing in front of me stroking his nine-inch cock. He said, “Normally, I do not let fucking queers touch my cock but I am feeling generous and you are going to suck it until I say stop”. He forced his cock into my mouth and grabbed my head and pushed it in as far as it would go. I started to gag and he just ignored the problem I was having and started to fuck my face real hard.

What he did not know that I was enjoying having his big cock in my mouth and most likely the only way he could tell is if he could see my own dick throbbing and swinging between my legs. It was moving with the motion that the sergeant was fucking my mouth and my cock was banging up against my abdomen.

He was so damn hot. Not only was he sexually hot but also his body was covered with perspiration and his skin was glistening in the sun making his body features even more attractive. His big balls had drawn up and were right next to his cock and were pounding on my chin. I could tell that he was building up a big load and it would not be long before he would begin to shove his huge member up my asshole. He begin to deposit precum in my mouth which I relished the taste. I kept thinking to myself, “If he were only a nice person, I could really make more of an effort to please him”.

He removed his dick from my mouth and fumbled around in his pants pocket and got a tube of lubricant. He began to stroke his cock and then applied the lubricant and then moved behind me and jammed his finger covered in lubricant up my asshole. I could tell that he had never been fucked in his asshole by the rough way that he was treating mine with his finger. I tried to prepare myself for the same rough treatment when he stuck his big cock into me.

My assumption was right because he jammed his cock all the way into me in one big thrust and he began to fuck me fast and hard and never slowed down until he ejaculated deep into my ass. I felt his warm cum and he shot off four or five times before he was completely exhausted his supply of cum.
Almost as soon as he finished cumin, as he was pulling out of my hole I shot my load onto the tarp without my cock being touched.

The Sergeant stood up and said, “Well big boy, I see you got your rocks off too”.

The Sergeant got dressed before I had finished dressing and he stood there watching me. He said, “Soldier, we have about three more weeks of Basic Training. There are going to be other times that I will expect you to service my cock. I knew when I first saw you that you would be a good fuck buddy. You did alright”.

As he turned to walk off we heard a jeep driving up the road. He told me to fold up the tarp and he would go see who was headed in out direction. When I got back to the tent site, the Company Commander and his driver were in the jeep. I saluted and walked away. The Captain asked the Sergeant what I was doing there and he told the officer that I was not feeling very well and he decided that I should not go on the exercises. The Captain said something to the Sergeant that I could not hear, and the Sergeant got in the jeep and yelled at me that he would be back and they took off. It was after the sun had gone down before anyone came back to the tent area. I had spent the afternoon taking naps and enjoying the quiet and peace.

The next day was a repeat of the previous day. The Sergeant and I stayed in the tent area while everyone else was doing some type of combat exercises. The Sergeant and I went back into the woods with the tarp. The only difference this time was that the Sergeant decided that he wanted to give me a blowjob which he had never attempted to give anyone before. For a beginner he learned fast and was really good. I told him that I enjoyed him sucking off my dick and he said that “You are a good teacher and I learned how from you”. That was the first compliment or anything nice that I had ever heard him say to anyone. While he was sucking my cock he was masturbating and he unloaded his cum the same time I shot my load into his mouth.

He lit up a cigarette while he was recovering. After he finished his cigarette, he asked me to suck on his soft dick and get it hard because he wanted to fuck me again. This time he had me lie on my back and put my legs over his shoulders. After he got his cock all the way in my asshole, I locked my feet around his neck and watched the expressions on his face while he fucked me. For the first time he did not have that ridiculous smirk on his face.
After fucking me for about a half of an hour, he deposited a very generous load of cum into my hole and remained inside me until he became soft again. As we walked back to the tent area, he put his arm around my shoulder and told me that he enjoyed giving me a blowjob and like the feeling of giving pleasure to my cock and me.

That afternoon, I was lying down in my tent asleep and the Sergeant woke me up and told me to take a walk with him. We were walking through the woods and he stopped and started undoing my pants. He said that he was horny and the only thing he wanted was to give me another blowjob. It was hardly anytime before he had me fully aroused and I was squirting cum down his throat. When he had finished, I asked him if he wanted me to suck him off and he said no and asked me to leave him in the woods that he wanted to be alone and that he was going to jack himself off.

The next day was the last day of the maneuver. I was again asked to stay in the tent area and everyone left except the Sergeant and I. Shortly after everyone left the Company Commander showed up and the Sergeant and the Captain took off somewhere. I spent the whole day drinking coffee, taking naps and enjoying the out of doors.

Early the next morning we packed up and went back to our barracks. Everyone was exhausted. Their uniforms were filthy. Their boots were muddy and had to be cleaned and shined. Their rifles had to be cleaned. I felt like I had been on vacation. All I had to do was to brush off my boots and set back and watch everyone else do what they had to do.

From then on the Sergeant went out of his way to make my life a little easier. In fact, a hell of lot more easy than my fellow soldiers in the Company. I was put on guard duty, when Sergeant Walker was Sergeant of the Guards and the Sergeant made sure that my position on guard duty was out in some God for shaken place were no one would be around.

It was very dark, late at night, and I would walk up and down this fence that I was supposed to be guarding from the enemy. I loosen my belt; holding the rifle on my shoulder, slip my other hand down my pants playing with my dick while walking my post. In a period of two hours, I had had numerous near climaxes that I put off because I knew that when it came time Sergeant to inspect the guards, we would have sex. Naturally, the inspection of my post took longer than the Sergeant had spent inspecting all the other posts put together. When I was on my knees, I told the Sergeant that “I could better observe the enemy (his nine inch cock) from my kneeling position and it was my duty to take the enemy to prison in my mouth”. The Sergeant said, “The enemy surrenders”.

The Sergeant had made a point many times to arrange situations where we would get together for sex. Sergeant Walker enjoyed giving and receiving blowjobs and he like to fuck me. He would never let me fuck him and the closest I ever came to entering his asshole was to finger fuck him just before and during his ejaculation while having oral sex. He loved to be finger fucked and to be rimed.

The weekend before we finished Basic Training, we both got a weekend pass and he had me meet him at the hotel where I spent my first two-day pass. One of my fancies that I had before reaching the hotel was that I wanted to have sex with Sergeant Walker in front of the full-length mirror so I could see my new body in full action with his magnificent body and nine-inch cock in all its glory. The Sergeant and I fulfilled my fancy. We had great sex numerous times while at the hotel and both enjoyed the comfort of a king size bed in preference to other places we had previously had had sex. I had become very pleased and happy to be the Sergeants sex slave. Sergeant Walker told me “You are the best sex slave that I have ever had. Of course you are the only sex slave I have ever had. The truth is other than a couple of Korean boys, you are the only person I have had gay sex with”.

A few days after our hotel rendezvous, Basic Training was over, we all received our orders including the Sergeant and we went our separate ways. When I received my honorable discharge, I still hated being in the Army but my last few weeks in Basic Training will always be remembered. I often wonder about the Sergeant and if he is still successful at making new recruits hate his guts. He was a hot, handsome, macho dude, but a son-of-a-bitch with a body and cock to be envied by the majority of gays as well as straights.

[TriBi]

Kevin,

Still enjoying your stories...please keep 'em coming!

[unoponcho]

Thank you TriBi

Appreciate your encouragement

Kevin

[unoponcho]

Encounter With A Cyclist

By Kevin



A friend of mine and I enjoy camping and hiking. We had never been together to enjoy our hobby but we had planned for several weeks to make a trip to Glacier National Park in Montana and campout and hike together for a week. Neither one of us had ever been to Glacier National Park. We had made detail plans on what we were going to take and everything was being made ready to leave on Friday after we got off work and driving all night to get to the Park.

My friend and I had enjoyed several sexual encounters and we were looking forward towards having sex with each other while on our camping trip. On Thursday morning before we were to leave on Friday, my friend called me and told me that his boss had just informed him that his vacation had to be delayed due to something that had come up that he would require him to be at the office during the time we were to be on vacation.

I went to a party that night and was very upset about my friend not being able to go with me. I had mixed emotions about going camping by myself.
While at the party I meet this good-looking guy named Brad and I told him about my problem and concern. Brad told me that he also enjoyed camping out and liked hiking. He had never been to Glacier National Park and always wanted to go. He asked me if he could get time off from work if he could go with me.

Friday morning he called and said he was going to be able to go with me and that he would get off work at noon so he would pack and be ready to go after I got off work.

I picked up Brad and we were on our way. While driving we talked and were getting to know each other. I got tired of driving and Brad drove for a while and we switched again. Brad fell asleep and I had driven for several hours and was getting sleepy. I woke Brad up and asked him if he could drive awhile.

As Brad was getting out of the car to come around to the driver’s side, I noticed that Brad had an erection which he tried to adjust in his pants. I got out from under the wheel of the car and went around to the passenger’s side. Brad took off driving and kept reaching down adjusting himself. I took a short nap and when I woke up, Brad had his cock out of his pants and was jacking off while driving. I reached over and took a hold of his cock and told him, “Let me help you out, Buddy”. As I stroked Brad’s cock, I unzipped my pants and began to stroke my own cock at the same time. Brad was barreling down the highway yelling, “God that feels so fucking good”. He started to drive a little erratically and was about to climax. I told him to pull off the highway before he wrecked the car.

After he pulled over, I went down on him and began to suck his dick. Every time I had his entire cock down my throat he would yell, “Suck my fucking cock”. Brad threw his head back and his body tensed up as he began to ejaculate into my throat. He sat behind the wheel of the car for a moment and then said, “I can’t wait until I can suck that big dick of yours”.

Brad took the keys out of the car and got out and locked the driver’s side. He came around and pulled me out of the car and locked the passenger’s side. He led me down the highway about fifty feet and under a culvert. He pulled down my pants and got on his knees and gave me the best blowjob that I had had in a long time. On the way back to the car, Brad said, “Just think, we are going to have a whole week together and I am going to make sure that our sex is going to get better and better”.

We got back into the car and I looked at the clock and noticed that it was 4:00AM. We should get to the Glacier National Park around 10:00AM.
I was driving and Brad was asleep. I pulled into a service station and filled up the gas tank and Brad did not stir. After the sun came up, Brad woke up and asked if I wanted him to drive awhile. He drove until we got to Whitefish, Montana that is just outside the Park a few miles.

We bought some ice and a few items of food that I had forgotten to buy and headed to the Park. We began to notice a number of cyclists on the highway going both towards and coming from the Park. They all had camping gear strapped to their bicycles. It was a surprise to both of us to learn that so many people were using their bicycles to go camping. The majority of the cyclists were males but there were a surprising number of females.

We arrived at the Glacier National Parks’ west entrance and were on a two-lane road that was called “Going To The Sun” that went through the Park. We stopped at the first campgrounds we came to and all the campsites were taken. We continued down the road and stopped to check out the second campgrounds. It was also full but as we started to leave we spotted a couple that appeared to be breaking camp. Brad went to their campsite and asked them if they were leaving and if we could have their campsite. Brad returned smiling so I knew we were in luck. The campsite was a long distance and secluded from any other campsites and was near the shoreline of a lake. It was a beautiful site with a marvelous view of the mountains, lake and forest.

It did not take us long to pitch our tent and set up camp. Brad went into the tent and I did not know what he was doing but when he came out he was wearing hiking boots and a real short pair of tight shorts and no shirt. He was something to write home about. He had the most beautiful shaped muscular legs that I had ever seen. That was not all. He had a slender waist and well rounded butt that his shorts showed off very well. He was obviously not wearing any underwear and he had a well-developed chest obtained by working out. When he walked his back and shoulders muscles rippled in the sunlight. Having only seen Brad fully clothed I would have never dreamed that he looked the way he did almost nude.

Brad started a fire and put on some coffee while I changed clothes. I came out of the tent and I was dressed for the outing. I felt a little modest or embarrassed after seeing Brad’s wonderful physique.

We set down at the concrete table and benches that were at each of the campsites and drank our coffee and we decided that we would pack a lunch and take a short hike. Both of us were tired from the nights drive but we wanted to start enjoying the out of doors. We spotted a trail that was near us and we fixed our lunches, made a pit stop at a close by outdoor restroom before beginning to explorer the unknown.

I purposely got Brad to lead the way. I wanted to take advantage of watching the rear of this beautiful man as he maneuvered his way up the trail. We hiked several miles through some of the most beautiful country that I had ever seen. We saw several deer and many kinds of smaller animals and birds. Nature was at it’s best. The sun was shining and all we could hear were the birds signing, small animals making noises and the wind blowing through the trees. Every once in awhile we would just stop and absorbed the beauty around us.

Brad saw a rocky cliff a little ways off the trail and he suggested that we clime the cliff and have our lunch on top. He led the way and I was not far behind him and watched his muscles on his legs as he made his way up the cliff. When we reached the top, I was out of breath and it was apparent that I was not in as good of shape as Brad. I lay down on my back, relaxing and watching the clouds above me. Brad was standing up beside me and taking in the sights around us. I looked up and could see up Brad’s shorts and saw his glorious limp cock. Brad caught me starring up his crouch. He smiled real big and winked at me. He sat down beside me, pulled my arm out and lay down with his head on my arm and put his arm around me. He said, “I hope that you do not mind but when I am out in the wilderness I get romantic. I hope that you will get used to it”.

He raised his head up and gently kissed me. He moved real close to me and put his leg across my body and kissed my nipple and laid his head on my chest. He said, “All I want now is to be close to you. Tonight, I want you to fuck me and I want to fuck you”. We lay there for a while just relaxing and feeling each other and being close. Brad moved so he could kiss me again and he kissed my lips, nose, eyes and forehead. Then he got up and helped into a setting position and handed me my lunch.

After we had our lunch, we started back to our camp. On the way down there was a big bear on the trail about thirty feet from us, that just stood looked at us. We remained very still until the bear wondered off into the forest.

After we got back to camp, Brad gathered some firewood for the fire while I unpacked some of my things and unrolled our bedrolls and zipped them together. Brad came into the tent and suggested that we take a short nap before taking a bath in the lake and fixing supper. We slept an hour or so and Brad woke me up and said, “Let’s go skinny dipping and eat supper before tonight’s activities begin”.

No one was around when we got down to the lake and we quickly removed our boots and clothes. We each had a bar of soap and jumped in. The water was much colder than we expected and in no time we had washed ourselves and returned to the bank shivering. We wrapped a towel around us, grabbed our clothes and boots and ran to the tent to put on warmer clothes.

It did not take us long to fix and eat supper. We cleaned up the dishes and put all the food into the car to keep away from the animals and before the sun was down, we were naked in our bedrolls. Both of us were horny and lust for each other’s bodies and were ready for sex.

Brad rolled me over on my back and snuggled up real close and started to kiss me and sticking his tongue between my lips into my mouth. We lay there for a long time kissing and battling with each other tongues to get into each other mouths while caressing each other. It was so peaceful and quiet and time was no longer important. We were there to enjoy being together in this romantic atmosphere. Brad raised his head up and starred into my eyes. He said, “You know, just looking at your wonderful face, smile and into your eyes, I could easily have a climax right now”.

Brad started to kiss my forehead, and begin to work his way down. He kissed and twirled his tongue in my ear, which sent chills down my spine. He kissed the side of my neck and then both of my nipples before reaching and licking my navel. While he was kissing and licking my body, he had cupped my balls with three of his fingers and his forefinger and thumb was wrapped around my cock and he gently was massaging and stroking both my balls and cock at the same time. By the time he started to give me head, I was very near climaxing. Only moments later I had to make him stop.

Brad moved back up and started kissing me again. He had put his leg across me and bent his knee, trapping my hard cock on the underside of his knee. I had to make him stop kissing me because my cock was about to explode and I knew that Brad wanted me to fuck him later.

I rolled Brad off me and started to lick and play with his nipples and learned that it was a real turn on for him. I moved to one of his armpits and from his moaning I knew that this was another of his very erotic zones. I moved down and started sucking his big cock, which I teased and suck for a long time before sucking his nuts and teasing them. Brad had spread out his legs and I had been playing with his asshole with my finger. I pushed his legs up and begin to lick and stick my tongue up his asshole. Brad was moaning and making so much noise that I thought that he may be disturbing the people in the other campsites.

I moved so I could reach my backpack and at the same time Brad was moving around. I thought that Brad was moving into position for me to fuck him. I pulled out my supply of condoms and large tube of lube from my backpack and turned around and Brad had condoms and a large tube of lube in his hands. Between the two of us we probably had four-dozen condoms and two large tubes of lube. Both of us started to laugh so hard that tears were coming down our cheeks. Brad put his arms around my neck and pulled me down and we rolled together in laughter.

When we calmed down some, Brad removed a condom from one of the packages and put it on my dick and applied some of the lube. While he was doing that I had put a large amount of the lube up his asshole. Buck kissed me and swatted my rear and said, “Fuck me good, I have been waiting all day to have your cock up my ass”. Buck was on his back and he reached down while lifting his legs up and placed his hands under his knees and waited for me to put my cock up his hole. I pushed my cock into him very slowly and soon had it all the way in and began to fuck him. As I began to move in and out a little faster, Brad released his grip on his legs and moved them to my shoulders and locked his feet around my neck.

While I was fucking Brad I had a tight hold on his cock and could feel it jerking from pleasure. Brad told me, “Fuck me harder and faster, Baby. That feels so good”. I speeded up my fucking movements and could feel my buttocks getting real tight and firm and then relaxing. Brad asked me to stop for a few minutes because he was about to cum. I left my cock up his asshole and bent over and kissed him for several minutes until he told me to fuck him some more and for me to shoot my load up his ass.

It did not take me long until I felt the pleasure of ejaculation and releasing my cum while my cock was in him as far as it would go and my nuts were jammed up next to his butt. I feel across his body pending his raging cock between our two bodies and kissed him until my cock became soft and slipped out of his asshole.

We lay there kissing for some time while Brad had a hold of my buttocks and had spread my cheeks and had a finger up my ass massaging my asshole. He patted my butt and told me to roll off him and get ready to get fucked. He put on a condom and lube and prepared my asshole to be fucked.

As he started to enter me, he apologized and told me that he was so near shooting off that he did not think he could fuck me very long before cumin. I told him to give it to me. Buck’s cock felt so good and big when he got it in all the way. Buck knew how to fuck a guy to make him enjoy being fucked.

Buck was fucking the hell out of me when he put it all the way into me, arched his head and shoulders back and yelled, “I’m cumin, I’m cumin, Jesus!”. Buck pulled his cock out of me and lay down beside me. I whispered in his ear, “Thanks for making all that noise when you shot off. Now everyone in camp knows that I have been fucked”. He laughed and kissed me and then asked if it were hot or was it just him. Our body temperature had warmed up the tent and we could smell the odors resulting from having sex.

Brad got real close to me and again put his leg up over me and his arm across my chest. I squeeze my arm and hand between our bodies and held his now limp cock. We feel asleep and when we woke up the next morning we were in the same position but both of us had pisshards. We got dressed and head to the john.

We had breakfast, fixed lunches, cleaned the dishes, and were ready for another day of hiking. We took a different trail this time and we also remembered to take our cameras. We had missed some good shots the day before, especially the picture of the bear. This time, Brad insisted on my taking the lead. He said, “I know that yesterday you were looking at my rear and today it is my time to look at your sweet ass”.

We had a wonderful day of hiking and used our cameras to take a lot of shots of beautiful scenery, flowers, glaciers, animals and each other. We found a pretty small meadow with a grove of aspen trees nearby, where we had lunch. After lunch we removed our clothes and lay down together and sun bathe and slept for a couple of hours before starting back to camp.

When we got back to camp we took another bath in the lake, fixed and ate supper, cleaned up, put the food back into the car and went to our tent. Shortly after we got into the tent it started to pour down rain. This just was another plus in our lovemaking. We enjoyed having sex for several hours and because of the noise of the rain we could loudly express ourselves as we were pleasuring each other. We were both hot for each other’s bodies and cocks as we had been thinking and looking forward all day towards having sex with each other.

Before we were finished, both of us had two climaxes before we fell asleep in each other’s arms. Sometime during the night it really began to storm and there were strong winds hitting our tent. It woke us up. We set up and held and kissed each other while listening to the rain, thunder, lightening and wind. After the weather started to calm down some, we laid back down hugged each other and went back to sleep.

When we got up the firewood and everything outside was wet. Brad finally got a fire started and we fixed breakfast and did everything around the camp before taking off hiking again. We hiked up a new trail for about an hour. The sun had not come out and it was cloudy and looked like it was going to start raining at anytime. We decided to return to camp. Just as we got back to camp the sun came out and it began to warm up. We ate our lunch and decided to take a walk around the shoreline of the lake.

After we returned from our walk, we grabbed our towels and soap and took off to have our cold bath. Brad and I had just stripped off and had gotten into the water when a young man appeared unexpectedly on the shore and was looking at us. He was a nice looking man but appeared to be the worst for wear. He was wearing those very tight fitting clothes the cyclists wear and you could almost see everything he had. He asked if he could join us and he stripped off and came into the water. He introduced himself and his name was Max.

When we got out of the water we noticed that Max’s clothes and towel were wet. I had finished drying off and offer Max my towel to dry off since his towel was wet. Max looked about like he had seen his last day. We invited him to come up to our campsite and have a cup of coffee.

Max had the body and physique of a typical cyclists, he had thin but muscular legs, small waistline, small rounded butt and not a once of fat. He was about five foot ten inches tall. He was about two years younger than Brad and I. He had an innocent looking boyish face and his uncut cock was about four inches while soft.

Max told us that he was cycling across the country. He started in New York City and was headed to Portland, Oregon. He had started off with two friends who had given up the trip just before reaching Chicago and had returned back home. So he was continuing the trip by himself. He had camped out last night at a campsite just inside the east entrance of Glacier National Park. The storm and wind last night had destroyed his tent and everything he had was wet and all his food was ruined. He had spent the day cycling on “Going To The Sun” road and was trying to get to Whitefish to buy a new tent and supplies but was not able to make it that far. He decided to rough it out in our campground for the night.

Max was cold and was wearing his wet clothes. I went in the tent and got some of my clothes and told him to come inside the tent and change.
While Max was changing clothes, Brad and I decided that we could not let the poor guy sleep out in the open in a wet bedroll and with no food. When Max finished putting on my clothes and rejoined us, we told him to go get his bicycle and things and come spend the night with us. We told him that it would be crowded in the tent with three people sharing two bedrolls but he was welcomed.

A big smile and relief showed on Max’s face and he thanked us and ran to get his things. Brad and I started to fix dinner and Max asked if we had something that he could heat up some water so he could shave and make himself more presentable. Brad put on a big pot of water and told Max when he had finished shaving that we would eat and then he wanted to shave and I told them that I also wanted to shave.

While we were eating Max said that if he could get to Whitefish tomorrow that he could wash his clothes and bedroll and dry them and if he could get a new tent, food and supplies that he would be in good shape to continue his trip to Portland.

Brad nor I could not detect any signs indicating that Max may be gay. We agreed that when we got in bed for the night that we would be as straight as we could be and let Max be the aggressor if he were so inclined.

After we had finished eating, shaving, and did necessary things to be done before going to bed, it was getting dark and the three of us headed to the tent. When we got to the tent, I suggested to Brad that we let Max go in first and get ready for bed because three of in the small tent getting undressed at the same time would be difficult. So Max went in first and when he finished undressing he let us know that he had finished. I went in next and pulled all my clothes off except for my briefs and T-shirt. I started to get into the bedrolls with Max and he asked “Are you going to wear that to bed? I am naked.” I quickly removed my underwear and joined Max. When Brad came in he had overheard our conversation and stripped naked and joined us in bed.

Max asked, “Are we going to have a threesome tonight or am I going to just lay here while you two get it on?” Brad and I started to laugh and soon Max was laughing with us. Brad asked Max, “How did you know that we were gay?” Max said, “Well it takes one to know one, but when I found empty condom wrappers, lube, used condoms over there in the corner and the bedrolls zipped together, there was little doubt”.

Max told us, “After riding my bicycle all day with the bicycle seat rubbing my asshole and nuts, it makes me real horny. I have to jack off every night to relieve the tension. Last night the storm ripped my tent apart just before I was about to shoot off and I have had a hard on most of the day while riding. I really have a big load for you guys tonight, if you are interested”.

I told Max to change places with me and get between Brad and me since he was the guest of honor and we would take care of his problem. Brad told Max that since he was the guest of honor that he should tell or show us what he like to do. Max said, “I have been known to have sucked a guy’s cock all night long if that was what it took to get the guy to shoot. I love sucking cocks especially when they are attached to good-looking guys like you. I am also very versatile and enjoy being bottom as well as being top. I just don’t get into some of the kinky stuff”.

Brad started kissing Max while Max was feeling and stroking Brad’s cock. I moved down and started massaging Max’s feet, calves of his legs, thighs, until I reached Max’s pride and joy. Max’s four or four and half inch flaccid uncut cock was about seven and half to eight inches when erected and stood up close to his abdomen. When I took a hold of it and held it out straight and released it, his cock would jerk back up and made a slapping noise on his abdomen. I was stroking Max’s cock while stroking my own and Max suggested that we all suck each other’s cocks at the same time. We got into a position that Max was sucking me, I was sucking Brad and Brad was sucking Max.

Max attacked my cock with vengeance. He was taking it all in, releasing it completely and swallowing it again. Max said that he likes to suck cocks, but he did not tell us how good he was at it. He certainly knew how to get a guy into a state of ecstasy. I could hardly concentrate on giving my best to give Brad the satisfactions that I wanted to give him. We continued to have oral sex until Max announced that unless Brad stopped now that he would have to shoot his load.

Brad and I had Max lay on his back and Brad put on a condom and prepared Max’s asshole for his invasion. While Brad was making the necessary preparation, I was on my knees stroking Max’s big cock. Brad put Max’s legs up, put a pillow under his ass and slowly enters his cock into Max’s hole and began to fuck him. I leaned over and kissed Max with both of our mouths open with our tongues playing with each other. Max asked me to get on top of him so he could suck my cock or I could fuck his face. I moved into a position that my cock was touching Max’s lips and I bent over and began to give head to Max while he again was giving my cock the utmost pleasure.

Max was certainly enjoying having sex and the attention that he was receiving. He was making a sound like a cat purring. As I was giving Max a blowjob and going all the way down on him, my nose touching his nuts, I felt Brad hitting the top of my head while he was thrusting his cock deep into Max. I heard Brad begin to take irregular breaths and was expecting at any time for him to shoot his load. I increased my rhythm on Max’s tool and Max had also going up and down on my dick at a faster and stronger rate. Max was the first to unload his cum into my throat. When he started to shoot I barely had his cock in my mouth and he shot with such force that it hit the back of my throat. I immediately went all the way down on him to receive the rest of his load. Max had previously stated that he had a build up load for us and he was not kidding. He was shaking involuntarily and was thrusting his ass up and down fucking my face. The movement of Max’s ass caused Brad’s cock a sensation that caused him to climax and Max had continued to suck my dick and I exploded deep into Max’s throat.

We lay down beside each other with Max in the middle. Max said, “That was great. There is nothing like having a big cock up your ass, being given a blowjob and giving a blowjob at the same time”. Max reached over and with one hand he took hold of my soft dick and with the other hand he held Brad’s dick. He shook our dicks and thanked us. I reached over Max and gently griped and patted Brad’s buttock. Brad leaned over Max and kissed me on my lips.

We snuggled up to each other and lay there quiet for a few minutes. Max broke the silence and said, “I don’t know about you guys but that was the best sex that I have had in a long time. I am completely satisfied, gratified, and relaxed and ready for some sleep. If one of us wakes up during the night would it be alright to wake up the other two and have sex again?” Brad and I both agreed to Max’s suggestion and we all feel into a deep sleep.

Sometime during the night it started to rain and about two or three o’clock, lightening struck nearby and all three of us set up wide-awake and at the same time yelled, “Shit”. We started to laugh and hug each other. Max said, “Well I did set the alarm and it did go off”, and we laughed again.

After the lightening struck, it was very quiet and the sound of the rain hitting the tent set the mood to have sex again. After we had sufficient foreplay and had played with and sucked each other cocks for a while, it was Brad’s turn to be the bottom and my turn to be the top. Max assumed the position that I had earlier and Max was giving head to Brad and Brad was performing oral sex on Max. We each deposited our second load of cum into each other within a thirty-minute period and returned to a deep sleep while it gently rained.

Max was the first one to stir as the sun was coming up. The rain had stopped. Max hurriedly got dress and took off to the john to relieve himself. Brad and I were right behind Max. Everything was wet and the rain had caused a fresh and delightful scent from the trees.

Brad successfully at starting a fire and fixed breakfast while Max and I packed Max’s wet things and tied them onto his bike. Max took off my clothes and put on his wet cycling outfit. I tried to get Max to keep my clothes but he insisted that his were more suited for cycling. After breakfast, Max asked for Bran and my address, which he wrote on a piece of paper and carefully placed it in his satchel. Max thanked us for our hospitality and the good time in bed. He hugged and kissed each of us and started on his way to Whitefish. Brad and I commented that Max’s bike seat was once again rubbing on Max’s asshole and nuts. His small ass seems to fit the seat perfectly. As he was leaving we saw him join up with some other cyclist headed towards Whitefish, so we knew that he was in good company.

After Max had left, I told Brad about reading about the Park having a full day horseback trips. We secured everything at camp and got in the car to investigate the possibility of making a horseback trip into the high country. We found the place were the trips originated and they were preparing to leave. We were just in time that we could make the trip. The horseback trip was unbelievable. We had a wonderful time and took a lot of pictures of mountain goats, other animals, and landscapes. After ridding a horse all day, we found a place that we could take a hot shower and a place that we could eat at a lodge near one of the campgrounds. Upon returning to camp we were sore, tired, and ready to hit the sack even though the sun had not gone down.

Brad and I undressed and crawled into our bedrolls and Brad put his arm around me and told me that his ass and legs were so sore from ridding the horse and that he was so tired that he did not think that he could fuck around tonight. I begin to laugh and told him I was in the same shape but he just beat me in saying it first. We lay on our backs close to each other and each of us was fondling each other cocks. Before long each of us had erections and with no real effort we masturbated each other until we had shot our cum onto our stomachs. Brad reached for a towel and we clean ourselves off and went to sleep.

The following morning we were both still sore and we were not interested in hiking. We got in the car and went to other places of interest in Glacier National Park. We even visited the part of the Park that extended into Canada. Days that followed we did make other hikes into the wilderness and there were sexual encounters which we mutually enjoyed. The final day at Glacier National Park, we did not want to go home. Our campout could have not been more pleasurable. Reluctantly we broke camp late in the afternoon and headed home. Another night of driving but we broke the monotony of the drive by playing with each other’s cocks and held off climaxing until we were close to being home.

When we got home, each of us wanted to see each other as often as we could and we wanted to go on another camping trip in the near future.

About a week after we got home I received a postcard from Max and he made it to Portland, Oregon without any trouble. He wrote, “Beware of cyclists. Some of us love to do the same things that you do,” signed Max

[patrick]

wow that was a real good one talk about amazing i got to get my self in gear and write something as well though its been a long time since i have penned something, but hell i have about 10 years of memories lol

[unoponcho]

Patrick, Thanks for your reply. Glad you enjoyed the story. I will look forward towards reading the story or stories that your write. Please do not keep us waiting to long.

Kevin

[unoponcho]

Cop For A Lover

By Kevin



I had moved into a small duplex and had lived there little over a month. It had a small kitchen and eating area, a good size living room/den, nice sized master bedroom, a further small bedroom and a one-car garage.

My next-door neighbor was a policeman named Art and like me was twenty-four years old. He was a very good-looking guy about five foot ten inches tall and in very good shape as he regularly visited the gym and jogged several miles each day. We had run into each other outside our duplexes and visited with each other several times just chitchatting but did not know one another all that well.

Art’s work schedule varied and he would work different hours on different days of the week. He had a habit of changing into his uniform at the police headquarters and very seldom came home in it, so hardly any of the neighbors knew he was a policeman. Most days he would go to the gym and work out before returning home in his civilian clothes.

One Saturday afternoon, Art was outside, barefooted, wearing only a pair of shorts working in the yard and then washing his car. He liked to work in the yard and be out doors and when he mowed, trimmed hedges, etc.; he would also do my side of the yard. It only took him a few more minutes to do this and he said he found it enjoyable.

One day a couple of my very close, ‘nellie’ and obviously gay friends paid me an unexpected visit. They were swishing their asses towards my duplex when they saw Art washing his car in the driveway. Before they were even inside my door they were gawking and talking about what a stud Art was. Without doubt, it was apparent Art realised that these two queens were talking about him. They were disappointed when I told them that he was a cop.

My friends visited for a half an hour and as they were leaving another gay friend named Bud showed up. Within ten minutes Burt and Gene, who had been together for ten years, came in bringing several cartons of cold beer. It was evident that we were going to have a party.

We had left my front door open and as I looked out I saw Art passing by. I went outside where Art was turning off the sprinkler that he had used earlier to water the lawn. He had finished all his outside chores, taken a shower, put on some clean shorts and was still barefooted. He remembered that he had left the sprinklers running and had come out to turn them off. I asked him if he would like to come inside and have a beer. He accepted the invite telling me he would go lock up his duplex and be right over.

I quickly went back inside and told Burt, Gene and Bud that Art was coming to have a beer and warned them to behave themselves, as he was a policeman.

After handing Art a beer, I introduced him to my friends, he set down, and when he did so ,as he was not wearing any underwear, his dick popped out of the leg of his shorts. He quickly adjusted himself unaware that Bud and I noticed. Burt and Gene had gone into the kitchen and had missed the treat. I looked at Bud who was smiling, as he turned quickly and went to the bathroom.

We were talking and beginning to relax when Bud came back into the den. He sat down and we continued to talk for a few more minutes before Bud jumped up and rushed into the kitchen. I looked up and saw that he was motioning for me to join him. No one saw Bud waving to me. I went into the kitchen and he whispered saying that he had to go home because he kept getting an erection every time he looked at Art. He said, “Art is the hottest guy I have seen in ages”. I let him out through the back door and returned to the den and explained that Bud was sick in his stomach and had gone home.

Each of us drunk a couple more beers and was having a great time. Soon we were feeling the effects of the alcohol. I suggested that I order some pizzas to be delivered and everyone thought it was a great idea since we all were hungry.

After eating the pizzas, Burt and Art continued to drink beer. It was not long before we ran out of beer and I got out a bottle of vodka that was about a third full. Burt and Art started mixing drinks and drinking vodka. We were all having a great time laughing and talking especially Gene and I. Even though we had stopped drinking several hours ago, just watching Art and Burt getting plastered and carrying on was fun.

Art and Burt had finished off the vodka so Art went to his duplex and brought back a full bottle. They started drinking straight vodka and now everyone was laughing, talking loudly and making a lot of noise. Art stood up, weaving around drunk, he said, “Shoo, everybody quiet down. I don’t want any of those goddamn fucking policemen to come and arrest us for disturbing the peace”. Everyone started to laugh until tears were coming down our cheeks.

After Art set back down on the couch he got very quiet and then he announced, “I have never been drunk in my whole fucking life and I am having one hell of a good time”. Burt got up and staggered over and put his hand on Art’s shoulder and said, “Man your cock is hanging out your shorts”. Art replied, “I don’t give a shit. If you seen one you have seen them all”. Burt set down beside Art and put his arms around him. Art scoot down in his seat; leaned his head back on Burt’s arm, and moments later he passed out.

Gene shook his head and told me that he had to get Burt home before he passed out. He asked me what I was going to do about Art and I told him that he could sleep it off on my couch. I helped Gene get Burt into their car and I asked Gene if he could handle getting Burt to bed when they got home. He told me that if Burt passed out before they got home that he was going to leave him in the car parked in their garage. Gene came back inside and helped me stretch Art out of the couch. He was out cold and never knew that Gene and I had moved him.

After Gene and Burt left, I got a blanket and a pillow for Art. As I put the pillow under his head, he rolled over and his cock was sticking out of his shorts as hard as a rock. I stood there looking down on this beautiful man and his big hard cock for several minutes. My own pride and joy was at full attention in my pants. I was thinking here is this man on my couch fully erected and I dare not touch him. I spread the blanket over him and cut off the lights and went into my bedroom and went to bed.

I lay in bed with an erection for a long time fantasying about having sex with him. The more I thought about it the more I lusted for his body and the hornier I became. Finally, I decided the hell with it and I beat off and went to sleep.

Sunday morning I woke up and Art was still asleep. I slipped into the kitchen and put the coffee on and went to the bathroom to shave and shower.

I was so used to living alone that it never occurred to me to shut the bathroom door. I was standing naked in front of the mirror shaving and Art walks in and says, “Excuse me, I can’t wait. I have to piss”. After he had finished I told him, “good morning! I have some coffee making and I have some donuts”. He said, “Great! Could I shave and shower while the coffee is making?” I told him fine and I got him a new throw away razor, clean towel and handed him the shaving cream. He began to shave and I went into the bedroom to get a robe to put on once I had taken my shower. I returned to the bathroom and glanced over at his beautifully shaped body before getting into the shower. When I came out, he had finished shaving, taken off his shorts and was standing there holding his semi-hard cock watching me while I dried off and put on my robe. I wondered to myself, is this guy coming on to me or what?

I left to go check on the coffee and put the donuts on the table and could hear him in the shower. By the time I finished getting the cups, saucers and plates out and set the table, I heard him turn off the shower but after he had had plenty of time to come to the table he had still not put in an appearance. Curious, I went to the bedroom to check on him to see what was causing the hold up.

He was lying naked on his back on my bed and was masturbating. He looked up and saw me and motioned to me to come lie down with him. I was somewhat dumbfounded but I removed my bathrobe and lay down beside him. He turned over on his side and put his hand on my chest and said, “I have never had sex with a man before. I have a big favor to ask. I have heard some of my friends and fellow policemen talk about blowjobs and how great they are. I have never had a blowjob, would you suck me off so I will know how it feels?”

Without any hesitation, I moved in between his legs and lowered my head and kissed the tip of his cock and licked around the head before taking it into my mouth. As soon as I had his cock inside my mouth, he yelled out, “Holly Shit!!!” and then he softly said, “Another fucking disturbance of the peace”. I went all the way down on him and his whole body tensed up and he stopped breathing for several moments. I continued to give him head with the termination that I was going to do the best I could to please him. I wanted his first blowjob to be one for him to remember for a long time.

I kissed and sucked his nuts and I could hear him mumbling something but did not understand what he was saying but I knew that he was thoroughly enjoying what I was doing to him. Art and his cock were experiencing pleasure that they had never known before. Just before he was about to climax, he asked me to move so he could hold my cock while he shot off. I moved in a position that he could reach my cock and when he took a hold of it, his hand had been sweating which almost made me shoot off.

I started suck on his cock some more and he said, “I’ll let you know when I am about to shoot so you want get any of my cum in your mouth”. I rose up and smiled at him and told him to relax and not worry about it. I continued to give him oral sex and the closer he got to ejaculating the harder his grip got on my cock. I was just about to reach down and take his hand away when he started trying to take his cock out of my mouth and when I resisted and kept on moving my head up and down, he began shooting off in my mouth. I had taken his cock all the way to its base several times while he was shooting and continued to suck him for several minutes after he lost his load.

I returned to Art’s side and my fingers were playing with his tits while he was trying to regain his breath and composure. After several minutes passed, he rose up on his elbow and looked straight at me and said, “Well, that is what they are talking about. I have never enjoyed anything more in my whole life. If you gay guys do this all the time, I can certainly understand why”. I reached down and took a hold of his limp cock and looked him in the eyes and said, “With the great equipment that you have down there you should try it more often”. I rolled out of bed and told him the coffee was ready.

As we were drinking our coffee and eating donuts, I kept catching Art starring at me. Finally, I asked him, “What are you thinking? You just keep looking at me”. He smiled real big and said, “I just can not believe it. You made me feel so fucking good”.

I asked him if he had a hangover from last night and he answered, “I did before that blowjob but not anymore”. I said, “Good, we have discovered a new solution for hangovers”. We both smiled at each other.

He looked over at the clock and said, “Jesus, I have got to go to work. I have a six hour shift coming up”. He jumped up patted me on the shoulder and left.

Late that afternoon, Glen and Burt dropped by and they wanted me to go with them to a party to which they had been invited. Burt looked like he just needed to go home and go to bed. He was in pretty bad shape but Glen was insisting that they go to the party if for only a little while. I asked Glen if he was able to get Burt to bed last night and Burt said, “Hell no, the bastard left me out in the car”.

The doorbell rang and I went to answer the door finding a smiling Art standing there in his uniform. He looked great in the uniform and was so handsome but I have to admit I preferred to see him naked. He came in and greeted Glen and Burt and looked at Burt and told him that he looked like something that the dog had drug home. Glen asked Art, “How come you don’t have a hangover?” Art walked over and put his arms around my shoulders and said, “My friend here has a remedy for hangovers”. Both Glen and Burt looked at me and saw me smiling. They were curious but did not ask any questions.

Glen asked me if I was going with them to the party. Before I had a chance to answer, Art grabbed me around my waist and said, “He is not going to a party. I am placing him under arrest and he is going out to dinner and will spend the evening with me”. Glen and Burt’s mouths dropped open as wide as mine. We were all shocked and then Glen said, “With or without the handcuffs?” As Glen and Burt were leaving, Art told me, “Go put a smile on your face and let’s go eat”.

We enjoyed our meal at a very nice restaurant and afterwards we spent the night together. Art wanted to try giving me a blowjob and he was very successful in his efforts. We had sex together that night and again the next morning before we both went to work.

Art and I had slept together for four nights and explored several gay sexual avenues but both preferred giving oral sex to each other. He told me that he had fallen in love with me and I had also fallen deeply in love with him. He told me that his lease was up on his duplex and he had not yet signed a lease for the coming year. He wanted to know if he could move in with me.

That was seven years ago and Art and I are still living together and still in love.

Shortly after Art and I moved in together, , a notice appeared on the bulletin board at the police headquarters stating that they were looking for someone to be a liaison officer between the gay community and the police department. Art put in his application and two weeks later the Chief of Police called him in for an interview. At the interview the Chief of Police told him that no one else had submitted an application and that the job was his. He was to start the next morning and not only was he to receive a promotion but his salary would almost be doubled. The chief did not ask Art if he was gay. Art has had the job ever since and still no one has asked questions about his lifestyle. Art has been very successful in his career and enjoys working with and helping gays and lesbians.

We lived in the duplex until my lease expired even though we could have afforded to move to larger and more expensive place. We had saved our money and made a down payment on a house. The new house provided Art with the opportunity to landscape the yard and potter around on a regular basis, something that has always given him great enjoyment.

We have about fifteen neighborhood kids who have adopted us. They call Art, “Uncle Officer” or “Uncle” for short and they call me “Unk”.

No white picket fences, but we love our home, our careers; love each other and our kids.

There is nothing like having a handsome cop for a lover

[butchmeister]

Greeting from Jersey.

I just wanted to tell you it was a great story -- a fanasty looking for mr. right.

thank you.
..|

[unoponcho]

The Exhibitionist

By Kevin


From my early teens, I always enjoyed fishing, and at one time I was very energetic and used a lot of that energy in trying to catch fish. I was about to reach my mid-forties and I had become lazy. I had found a fishing dock on a lake where I could set leisurely in a chair while fishing and I went there very often to fish from sundown to sun up when the weather was comfortably warm.

There was only one streetlight on the parking lot so the fishing dock was dark and fishermen would bring their Coleman lanterns to light up their selected fishing area. The dock attracted all kinds of characters who came to fish and I enjoyed stopping by and talking to these interesting men and women; in fact visiting with these people was as or even more enjoyable than actually catching fish!

The area was normally very crowded most of the time between sundown and mid-night when folk began to leave. By 1:00 am there would be probably no more than four people remaining and often they would have left within an hour or so if the fish were not biting. After everyone had gone, it would be very quiet when I would relish the solitude for the remainder of the early hours of the morning; I so enjoyed being out of doors on my own.

Deer and other animals would come from the woods and down to the lake for water. As for me, I was one of those unusual fishermen who really did not care if I made a catch or not; often I would reel in my lines and set back and just watch the wildlife.

One fisherman that I meet was named Ron who had been there several times while I was fishing. We had never talked much and I knew nothing about him apart from his first name. It was hard to judge Ron’s age but I estimated that he was in his late twenties. He was about six foot two inches tall and he had broad shoulders and at a guess, I would say he had a thirty-four-inch waistline.

Very often wore only jeans. He had black wavy hair and had short black hair on his chest and stomach. From the appearance of his face and body, I would think that he probably worked or spent a lot of time in the sun. His physique and muscle tones, led me to assume that he was laborer of some kind that required a good deal of strength. Ron had brought his very pretty and attractive girlfriend fishing several times. Observing Ron and the way he acted it was clear that he was very masculine and as straight as straight could be.

One night, I was fishing and the dock was crowded as usual. It was a beautiful night with a full moon that was so bright that lanterns were not really necessary. Around mid-night, the dock began to clear as people made for home. It was then that I saw Ron coming on the dock with his fishing tackle, chair, lantern and an ice chest. As he passed by me, he said, “Hi”. All he had on were jeans that had been cut off very short and he was barefooted. He lit his lantern, opened a can of beer and started to fish about twenty feet from me.

An hour later, around 1.00 am, Ron and I were the only ones on the dock. I had reeled in my fishing lines, turned off my lantern, and slumped down in my chair as I finished smoking a cigarette. It was such a beautiful night; so peaceful and quiet, I was so relaxed and was great to be out of doors. I began to doze off when I heard something beside me. I looked around and Ron was about four feet away, naked, wearing a cock ring and stroking his erection!

Ron was well endowed with big balls and what looked like about a nine-inch long, thick dick. I looked up at him and he was smiling. I was so shocked that I did not know what to say or do. He turned his back to me and flexed his buttocks several times and turned back facing me while whacking on his dick. My cock had immediately gotten hard and wanted to be released from the confines of my jock strap and short gym shorts. Ron moved up closer to me and was gyrating his body while stroking his dick.

I reached over and was going take hold of his tool but he backed off some and told me, “Don't touch me! You can watch but don’t touch! No damn queer is ever going to touch my big cock!”

I pulled my hand back and He moved closer to me and continued to masturbate. He kept moving around showing off his body and his cock. The way the moonlight and the light from his distant lantern was hitting his body, it was delightful to see the beauty that he was exhibiting.

Ron moved up close and put his foot on the arm of my chair giving me a full view of his crutch and a close-up of his masturbating. He stayed in this position for about three or four minutes looking down at me smiling all the while he was stroking his cock.

I had released my dick and it was standing tall from of the leg of my shorts. While watching Ron, I was playing with and stroking my dick. He looked down and saw that I was now stroking my dick and he said, “So you are enjoying looking at my big cock. Yours is not a big as mine. I bet you have never seen anyone with as big of a cock as mine”.

I could not help but lie a little and replied, “Being a Queer, as a matter of fact, I have seen a few as big if not bigger than yours”.

He stepped back a little ways, while still beating his meat, and he stared at me and watching me as I stroked my dick. He then moved up close enough for his cock to almost touch my face. I saw some precum and he quickly smeared it to lubricate his enormous cock. He then stood up straight and with one hand he reached around and gripped one of his cheeks and pushed his hips forward, sticking his dick out towards me while beating the hell out of it.

He kept staring, for long periods of time, at my cock while I was jacking off for it excited him all the more knowing that his exhibition had caused me to be aroused. Now he had one hand cupping his balls while the other hand increased its stroking speed. He was gyrating his hips, flexing his butt and had his head pulled back with a twisted smile on his face. He was going to shoot off at any minute.

All the while watching Ron, I had been jacking off and I too was nearing a climax. He began to make guttural noises and shouted, “I am going to shoot! I am going to shoot! I am going to shoot all over you, you fucking faggot!” He stepped up close to me and shot off his cum all over my T-shirt and shorts. He stood there continuing to yank on his cock for a short time and then shook it to make sure there was no more cum on his dick and wiped it on my T-shirt.

He backed away a couple feet and watched me as I continued to beat off. I stood up and only moments later I shot my wad. I was looking at him when I ejaculated and the expression on his face told me that he had been turned on seeing my climax. I removed my T-shirt and wiped Ron’s cum off my shorts.

He grabbed the T-shirt from my hand saying, “Some of your Goddamn shit landed on my foot”. He leaned over and wiped my cum off his foot and threw my T-shirt back at me. As he was putting on his shorts, I said, “Thanks for the compliment”. He wanted to know “What fucking compliment. I did not give you a compliment”. I replied, “Yes you did. You called me a Queer and a Faggot”.

He stomped off and went back to his seat and opened another beer. I set down and smoked a cigarette and in a few minutes I looked up and he had his beer in one hand and his chair in his other hand and was headed towards me. He put his chair down next to mine and asked if he could talk to me.

Ron apologized for his actions and what he had just said to me. I became aware that he wanted to talk and I propped my feet up on the dock railing in front of me leaned back in my chair and listened to him.

“I am not the kind of person that you just saw. I have never done anything like that before in my life and I hate myself for the way I acted. You are a very nice person and I treated you like shit. I am very sorry and I do hope that you will forget what I said and what I did”.

“My girlfriend and I broke up three weeks ago and I have been in the dumps ever since. I had a lot to drink tonight both before and since I got here but that is no excuse for my actions and I know that. I was just horny and I needed to get my rocks off and wanted to be close to someone when I did it. I have never had sex with anyone other than a few times with my girlfriend. I have not jacked off in four weeks. As I just said, I know that you are a nice person. I had no reason to believe that you were gay. I just said the things I did without thinking.

“Hell, I have never even seen another man with a hard on before seeing yours. The only reason I thought I had a bigger cock than average was because my girlfriend told me so. On the whole, I suppose I have had a very sheltered life I guess. I just do not know much about sex other than I did like fucking my girlfriend and I like jacking off.

“What I do not understand is why I have always thought you were attractive and why I enjoyed jacking off in front of you. Why did it turned me on to watch you jack off and shoot your cum? You are the only guy that I have been the least bit interested in. I hope that it was just curiosity and that it never happens again”.

I accepted Ron’s apology and told him that I was sorry that he and his girlfriend had broken up. I also told him, “I can forgive and forget the unkind things you said but that I can not forget looking at your nice body and dick while you masturbated. I enjoyed what you did and you have made my day, both because of your performance and your apology”.

Ron and I talked for another hour or so before our conversation had run its course. We had not said anything to each in a while and I looked over at him and he had fallen asleep in his chair and was softly snoring.

The sun was just coming up and I packed my things and went home, leaving him alone on the dock sound asleep. To my regret, I never saw Ron again for after I had got to know him I found he was such a very nice person. I could but hope that he was not overcome with guilt and purposely was avoiding fishing on the dock for fear of seeing me again.

----oooo----

After Ron’s exhibition and talking to him, I have thought many times about the dynamics and tried to analyse the event. Many questions come to my mind.

Why did Ron perform the exhibition?

Was it a sudden impulse or had he planned it all in advance?

If I were not there, would he have preformed his exhibition for some one else?


Was Ron acting on a subconscious desire to explore his homosexual tendencies?

Did he subconsciously want to have sex with me?

Did he say that he was attracted to me to make me feel good or was he really attracted to me and why?

Was he as naive about sex as he said he was; it is hard to believe in this day and time but it is possible?

Why did Ron come fishing wearing a cockring?

Being as naive as he said he was, where did he get the cockring?

Before arriving at the dock, had he planned to masturbate or to engage in some kind of sexual activity while he was fishing?

Very possible, occasionally, I had enjoyed masturbating when I was alone on the dock.

Will Ron perform such an exhibition again?

It appeared that it was exciting to him but was the excitement enough to cause a repeat performance?

I do not think so but it is possible. Was Ron’s reaction, as I was about to touch him, because he thought that it would cause him to have doubts about his heterosexuality?

Perhaps, but he could have been completely truthful about not wanting or desiring a male to touch his privates. Did he have some serious emotional or mental problems that he needed to address?

The above are just a few of the questions and thoughts that have occurred to me since that most unusual night. What do you think – are there any questions or comments you have to add?

----oooo----

[Disneyboi]

That was a wonderful story. Excellent work :biggrin:

[unoponcho]

butchmeister
Greeting from Jersey.

I just wanted to tell you it was a great story -- a fanasty looking for mr. right.

*******
Thanks for reading my story. I am honored that it appears my story has caused you to make your first post on the board.

__________________

Autolycus

Now that is what you might call an arresting story.

********

Thanks for your contribution by your editing

__________________

Disneyboi
That was a wonderful story. Excellent work

********

Thanks for the compliment. It is always encouraging to receive replys and know that someone has read your story.

Kevin

[unoponcho]

Boss’s Gay Son

By Kevin


Very few people, if any, could be as fortunate as I am and was while growing up. My parents were the most wonderful parents any one could have. Both came from well-to-do families and had inherited large sums of money and my father was very successful in his career. We lived in a very large house and my living quarters consisted of a den, study area, small kitchenette, large bedroom, large bath, private outside entrance, and a carport for my car separate from the garage where my parents parked their cars. We had a maid, cook, and a gardener who took care of the swimming pool as well as the gardening.

My parents approach to rearing me was very unique and unusual. They were determined that I was not going to be spoiled and become a snotty rich kid. As I matured, they would give me more and more liberties responsibilities, and freedom. They never came into my living area without giving me ample warning and always respected my privacy.

At a very early age, my parents established a firm understanding that we were to eat our breakfast and evening meals together and there were to be no exceptions unless one of us were sick or not at home for a good reason.

Around the age of ten, my parents begin to recognize that I was showing some tendencies that I was homosexual. They did research and gathered enough information that they could have easily written a book on the subject. They accepted me for what I was and am and have always given me all their support and love.

When I was twelve years old my father set me down and told me to write out an agreement to a set of rules that I was to live by while living in their house. He then he read and approved what I had written and told me, “Son, the rules you have written are much more restricting than what your mother and I expect from you”. He had his secretary to type the document and my mother, father and I signed the agreement. This was just an example of how they approached me with everything. As a results, I matured faster, had more independents, and freedom than most young boys my age.

After finishing high school at the age of seventeen, I attended a near by University while still living at home. There was no point in moving out because I had all the freedom to come and go and was living an independent life and my parents wanted me to live with them. As it had been from my early teens, I could bring quest to my living area anytime I wanted and they sometimes would spend the night with me.

After I entered the University, my parents were traveling a lot and often would be gone for a month at a time.

When I was attending my last semester as senior at the University, my father and one of his long time friends, named Fred Dunn, asked me to come into my father’s office and talk to them. Mr. Dunn and his wife had often been dinner quest at our home and they belonged to the same Country Club that my mother and father belong. I had known them for several years.

Mr. Dunn owned a very successful company in town that was rapidly growing. Mr. Dunn asked me if I would be interested in working at the company as his assistant in his office. He had a couple of Vice-Presidents but their workload was more than they could handle and Mr. Dunn had to pick up the slack and needed help. He explained that there would be an opportunity for me to advance in the company. We reached an agreement that I would work part time for the next four weeks until I finished earning my degree and then work full time. So at the age of soon to be twenty-one, I had my first full time job.

A couple of weeks after being on my new job, Mr. Dunn asked me to have lunch with him. During the lunch, he told me that he had watched me grow up and had known that I was gay. He said that he had a lot of respect and admiration for the way I handled my gay lifestyle and that he had a personal situation that he wanted to talk about and to see if I were willing to help him.

He told me that his son, Jeff who was seventeen, was gay and was having difficulty in accepting the fact and was still in the closet. He did not know how to help him and did not know a better person who may be able to advise and help Jeff. I told him that I would be more than glad to talk to Jeff if he wanted to talk to me. Mr. Dunn said, “Oh, he will talk to alright. He thinks you are the hottest man alive and has a crush on you. My only concern is that you are going to have to consider his age and act accordingly. If you and Jeff get into a sexual relationship, my wife and I will understand. We think a lot of you and Jeff could not have made a better choice”.

I told Mr. Dunn that I would do what I could for Jeff but did not think it would end up with us having an affair because I generally was attracted to guys my own age and older. I thanked Mr. Dunn for his confidence in me and I would do my best to live up to his expectations. Mr. Dunn told me that he was going to invited his son for dinner the next day and that the three of us would go together for dinner and maybe after we return to the office that I might have a talk with his son.

The following day after dinner, I asked Jeff to come in my office and we talked for some time and I invited him to go to a musical concert with me that night.

After going to that one concert, Jeff and I began to do a lot of things together and we became very good friends. We got to the point that we could trust each other and talk about anything.

Jeff and I had this competition going on between the two of us. The company had a workout facility available to the employees and their families. Jeff and I were trying to outdo each other to see who could get the best physique and get in and stay in shape. Jeff had grown up to be a very handsome man and his body was something to behold. Jeff could walk into a gay bar and have other gay men falling all over themselves trying to go to bed with him.

After three years Jeff had accepted the fact that he was gay and was happy with himself. He had several gay sexual encounters, which he discussed with me, and I had shared some of my gay experiences with him.


When Jeff started to go to the University, Jeff’s parents bought him a condominium. Just by chance, there was a gay couple that lived next door and they became friends. Within the three-year span, when one of the units came on the market, they would talk another gay person or persons to buy the unit. Five of the six units of the condominium complex were owned by gays. A middle age man, who was homophobia, owned the one remaining unit. All the gay owners were causing him pure hell by not hiding the fact that they were gay.

There were two couples in two units and two single guys in the other two units. They all got together and planned a birthday party for Jeff who was going to be twenty-one and also to celebrate Jeff’s graduation coming up in two weeks. The condominium complex was built so the units surrounded an outdoor swimming pool and patio and all units had sliding doors giving access to this area. The party was planned to be around the swimming pool.

Jeff insisted that I be his date to the party. I had just received another promotion and was one of three Vice-Presidents. Jeff wanted me to come be at the party to celebrate my new positon along with celebrating his birthday and graduation.

Late in the afternoon of the party, I arrived at Jeff’s unit and Jeff greeted me in his Speedo swimsuit and took me to his bedroom for me to change into my Speedo. Jeff left and told me to come out to the pool when I was ready.
When I got out to the pool, one of the queens living in one of the units had outdone himself and everything around the pool was elaborately decorated. I was introduced to everyone and mixed my self a drink and set down beside Jeff.

There were eight people at the party including Jeff and I. The queen who did the decorating was wearing a horrible looking sarong with a ridiculously looking tall white chef’s hat. He had proclaimed that he was the cook for the event and was busy flitting around a charcoal grill. One of the couples and one of the single guys were wearing T-backs and all three had the buttocks and bodies to make the T-back very appropriate attire. The other couple was completely naked and their physiques were very eye appealing, as well.

Jeff turned up the music real loud and the naked couple started to dance and kiss each other. They were not too far from the sliding door of the homophobic’s unit. He came to his door and observed what was going on and said, “You are just a bunch of cocksuckers!” He jerked his door closed and closed the drapes. Everyone just laughed and the queen yelled out, “Do you want to join us? I hear you suck cock very well”.

As the party progressed, everyone had a lot to drink; all of us had been pushed into the pool a couple of times; we had danced with each other; and everyone was having a great time acting like idiots. We eat our dinner and the food was excellent. A couple of the guys cleaned off the picnic table and the food was taken inside and put in the refrigerator. The chairs were arranged in a circle and Jeff’s presents were placed in the middle. Everyone fixed himself another drink and we set down and talked and laughed. Every time I finished my drink someone would bring me another one. I was getting drunk and was camping with the rest of them.

Jeff got up and went to the center of the circle and opened his gifts and as he opened a gift he would get up and kiss and thank the person that it was from.

Just as Jeff started to open his last gift, the single guy in the T-back whose name was Mike, brought me a drink and set down in my lap and was acting like he was giving me a lap dance. Jeff put down the gift he was unwrapping and came over and grabbed Mike by the arm and pulled him off me and said, “Mike, get you slutty ass off my date. He is mine and all mine”. I did not know what to say because I had never seen Jeff acting that way. Mike tried to apologize to Jeff but Jeff was still upset. Jeff opened his last gift and thanked whoever gave it to him and came over and slapped me on the knee before pulling his chair closer to me and set down.

In no time everyone was drinking, laughing, and the party was still in full swing. All during the party, I was experiencing difficulty to keep from having an erection. These guys walking around with nothing or practically nothing on and the alcohol had caused me to be extremely horny and it was difficult to hide my erections. I looked down one time and my cock was sticking out of my swimsuit pointing towards my navel. Someone’s towel was nearby and I put it in my lap before anyone saw my erection.

I had drunk way beyond the limit to which it was safe for me to drive home. I was not real surprise when I saw one of the guys come from Jeff’s unit and tell Jeff that he had taken my car keys and I would have to spend the night. I said, ”What the hell. I’m to drunk even to get myself another drink. Would some one please get me another drink?” I don’t remember much after that. I do remember Mike and the queen helping me to Jeff’s quest bedroom and on the way, I accidentally knock the queen’s chef’s hat off. I remember them taking off my wet swimsuit and laying me on the bed naked and I was asking where was my underwear and Mike saying “You do not need your fucking underwear” and Mike jumped in bed with me and the queen pulling Mike off the bed and Mike saying, “I was just going to kiss him goodnight”.

Early the next morning, I suddenly woke up and was aware that someone was sucking my cock. I looked down and to my surprise it was Jeff. Jeff and I had never had sex together before, in fact, we had never seen each other’s dick erected. I was not really for sure if it was a good idea for us to have sex together. I never wanted anything to become between the close friendships that we had.

My cock was so hard and I did not know if it was because of Jeff sucking on it or because I needed to take a piss. I reached down and pulled Jeff off my dick and went to the bathroom. As I was going to the bathroom I saw Jeff’s erection for the first time and his cock was as beautiful as his body and that was all I could think about while pissing. I never lost my erection and returned to the bed and Jeff. Jeff was lying on the bed when I returned and he was jacking on his big cock. I climbed in bed with him and we looked into each other’s eyes and knew that each of us was having lustful thoughts and desired to give each other sexual pleasure.

For some time we just lay in bed on our sides, stroking each other’s cocks and starring at each other. I moved into a position that I could give Jeff a blowjob and my cock was close enough that he could suck on my dick if he desired. I looked at Jeff’s cock for several moments before starting to try to please him. I could not get over this youthful undeveloped teen becoming such a handsome well-developed man with such a big attractive cock waiting for me to devour. I licked the precum off and twirled it in my mouth and savored its taste. I licked the shaft of his cock and it was jerking with excitement. Without any warning, I engulfed his entire cock down my throat and Jeff yelled “H-o-l-l-y Crap!” Then Jeff went all the way down on me.

I don’t know which of his boyfriends taught him how to suck a dick, but he had it down to a perfection. I had never had anyone to give me a blowjob the way he was doing it. I was a novice compared to Jeff. It was difficult, while my cock was receiving so much pleasure and excitement, to try to observe what Jeff was doing and to do the same thing to him at the same time. I was trying my best to learn Jeff’s technique. Even the way he tantalized my nuts sent shivers up and down my spine. From the time he started until I ejaculated, I was in a state of ecstasy that I had never encountered before. If Jeff never accomplishes anything else, he has proven to be a good sex partner. If being in good shape has anything to do with the quality of having good sex, we certainly cash in on the benefits.

After each of us had ejaculated we continued to tease and suck each other until we each reached our second climax.

I moved to be beside Jeff and we lay there holding each other for another thirty minutes or so without saying anything. I knew that I needed to talk to him about what just happened but I could not think of the best way to approach the issue or how to word what I thought was necessary to say regarding our having sex.

Jeff broke the silence and he suggested that we get a cup of coffee and go out by the pool. We put on our wet swimsuits and when we got out to the pool, we noticed that the guys had removed the decorations and had cleaned the patio. We had barely set down and Mike came out with a cup of coffee in one hand and a pot of coffee in the other. He said good morning and refilled our cups before setting down. He said he came out to apologize to both of us for his actions last night. We accepted his apologize and Jeff offered his apology for loosing his temper. Mike looked at both of us and asked, “Did you guys get it on this morning?” Jeff and I just smiled as Mike looked at us, “Well,--- that answered my fucking busybody question”.

I suggested to Jeff and Mike that we go somewhere and have breakfast and I told Jeff that after we got back that I needed to talk to him. When we got back from breakfast, Mike thanks me for breakfast and went to his place.

I put my arms around Jeff’s neck and hugged him real tight for several moments and I asked him to set down next to me. I still did not know exactly how to say what I thought should be discussed.

“Jeff, we have been friends for several years and I do not want either or both of us to ever do anything that will break up our friendship. Our having sex this morning could be a key factor in either breaking up our friendship or strengthen it. It depends on each of us to determine how we are going to handle it. So far as the sex part of it, we did have great sex and I thoroughly enjoyed it. I finally found out what you have between your legs, and I must confess that I have always been curious. I must say that your big cock impressed me and I appreciate you for letting me have the experience of you giving me the opportunity to be intimate with you. I have thought many times how nice it would be for us to have sex together. I think you are very attractive and you often have aroused me sexually. However, even though we can have great sex together, I do not think that is enough to have a serious long time relationship together. Sex within itself is not enough and I cannot pin point what is missing. I love you and you are my best friend and I consider you as a loving brother that I never had. I will always be there if you should ever need me. But, if either one of us is looking for a serious lifetime companion or lover relationship, I just don’t think the ingredients are there for us right now. I want you to think about what I said and be honest with me and tell me what you are thinking”.

I looked over and big tears were running down Jeff’s cheeks. I grabbed him around the neck and pulled him close to me and told him, “Man, I didn’t mean to hurt you. I do hope you know that”. Jeff placed both hands around my head and looked straight at me. “I’m not crying because you told me a serious relationship might not work. You just told me for the very first time that I was your best friend and no one has ever considered me to be his brother. I love you so much and you have always been there when I needed some one. You will always be the best friend that I will ever have.” We held each other real tight and I waited for Jeff to compose himself and say what ever he wanted to say.

“I have wanted to have sex with you ever since I first saw you several years ago. I used to have such a crush of you that you would not believe and then it became more of a curiosity after we became friends. Since we had sex together this morning, I now feel like I know everything about you now that I have seen your cock erected and have had sex with you. I think our having sex together has brought both of us closer together and will be a bond for the rest of our lives as friends. If we get horny and have sex together in the future then it will be purely for sexual gratification and that is all. As you have said, things are just not right for anything else at this point.”

“In two weeks, we probably will be working very close together at the company and I know that at times I will look at you and get a stiff but then again both of us may find the right person for us and our sexual desires will be satisfied by that special person. I am very happy that we have had this talk and that we understand each other.”

After Jeff graduated, he came to work and his father set down with both of us and told me that there is no one else that he would rather train his son than me and he wanted me to teach Jeff every aspect of the business and that Jeff would be working and taking orders from me until he was thoroughly trained. After that Jeff would also become a Vice President and we would be working as partners and would continue to be partners in the future when he retired and we would own the company together.

I had earned the respect and love of Jeff’s father and he treated me like another son.

From then on Jeff and I worked as a team and partners and consulted with each other on every major decision and we were in complete charge of the company when Jeff’s father was not around, which had become increasingly more often.

The only competition between Jeff and I was kept in the workout and exercise room and we were always trying to outdo each other in keeping our bodies in shape.

The homophobic guy gave up his fight and I purchase his condominium for a ridiculously low price and moved out of my parents’ home. My unit was directly across the pool from Jeff.

Two years later, Jeff and I remained each other’s best friend. Neither of us had found the right person but each of us dated occasionally and was searching. If either one of us dated a guy more than two times we would introduce our new boyfriend to each other and he and I would openly discuss our boyfriends and how we felt about them. Both of us knew that if we did find a life long partner, that we still would remain best friends.

We did have sex together numerous times but it was just for sexual gratification and we knew that we could depend on each other anytime we felt a need for sex. Living so close together made it very convenient and we each had keys to each other place and if the sexual desire arose day or night we would pay each other a visit providing, at the time, neither one of us was spending the day or night with one of our boyfriends.

Only a very few people could have a best friends relationship like ours.

[unoponcho]

A Farm Boy’s First Gay Sexual Encounter

By Kevin




The farm had provided the livelihood for a family dating back three generations and Tom’s parents had planned and hoped that their son would be the fourth generation to live on and work the farmlands. Tom was their only son and he had two older sisters who had married and were living on nearby farms. After graduating from high school, Tom worked on the farmstead but he never did like the farm life and was very unhappy.

He was aware that he was different from everyone in the rural area and knew that he was gay but had never had the opportunity to experience a gay encounter of any kind. He had never known anyone that was gay having only heard and read about homosexuals.

One of his biggest physical assets was his angelic face, beautiful smile, innocent look, red hair and a few freckles. Other than his being very cute and having red hair, he was just another average looking young male. He was very shy and was just as innocent as he looked. Living a very sheltered life up to this point, he knew nothing about the gay lifestyle and gay sex but was very anxious to learn.

The big city had to many attractions for the farm boy and at the age of twenty-one he moved to the city determined that he was going to be able to make his life better and be happy.

Tom found a job that would provide sufficient funds to support him and found an apartment that just happened to be two blocks from a gay bar. After he discovered the bar it took him two weeks before he was able to get enough courage to pay it a visit.

Late on a Sunday afternoon, the sun was shinning and he walked down the street to the bar. He stood outside but chickened out of going inside and walked back to his apartment but then he decided it is now or never, so returned for a second time. When he walked inside, it was dimly lit and it took him several minutes for his eyes to adjust from sunlight to darkness. He spotted an empty stool at the far end of the bar where he set down.

The very good-looking bartender asked him what he wanted to drink and Tom said that he would like a beer. When the bartender brought him the beer, he asked, “You are new here aren’t you?” Tom answered, “Yes, I just moved here”. The bartender answered, “Well I thought so. I know I have never seen you here before. I could not have missed you with that beautiful head of red hair. My name is J. W.” Tom told him his name and J. W. excused himself and told him that it was a busy afternoon at the bar but he wanted to talk to him some more.

J. W. was a short young man with a well-proportioned body and was wearing a tank top that showed off the muscles in his arms, shoulders, neck and well-developed chest. Tom thought that J. W. was very attractive but after observing him for a while he realized that J.W. knew almost everyone that came to the bar and they would kiss or hug J.W. and they were very friendly with him. Tom dismissed the idea of ever being able to have anything more than a friendship, if he was even that lucky. J.W. was receiving too much attention and the competition was too great.

While Tom was drinking his beer he began to look around the bar and observed the strange assortment and variety of guys that were there and was surprised that all of them should be gay. Almost everyone was having a good time, was very friendly and some of them were very forward or familiar with each other. The first time he had ever seen two men kissing was when he first saw someone kiss J.W. and now there were guys kissing and hugging each other throughout the bar. He even saw a guy groping another’s crotch. He began to relax and not feel so threatened and was glad that he forced himself to come to the bar.

Every chance J. W. got he would come and talk to Tom. He would ask him all the usual questions like “Where are you from?” etc. Tom thought that J.W. was very friendly and cheerful and enjoyed talking to him.

Tom had just about finished his beer and J.W. set another beer down in front of him and told him that some one had bought him a drink. Tom said, “What are you talking about. Some one bought me a drink? Who bought me a drink? I don’t know anybody here. Why would they buy me a drink?” J.W. smiled at Tom and said, “The guy that bought you a drink does not want you to know who he is”. Tom looked around the room to see if he could see the person. He did not see anyone that was looking at him and could not figure out who or why anyone would do such a thing.

He finished drinking his beer and decided that it was time for him to go get something to eat and then return to his apartment. He told J.W. that it was nice meeting him and he had to go. As Tom was about to leave, J.W. came from behind the bar and hugged him and kissed him on the lips and said, “I want you to come back soon. You are cute and I love your red hair”.

That was all the encouragement that Tom needed. For the next four nights he went to the bar after he got off work to visit with J.W. Each night after he finished his first beer, J.W. would bring him another beer and tell him some one bought him a drink. Tom would look around and just could not figure out whom it might be. During these visits Tom did meet some other people that he enjoyed talking to while J.W. was busy with customers at the bar.

On Thursday night, before Tom was going to leave, he asked J.W. if the bar could cash a twenty-dollar check for him that he was out of cash and wanted to get something to eat before going home. J.W. said, “The bar does not take checks but I will cash it for you”. J.W. reached in his pocket and gave Tom a twenty-dollar bill and he gave J.W. a check. Tom thanked him and hugged his neck before leaving.

Late Friday afternoon, when Tom returned to his apartment after work, he found a beautiful arrangement of flowers waiting for him on the floor in front of his door. There was a card that read, “You are cute and I love your red hair”. Tom immediately knew the flowers were from J.W. and he realized that J.W. got his address from the check that he had given him the day before. He took the flowers inside his apartment and hurriedly showered and changed clothes and headed to the bar.

When Tom arrived it was crowded being a Friday night and J.W. was busy. Tom stood at the end of the bar and waited for him. Once J.W. seemed to have no other customers Tom caught his attention and motioned to him that he wanted a word with him. Tom had J.W. to come from behind the bar and thanked him for the flowers. As he started to kiss him on the lips J.W. threw his arms around Tom’s neck and started French kissing him. This was another new experience for Tom but he did not hesitate and mimicked J.W. kiss in return. The guys standing around saw them embrace and started to clap. Tom was so embarrassed and his face turned almost as red as his hair. J.W. whispered in his ear, “Do you have red hair any place else on your body other than just on your head? I want to see for myself. I get off at 2:00 am. Can I come to your apartment after I get off work?” Tom smiled and said, “I will be waiting for you”.

Tom went and got something to eat before returning to his apartment. He began to put things away and set about cleaning up the apartment. He even changed the linen on his bed in the hope that he and J.W. would go to bed together for sex. Tom tried putting the flowers in a number of different locations, as he wanted J.W. to see them when he came through the door. Tom was having some difficulty in all this activity because he kept thinking about J.W. and constantly got an erection. He was excited and yet apprehensive about having sex with J.W. as he was afraid when the time came that he would not be able to obtain an erection or something else might happen to embarrass either himself or J.W.

After a long wait it was almost time for J.W. to arrive. Tom had showered and shaved. He had put on more what was probably more than enough cologne, some white briefs and his bathrobe, Now he set down and waited.

J.W. knocked softly on the door and Tom let him inside. J.W. was smiling and carrying a small bag. He set the bag down and they kissed and hugged each other for several minutes. J.W. commented on the flowers and asked if he could take a shower. Tom went into the bathroom and got a fresh towel. J.W. brought in his bag and set it on the counter. Tom pulled the bathroom door closed as he left.

While J. W. was taking a shower, he turned off all the lights in apartment, lit a candle in the bedroom, set on the edge of the bed facing the bathroom door and waited. He heard J.W. turn off the shower and could not figure out why it was taking so long for him to dry off and come out to the bedroom. Finally the bathroom door opened and J. W.’s beautiful naked body was silhouetted against the bathroom lights behind him; except J. W. was not completely naked. He was wearing leather straps across his chest and round his waist, leather armbands, and a leather jock strap. Tom did not know what to think or say. He had never seen or heard of anything like it before but he thought that J. . was extremely attractive.

J.W. turned off the bathroom lights and strolled over in front of Tom and turned around several times showing his body, outfitted with leather. He asked, “What do you think?” “Well, I, I, I, don’t know but you sure have got my pecker at attention”. J.W. took the robe off Tom, removed his briefs, pushed him back on the bed and crawled on top of him. After a few minutes of kissing, Tom told J.W. “Before anything else happens that I need to tell you something”.

J.W. rolled off Tom and lay down beside him and waited for him to say what he wanted to tell him. “First I am new at this. I have never had sex with anyone and I do not know what to do. Would you please show or tell me how two men have sex together?”

J.W. reached down and took a hold of Tom’s cock, moved over and gently kissed his lips, lay his head on Tom’s chest and told him, “I thought that might be the case when I first meet you. I was afraid I might scare you off before we got to know each other. I was the one buying you drinks hoping that curiosity would bring you back to the bar”. He raised up his head and kissed Tom on the lips.

“We will take it very slow and easy; if we start to do something that you do not like or want to do, you say so and we will stop. I shall be more than happy to teach you the things I like to do but there are things that I do not like. I will tell you about them but will not do them with you. Is that fair enough?” Tom put his hands around J.W.’s head and pulled him up and kissed him. All the while J.W. was slowly stroking Tom’s cock.

Tom pulled away and stopped kissing and asked, “Would you take off that leather thing and let me see your cock?” J. W. smiled and answered, “I thought you would never ask. My cock has been wanting out ever since I lay down with you”. He took off his entire leather outfit except the armbands and leather cockring that was on a very aroused dick and when he was through, he kissed Tom’s cock before asking, “Do you want to touch my dick?” He had no more than got the words out of his mouth when Tom began to feel, examine and stroke J. W.’s erection, this being the first time he had ever felt some one else’s cock.

J.W. told Tom, “I am going to perform oral sex on you. It is sometimes referred to as a blowjob, sucking some one off, giving head and other things. If you do not like it, let me know and I will stop. If you decide that you want to suck my cock, the decision is yours. If you want both of us to suck each other at the same time, I will show you what is called the sixty-nine position and we can do that. Any comments or questions before I begin?”

J. W. got into a comfortable position and lowered his head to suck on Tom’s cock and he stopped and said, “You do have red hair on your body. It is a darker red than you have on your head but it is a pretty red color”.

While he was giving head to Tom, Tom was stroking J.W.’s cock and enjoyed playing with one that was not his own.

Tom was having delightful sensations while being sucked off. He could not get over the pleasure that he was encountering. He was nearing a climax and asked it he could suck J.W.’s dick for a while. At first he had difficulty in taking the full length into his mouth and throat but soon overcame the problem. He was amazed by the taste and odors he was enjoying and the new experience of having a cock in his mouth. After a period of time he asked if they could suck each other off at the same time.

Both were enjoying the excitement and pleasant feelings they were experiencing. Tom was doing his best to follow the example of what J. W. was doing to his cock. Tom was near to shooting off and tried to warn J. W. “I am going to cum!------Damn it I am going to cum!-------Get your head off my fucking dick!. I’m ---Oh Shit!!!---Holly Shit!!!” I just shot off in your mouth. I am so sorry. Why didn’t you shop when I told you?” Tom could not get over J.W. letting him shoot off in his mouth and throat but it was the greatest sexual experience he had ever had.

Later after Tom continued oral sex on J.W., he decided that if J.W. took him all the way thru a climax that he would do the same. After J.W. ejaculated into Tom’s mouth, Tom experienced some difficulty in swallowing the load but would not give up until J.W. was completely finished. He was surprised by how much he liked the taste of cum. He had always thought of it as being disgusting but now thought differently!

After they had completed the oral sex and were laid side by side, J. W. ran his fingers through Tom’s hair as Tom asked him if he was going to spend the rest of the night with him. To his joy, J.W. replied, “Certainly, after we wake up, you will need some more practice before this lesson is completed. Then we will start some other lessons. I want you fully trained before I turn you loose!”

Tom got out of bed, blew out the candle, ran back, jumped on top of J. W. and began to tickle him. He moved so that his entire weight was laying on top of J. W. and started to French kiss him. He stopped and told J. W. “You taught me how to kiss you like that when I saw you at the bar”. Tom moved off and lay down close to J.W. and thanked him for giving him his first blowjob and told him how great he made him feel. Soon they were sound asleep.

It was near noon on Saturday before they woke up. Tom got up and used the bathroom before going into the kitchen and put on a pot of coffee. When he got back to the bedroom, J.W. had gotten up and had started taking a shower. He decided to join him knowing full well that it was going to be somewhat crowded since the shower stall was small. He managed to slip in and they both soaped each other, rinsed off and as they got out both had enormous erections. Tom reached for J.W.’s cock but J.W. stepped back sying, “Coffee first and then lessons”. They dried off and still naked, went to the breakfast area.

After a couple cups of coffee and talking, they returned to the bed where J. W. explained to Tom about anal sex. He told him about the various positions and what it meant by being top or bottom. He then went in the bathroom and got a tube of KY and two condoms out of his bag. They began their sex by sucking each other’s cocks until both were nearing a climax and then they experimented with anal sex. As a bottom, Tom flunked the course, as it was to painful when J.W. tried to stick his cock into his asshole and he had to ask J.W. to stop. Tom did very well and received satisfaction in performing as a top. After Tom had fucked J.W.’s asshole for some time, Tom decided that he much preferred having oral sex, so they ended up giving each other yet more blowjobs in the sixty-nine position.

By this time it was after 2:00 pm and J.W. had to be back at work at the bar by 3:00 pm while Tom had promised his parents that he would come to the farm and spend the night and most of Sunday with them. Tom thanked J. W. many times for being so patient with him, teaching him about gay sex and showing him such a good time. Tom also expressed his gratitude, appreciation, and pleasure for J. W. sharing his attractive and beautiful body with him. They both agreed that they would get back together again real soon, perhaps tomorrow night.

After Tom returned from the farm on Sunday afternoon he could not wait until he could to see J.W. When he got to the bar, J.W. was not there. He asked the other bartenders where he was and they told him that he had taken the night off. Tom asked where J.W. lived and was told that it was against the bar’s policy to give out such information. Tom returned to his apartment and was very disappointed but thought that maybe J.W. would call him or come by, but neither happened.

Monday night Tom returned to the bar and again J.W. was not there.

Tuesday night Tom made another attempt and this time J.W. was there. Tom was standing at the bar waiting to talk to him and J.W. brought him a beer and told him that “some one bought him a drink and that he needed to talk to him”. J.W. asked Tom to take a seat at one of the tables and wait for him for in a few minutes or so he would get a fifteen-minute break.

Tom sat down at the table, drinking his beer, and knew something was wrong by the way J.W. had acted. He tried to think if he had done or said something that had upset his friend.

J.W. set down at the table and reached for Tom’s hand and pulled it up and kissed it before returning it to the top of the table while still holding his hand. J.W. said, “I have something that I have to tell you. First I want to say that I cherish our friendship, I need you and want you as a friend and I hope what I am about to tell you will not prevent our being just friends.”

“My Ex showed up at the bar Saturday night and we ended up spending the last three days and nights together. We decided to try to be lovers again. We were together for almost three years before we had a silly argument and broke up. We loved each other very much and perhaps we may be able to renew that love. I do hope you understand”.

There was a long pause and with tears in his eyes, Tom asked, “Friends –forever?”

J.W. walked to the door with his arms around Tom’s shoulders and when they got to the door, he said, “Yes, friends! Please come back to see me. I do think you are cute and I love your red hair”.

[unoponcho]

Gay Sex Blamed On Wives

By Kevin

Husbands blamed their wives for causing them to have gay sex. The question is: Are they cheating on their wives?

Frank and Jane moved into their new house a couple weeks before Ben and Alice moved into their new home next-door. Both young married couples were in their early twenties and had been married a little over a year.

Almost immediately the two couples became friends. Jane and Alice were housewives and Frank and Ben were pursuing their new careers.

Jane and Alice were almost constantly together doing or planning something. They went shopping together. They helped each other clean their houses and they planned activities for the couples to do together. BBQ’s at Frank and Jane’s swimming pool, going to movies, playing games at each other’s homes, there seemed to be no end as to what they could think of for the two couples to be together. When Frank and Ben got off work and returned home they never knew what was in store for them to do that evening or weekends.

Frank and Ben also hit it off and were real good friends. Both liked hunting, fishing, camping, sports, and almost anything having to do with being out of doors. The wives did not care for any of the actives that the men liked and when the men were doing the things they enjoyed, the wives would get something going such as a bridge games or a coffees or activities involving other women.

About ten miles from their homes, Frank had inherited several acres of lakefront property providing good fishing and hunting. The property was off the paved road and about eight miles up an old rough dirt road that very seldom was ever used. There were no homes or buildings of any kind along the dirt road and it came to a dead end on Frank’s property.

Frank recently had spent some time on the property starting the construction of a small one-room cabin that he could use when fishing and hunting. Ben knew about Frank’s project but had never been to the property or the site.

Frank had built an outhouse or john in his garage to take up to the cabin site but it was too big and heavy for him to handle by himself. He asked Ben if he would help him during the weekend to get the outhouse to the cabin site. Ben offered to go with him and spend the weekend helping him with the construction of the cabin. When the wives heard about their husbands’ plans, they prepared food for the guys to take with them.

Friday evening, Ben and Frank loaded the outhouse onto Frank’s pickup along with the other tools and materials that they were going to take. They planned on getting up around sunrise pack the food and personal items and drive to the construction site.

Saturday morning when they arrived at the site, Ben was amazed at what he saw. The cabin site was a few feet from the lake and there was a beautiful view of the lake and surrounding forest. It was in a very secluded, quiet, and isolated location. Ben was also impressed by the progress that Frank had made in the construction and realized that it was at a point that Frank really needed two people working together because one person alone could not handle some of lifting and holding that was necessary.

They put their work gloves on and went to work. They first unloaded the outhouse and put it in place and began on the framework for the cabin. They worked all day only taking out time for sandwiches and coffee. By late afternoon they had the framework up, doors and windows incased, floors, rafters and roof finished. What they had accomplished in one day was amazing considering they were working without the use of power tools.

Around 4:00PM, Frank suggested that they were at a good place to stop for the day and purposed that they clean out the scraps of lumber and other debris off the floor of the cabin and sweep it out so they could put their bedrolls down and sleep in the cabin during the night. After that project was completed, that they should take a swim before supper and going to bed.

After all the dirty chores had been completed, Frank and Ben stripped off their clothes and jumped into the lake. The water seemed to revitalize and relax them because it was not to long before they were acting like kids trying to duck each other and were wrestling and horsing around.

Frank got out of the water and went to the pickup and got a bar of soap and towels. Ben was watching Frank and seeing his appealing naked body, he suddenly realized that he had an erection and he wondered why Frank’s nude body all at once had caused him to get a hardon. Ben had to stay in the deep water until his erection went down before he could come up into the shallow water where Frank was soaping himself down.

After their swim and bath, Ben started a fire using the scrap lumber from the project and Frank put on a pot of coffee. They ate supper and set by the fire drinking coffee until the sun went down.

They went into the cabin and though the framing of the 2” x 4” uprights the light from the outside campfire provided some light inside. They started taking off their clothes to go to bed. Ben had on his briefs and was going to lie down, when Frank saw him, “Hell man, if you don’t mine I always sleep naked”. Ben said, “I do too, but I did not want to embarrass you.” Ben removed his briefs and lay down. They were lying on their backs just relaxing and enjoying the peacefulness of the out of doors.

This was the first opportunity that they had to talk in private for any length of time and really get to know each other. Any number of interesting topics were discussed during their lengthily conversation. Frank rose up on his elbow and looked at Ben. “I’ve got a very personal problem and I would like your advice. I do not know if I am oversexed or not, but Jane and I only have sex once a week and it is not enough for me. She is just not interested in doing it more than that and even then she does not really seem to enjoy it. It seems that she feels like she just has to because I get so horny”. Ben replies, “God man, I am in the same boat. No matter what I do Alice just turns over and says not tonight, honey. She has even told me to go in the bathroom and beat off”.

“Ben, I have to masturbate at least three times a week and still I am not satisfied. I go around all the time getting a hard”. “I do the same thing. I just do not understand women. Some time they are interested in sex but most of the time they are not”.

“Ben, I am relieved to know that I am not the only one having a problem. I love Jane very much and this sex issue is our only problem. Hell, I have a raging hard now and I am going to have to beat off before I can get any sleep”. “ Frank, I am so horny that I could fuck a billygoat, let’s beat off to relieve ourselves, and by tomorrow night may be we will both get lucky with our wives”.

Everything was real quiet and Ben and Frank could hear each other stroking their cocks. Frank moved over close to Ben and said, “Let me help you out Buddy. It feels so much better when some one else is beating you off.” Frank reaches over and takes hold of Ben’s cock and says, “Man, you got a nice size piece of meat”. Ben takes a hold of Franks cock and begins stroking. Both of them were stroking each other and expressing their enjoyment by groaning and movement of their bodies in sequences to being jacked off. Ben was the first to shoot off and it went all over his chest and Frank’s hand. Frank kept on stroking Ben and his cum was serving as a lubricant that helped Ben to keep his erection longer than unusual after climaxing. When Frank ejaculated he screamed, “Damn, Buddy, I cannot believe the amount of cum I just shot off”. They wiped themselves off with a towel and lay back down on their bedrolls.

They had talked for a while and Ben began to have cramps in his back resulting from the physical labor during the day. It got real painful and he asked Frank if he would massage his back to get rid of the cramps. Frank crawled over and placed one leg over Ben’s naked butt and started rubbing Ben’s back and shoulders. Frank obtained another erection and his cock was sliding up and down between the crack of Ben’s buttocks as he massaged Ben’s back. After Ben’s cramps went away, Frank said, “I guess you are aware that my cock is rock hard again. It felt real good between the crack of your ass. Have you ever had a cock up your asshole?” Ben answered, “No, but I am willing to try it----but not tonight, honey, go in the bathroom and beat off”. They started to laugh and Ben told Frank, “Get your ass over here and I will beat you off again”. Ben got Frank to unload again and they were lying on their backs and expressed their thanks to each other and their desire to do it again in the near future even maybe next weekend.

“Frank, do you think what we just did was cheating on our wives” “No Ben, I don’t think so. Both of our wives know that we masturbate. We just helped each other to enjoy it more”. Ben said, “Well I do not know how they would react if they knew that we just enjoyed having sex with each other but I do not think they would understand”. “You are probably right Ben, but we both love our wives and if our having sex together will help in making our marriages work then I do not think we should worry about it to much. It is a very controversial and complicated situation. You and I may have found a way to relieve some of our sexual tensions and satisfy some of our sexual needs that has been a problem in our marriages. I think we are just going to have to keep it a secret between the two of us”.

Sunday morning, they were up early eat breakfast and began working on the cabin. By mid afternoon, they had the door hung, windows were installed, and the siding had been put on. The cabin was really taking shape. It was rustic, the carpentry work had a lot to be desired, but overall real progress had been made. Frank went over to Ben and put his arm around his shoulder and said, “Thanks Buddy, It is looking real good. I appreciate all your help. Now when we get horny, we have a place to go. Hey! About that ass thing that came up last night, would you be interested in coming back here next weekend and trying it out? Hell, I will also make my asshole available to you if you want to try it. What do you think?” Ben said, “Count me in. I am up to anything. Let’s go home now and see if we can get lucky with our wives. If Alice tells me to go into the bathroom and beat myself off, I will tell her I don’t have to, I know someone that will do it for me. I would not tell her that but if I had it would serve her right. I really love her but she can be such a bitch”.

During the following week, Frank built two wooden bed frames and a table for the cabin. Friday afternoon, Ben and Frank loaded the pickup with the bed frames, table, two chairs, and two mattresses. While they were loading these things they decided that they would go to the cabin that evening instead of Saturday morning. The wives rushed around to get food ready for them and the guys took off.

Frank and Ben could hardly wait until they got to the cabin to have sex. They both were horny and had been fantasying all week about having sex with each other and explore the new ways to have sex that they had discussed. Ben had had an erection ever since they got on the dirt road. After they got several miles up the dirt road, Frank stopped the pickup and got out. He told Ben to get out, take his pants and briefs off, and drive a while. Ben did not know what Frank had in mind but removed his clothes and got in the pickup and started driving.

Once Ben took over the driving, Frank leaned over and took Ben’s stiff cock into his mouth. Ben almost went off the road. He had never had someone to suck on his dick and the intense thrill was almost more than he could take. When Frank went all the way down on him, Ben slammed on the brakes and yelled, “Damn, Buddy, That feels so good. I cannot drive with you doing that to my cock. Please hold off until we get to the cabin”. Ben put the pickup in gear and burned off up the dirt road driving so fast that he must have missed hitting half the bumps and chuck holes in the road before they got to the cabin.

As soon as they reached the cabin, they both jumped out of the pickup, sporting erections, and each grabbed a mattress and headed towards the cabin. They threw down the mattresses, removed their clothes and shoes and quickly lay down and Frank again began the oral sex that started in the pickup. Ben was yelling all the obscenities that he had in his vocabulary. When Ben was getting close to shooting off, he stopped Frank and said, “Let’s get one think straight. Are you going to take my shit in your mouth or am I suppose to warn you to pull off?” Frank said, “Give it to me Buddy. I am ready anytime you are”. Frank went down on him again and began to speed up his deep throating and he reached around taking hold and gently pulling Ben’s testicles up and down. Ben was squirming around on the mattress mumbling to himself. His body was tensing up and his buttocks were flexing. He began to slowly fuck Frank’s mouth and he put his hands on top of Frank’s head encouraging him to bob up and down on his cock. Frank was ready to receive Ben’s ejaculation when Ben screamed, “Fuck!-- F-u-c-k!---Oh shit!--- Fuck! Fuck! Fuck!” Ben had deposited an enormous load down Frank’s throat and then he completely relaxed on the mattress taking deep breaths.

Frank lay down beside Ben while jacking his own cock and said, “I don’t even have to asked if you like your first blowjob. You have already have shown me that you did but tell me this,---how long have you been building up that load? You almost drown me.” Ben looked over at Frank, “Since last weekend, Alice has been having her period.----Buddy! Thanks, I owe you a big one and if you will give me a few more minutes, I will do my best to repay you. If you can swallow my cum, by damn, I am going to swallow yours”.

Because of Frank having been stroking his cock and the arousal he obtained while servicing Ben’s cock, he was almost ready to ejaculate. Ben placed his hand around Frank’s cock and looked at it and saw precum oozing out and he licked it off and tasted it. “That shits not really that bad”.

He took it real slow going down on Frank. He was trying to learn how to suck Frank’s big cock without choking. He got the hang of it very fast and was going up and down and using his tongue to tantalize and sucking at the same time. Before long he was deep throating along with the best of cocksuckers. He was full aware that Frank was going to erupt at any moment and he kept telling himself, “I am going to swallow his cum if kills me.” Frank began to ejaculate and Ben did his best but could not swallow fast enough and some of Franks cum ended up on Frank’s pubic hairs.

Ben rolled over on his back and told Frank, “Big Buddy, I’ll do better next time. If you are up to it, I will do it fifty more times tonight and by morning I will be a expert”. Frank slapped Ben’s butt and told him to get off his ass, put on his shoes but not his clothes and help him unload the pickup and then they would go for a swim before supper.

The sun had gone down just as they had finished unloading the pickup. They started a fire, put on the coffee pot, took the bar of soap and towels, and went to the lake to take a bath. They took turns in soaping each other and made comments about how much they admired each other’s bodies and cocks. After they had rinsed off, Ben leaned over and sucked Frank’s soft dick into his mouth and looked up at Frank, “Is there anything to eat in there yet?”

After they finished supper, they went directly to the cabin where they and put the bunk beds together with their bedrolls on top of the mattresses. They lay down on their backs and began to fondle each other’s cocks until both of them had stiffs again. Frank moved into a position that he could give head to Ben and Ben had access to Frank’s cock. Before Ben started to suck on Frank’s cock, he said, “Big Buddy, I don’t know about you but I am in no big rush to shoot off. I would enjoy sucking on your cock all night if you can last that long without loosing your load”. Frank said, “Buddy, in thirty minutes, if that long, I have you so fucking hot that you will be begging to cum. I am already hot and all you have done thus far is to breathe on it. Take it slow and easy Bud, but I guarantee you that it want take all night”.

Several times, each of them, when nearing a climax would ask the other to stop sucking and give them time to delay their climax. Frank was proven wrong because they had been sucking on each other for close to an hour. Frank got the idea of teasing Ben’s asshole at the same time he was deep throating his cock. Ben showed a lot of pleasure from Frank’s touching and inserting his finger into his anus. He began to use his finger to fuck Ben’s hole and he was responding by pushing his butt towards Frank’s finger trying to get further up his asshole. Ben liked the feeling so much that he began to do the same thing to Frank. That was all that it took for both of them to peak at the same time and to shoot off in each other’s throats. They continued to suck each other’s cocks even long after both had become flaccid and until both fell asleep.

The next morning they were up early and ate a hearty breakfast and started in earnest to do as much as they could on the cabin. By mid afternoon, they had finished everything and declared that the cabin was completed, except cleaning up around the outside and packing up the tools. Frank slapped Ben on the shoulder and said, “Well it’s done. We did a great job.----Now, so far as the girls are concern, we have a lot more to do. We will have an excuse to come back several more weekends unless the girls begin to get huffy about it. Jane is already complaining that I am neglecting chores around the house. She even had to mow the lawn and she was really pissed”.

They goofed off the rest of the afternoon and put off the cleanup chore until Sunday morning. They did not think that it would take them long to pick up and clean up around the cabin. They thought it best to go home early the next day to appease their wives.

Ben suggested that they take a hike into the woods. They hiked around for an hour or so and they spotted some wild turkeys and saw a lot of deer tracks and droppings. It was not going to be long until the hunting season and they knew where to come to get their deer and turkeys.

After they returned from their brief excursion into the woods, they went skinny-dipping, bathed, eat an early supper and were back in bed before sundown.

During the day both of them had been thinking about trying anal sex that night. Neither one knew if they could take a cock up their asshole but wanted to try. Frank had placed a can of Crisco under the bed within reach.
They discussed how they were going to do it and they agreed that it would be wise to take it very slow and the first important thing was to give each others holes a lot of attention to get them relaxed, and well lubricated before trying to insert their cocks into each other. Frank remembered that as a teen someone said it was best for the guy to straddle over the cock in a sitting position so he guide and judge the depth of penetration.

Frank decided that he wanted to be fucked first. Ben had applied Crisco to Frank’s asshole and fingers and inserted two fingers without any difficulty. He greased up his throbbing member and Frank began to lower his ass onto Ben’s cock. He at first had some pain but he was determined to get Ben’s rod all the way inside him. It was not very long before he had reached his goal and was bouncing up and down on Ben’s cock and telling him how nice it felt. Ben was receiving an enormous amount of pleasure and was fucking Franks hole as Franks was increasing the speed his movements up and down. Both were verbally expressing their feelings and giving each other commands. Ben ejaculated deep inside Frank’s hole and Frank fell on top of Ben and both lay there exhausted.

Both of them had not said anything for a long time and Ben whacked Frank on the rear and told him that it was his turned to be fucked. Frank rolled off Ben and began to prepare Ben’s asshole. Ben had no trouble taking Frank’s cock and they fucked until he had deposited his load.

After they had recovered, Ben suggested that they take another bath in the lake and get all the grease off them before going to sleep. After they returned from their bath, Ben told Frank to get into the same position that they were in last night when they went to sleep and told Frank, “Your dick was a great pacifier to suck on while going to sleep and I want it again tonight”. “Damn Ben, my cock is not a pacifier. No way, Buddy! A couple times last night, you bit my dick so hard that I thought you were going to bite it off. Besides that when you snore, your breathing tickles my nuts.” “Frank, your bitching sounds like my wife”. Both being tired from the day’s activities and having sex, they quickly drifted off into a deep sleep.

They were up at sunrise the next morning and while still naked they fixed and eat breakfast, cleaned up the construction debris, loaded the tools and things into the pickup before they took another swim. They put on their clothes, got in the pickup and were home by midmorning.

Their wives were both surprised and pleased that they returned home early. Both Frank and Ben began to do the chores around their houses and their wives made plans for a cookout by the pool late that afternoon.

Their wives evidently had missed them and as soon as the cookout was over, they told their husbands that as soon as they finished cleaning the dishes and putting up the food that they would meet them in their bedrooms. Frank took Ben by the arm and led him out of hearing distance of their wives, “Ben, I don’t know if I can get it up. How about you?” Ben whispered, “I don’t know either, but we had better. Buddy this is great. Our wives actually wanting to have sex. Somehow in the near future, we are just going to have to get them to want to do it on a Tuesday, Wednesday, or Thursday nights instead of so close to the weekends”. Frank said, “You know if our wives decide to have sex with us more often, we would not have that long drive on that bumpy dirt road so often”.

Frank and Ben visited the cabin when they felt the need which was pretty much on a regular bases. It always helped to disguise their sexual encounters from their wives when they returned home with a deer, turkey or fish.

Frank had bought an iron woodstove for the cabin that he had stored in his garage. Jane was continuously nagging Frank about getting it out of the garage but Frank kept putting it off until it got so cold that it was needed and because he was reserving it as an excuse for Ben and he to take it to the cabin if they ever ran out of other excuses to go.

The wives never knew what took place at the cabin but they were appreciating the fact that their husbands no longer wanted to have sex every day or night. Once a week was still sufficient for the wives needs and unbeknownst to their wives, their husbands had found a way to supplement their sexual appetite.

It is great for loving couples to be so happy and have congenial neighbors as their best friends.

[unoponcho]

My Gay Male Nurse

By Kevin


I woke up and Jay, who was a nurse and a friend of Luke, my lover, and I, was standing over me smiling. He said, “Welcome back to the world”. I could not figure out what was going on and where I was. He told me that I had been in an accident and I was in the hospital and had been in a comma for the last seven days. I asked him, “What accident? I do not remember an accident”.

Jay told me some of the details of the accident and he told me the extent of my injuries. He told me that I had already recovered from most of my injuries except that my left leg and arm was partially paralyzed and now that I was conscious that I needed physical therapy and within time I would possible have full recovery and use of both my leg and arm.

Shortly after I arrived at the hospital, Jay learned about my accident and requested that he be assigned as one of my private nurses. He had been a friend of Luke and I for several of years.


I remembered that Luke had gone to Europe on business and was going to be there for at least six weeks. I asked Jay if Luke knew about my being in the hospital. Jay told me that he had talked to Luke numerous times in Europe and told Luke that there was nothing that he could do here and that he would keep him posted as to my progress. Jay said they were sending each other emails twice a day and he knew that Luke would be relieved to know that I had regained consciousness.

After Jay and I talked a few minutes, he told me that he was going to go and send an email to Luke and let him know that I was conscious and talking. He also needed to call my doctor and tell him the good news and he had to get some medication for me.

Jay was very tall young man with a smile and face that exuberates kindness, concern for others, and love for his fellowman. Jay was intelligent and had training for a physical therapist as well as a nurse. He was devoted to the medical field and to helping those who were placed in his care. Because of his profession and dedication, he had not had the time to meet and pursue a lasting gay relationship. Most of the gay men he had met could not cope with his long irregular hours.

Within an hour after I regained consciousness, Jay had a pan of hot water, soap and washcloth and prepared to shave me and give me a bath. He closed the door and pulled the curtain around my bed for privacy and he removed my hospital gown. I lay in bed stark naked feeling embarrassed. While Jay was bathing me, I asked him if he had bathed me while I was unconscious. Jay smiled and said, “Yes that he had bathed me everyday”. I asked him if I ever got an erection? There was a long pause and Jay was smiling. “The answer is no, but I certainly got some whoppers and had to go into your bathroom and jack off”. I looked over at Jay and his dick was sticking straight out in his pants. I asked him if he got erections when he bathed other patients and he told me that he never had. Normally being a registered nurse that he did not have to bathe patients but in my case he chooses to bathe me because “he liked the looks of my damn good-looking body.” He told me not to worry about his erection that with the aid of his hands that he would solve his problem in a few minutes. After the bath and lotion put all over my body, he disappeared into the bathroom. A short time later he came out and told me everything was under control and he began to exercise my arm and leg followed by a massage.

The next day Jay came into my room, smiling, and holding a copy of an email from Luke. Luke told me how much he loved me and wished that he could be with me. He said, “Jay and I have discussed your situation and I have told Jay to take care of your every need and I mean every need until I can get back home”. I looked at Jay and he smiled and said, “Yep! Every need! When I talked to him on the phone he was very specific and told me to keep you satisfied, relax and comfortable no matter what I had to do”. I said, “Well that is very considerate of him”.

I still had no use of my left leg and arm. I was beginning to get some feeling and my muscles were cramping especially in my leg and left buttock. Jay would massage the areas until I felt some relief. He was very president in helping me with exercising and therapy. He and the doctor thought that I was making a lot of progress and could see no reason that within time I would make a full recovery.

The doctor decided that I no longer needed private nurses around the clock but he wanted Jay to continue spending full time with me because of his physical therapy training.

The next two days, I continued with the therapy and Jay would bathe, apply lotion, and massage me. Each day, Jay would obtain an erection and disappear into my bathroom. The second day he came out of the bathroom smiling and said, “My cock just had it’s therapy and I gave it one hell of a workout”.

The next day, Jay helped me out of bed because he wanted me to try and stand on my leg for a few minutes before he began to exercise it. I was able to stand on it for a while but I was very weak however, I did have more feeling than before. We both were very encouraged. He had me lay back down on the bed and my upper thigh and buttock began to cramp. Jay closed the door and pulled the curtain around the bed and began to deeply massage the areas.

I could feel Jan’s hand and fingers hitting my asshole, dick, nuts, and feel my buttock flexing. I got a tremendous boner and Jay said, “Well you are getting better. Just look at that cock. It is fully load and ready for action. I must do something about that”. Jay took my cock in his mouth and alternated in sucking and stroking until I shot off with cum landing everywhere. Jay cleaned me up and said, “Well you are getting better. Luke will be happy to hear about this”. I reached over with my right hand and was fumbling around trying to get Jay’s zipper down and Jay reached down and helped me get his ridged cock out. I had only stroked it a few minutes until Jay ejaculated on the bed and me. He cleaned his cum off me and told me he was going to have to change my gown and the sheets on my bed.

Every day, I would receive one or two emails from Luke. Jay had been keeping him up to date on my progress and he was very happy about the latest report involving Jay’s and my most recent therapy exercise. He was glad that everything came out for both of us. We read between the lines and knew what Luke was referring to and gathered that when he was writing the email that someone was in the office with him and he had to be discrete in wording his message. He also said that he might be coming home sooner than planned but would only be here a few days before he had to go to Japan.

Jay had not had a day off for ten days and needed time to do some personal things such as laundry since he was out of clean clothes. A female therapist came to my room and helped me with my exercises. She was very professional and knew what she was doing but I did miss Jay and looked forward towards his return.

The next day, shortly after breakfast, Jay came in my room and handed me the emails from Luke and gave me time to read them before he got me out of bed and on my feet. I was able to walk to the bathroom for the first time and he stood behind my back and held me around the chests to support me while I pissed. It felt so good to be able to go to the bathroom and do my thing. He got me back to bed and I was able to do my leg and arm exercises without his help.

While I was eating my lunch, Jay went to the cafeteria to eat. When he returned, he told me that he had a treat for me. He removed the bandages on my head and said my head injures had healed enough that I no longer would need a bandage. He helped me get to the bathroom and removed my hospital gown. He turned on the shower and while the water was running to get warm, he locked the bathroom door from the inside and removed all his clothes.

This was the first time I had ever seen Jay nude and even though he was thin he had an appealing and very nice firm body and a large six-inch soft penis.

He helped me into the shower and joined me. There was a bench to set on and a bar on the shower wall that I could hold onto to support myself while standing. While I set on the bench, Jay knelt down in front of me and shaved my face and shampooed my hair. He then had me stand up and hold on to the bar while he applied soap all over my body paying special attention to my private areas until I had a tremendous boner. Jay put soap all over himself and he moves up close to my back and placed his erected cock between my legs and began to hump me from behind. His cock was rubbing my asshole and hitting the back of my nuts. He put his hand around my hips and stroked my cock while he was fucking me between my legs. I shot off on the shower wall and Jay shoots off between my legs. His cum ran down my legs and I could see it joining my cum that ran down the shower walls and going down the drain.

I turned around to thank him and he said, “It is all part of the duties of a good nurse”. He dried me and he hurriedly dried off and dressed and put a towel around me and helped me back to my bed. He rolled the hospital bed down so that he was horizontal and had me lay on my stomach. I was exhausted and he knew that I had exerted myself by taking the shower. He removed my towel and laid it across my ass and rubbed lotion over my body and began to give me a massage. While he was rubbing my left leg, I fell asleep.

I do not know how long I had been asleep but when I woke up Jay was setting besides my bed reading. I moved a little bit and Jay jumped up and help me put on my hospital gown. He told me that since the exercise we had in the shower that I would not have to do all my usual exercises that afternoon but I did need to do some of them.

I had regain all the feeling and full use of my left arm, which was great because I am left-handed. I also had all the feeling from the middle of my thigh to my foot on my left leg. I still had some trouble with my upper thigh and buttock. Jay said, “You are making a lot of progress. Where you still are having problems is near my favorite part of your body. When I am working on your trouble areas I have an excuse to look and touch all your private areas”. We laughed and he turned me on my stomach and began to rub my buttock. He slipped his finger down between the cracks of my ass and rubbed my asshole and asked, “Do you feel that?” and I answered “Hell yes!” He said, “I’m just checking”. He then slid his hand between my legs and cupped my nuts and dick. “Do you feel this?” I told him to quite fucking around are he would get me hard again.

I looked over and saw that Jay’s dick was aroused again and sticking out in his pants. I started to reach out to touch his dick and he told me to get on my back. Before I knew what was going on, Jay had gotten on my bed and straddled my chests and he inserted his cock into my mouth and began to fuck me. It did not take him long before he was nearing a climax and someone knocked on the door and Jay yelled out, “We are busy, come back latter”. Seconds later he let go a load down my throat. He jumped off the bed and said, “That was a close one. You know if I were caught having sex with you I would be fired”.

The next morning, Jay came into my room and almost immediately had me doing my exercises and after I finished he told me to rest a while and then he wanted me to get out of bed and walk for a while. He began to massage my leg and I fell asleep for a few minutes. When I woke up, Jay was standing beside my bed holding my bathrobe.

He had me out in the hall and with him holding on to me, I walked down to the nurses’ station and back to my room. I discovered that my room was the last room at the end of this long hallway and that was the reason there was very little traffic or noise outside my room and making it more private.

Jay stood by me while I got back into bed. He told me that at the rate I was going that it would not be long before I would be going home. He put his hand on my chest and told me to eat lunch and take a nap that he had an errand to run and would have a surprise for me when he got back.

After lunch, I was just dozing off, and there was a soft knock on my door and I looked up and Luke was standing in the doorway with Jay behind him.
Luke ran to my bedside and bent over and we embraced and we hugged each other. I was so surprised and Luke told me that Jay had meet him at the airport and brought him directly to the hospital. Luke and I talked for a while and he told me that he would only be in town until tomorrow morning and he had a flight to go to Japan where he had to take care of some business and he would be gone for another three or four weeks.

He told me that I looked great and that he was proud of me for the progress that I had made in my recovery. I asked Luke to go find Jay and bring him back to my room. When they came back, I asked Jay to come beside my bed and I took hold of his hand and said, “Luke this is the man to thank for the progress that I have made. He is responsible for my recovery and he has provided me with services way beyond the normal duties of a good nurse”. Jay squeezed my hand real tight and went over and put his arm around Luke's shoulder and led him out into the hall. I heard them talking but could not understand what they were saying. In a few minutes they came back into the room and Jay picked up a magazine and slid a chair out into the hall and as he closed the door he told me to have a goodtime. Luke started taking off his clothes and I asked him what was going on. He said Jay is outside guarding the door and I am going to make love to you.

For about and hour Luke and I had sex and we both had climaxed and were laying in my bed still naked holding each other when Jay stepped inside the door and told us that we needed to get dressed that they were coming down the hall with a bed that he had ordered for Luke to sleep in during the night.

Two ladies rolled the extra bed into my room and as they were leaving a nurse’s aid came in with my dinner. Luke asked Jay to go eat with him in the cafeteria, while I ate my dinner in my room.

It was way passed the time for Jay to be off duty but he and Luke returned to my room and one of them set on one side of my bed and the other on the other side. Each of them took one of my hands and they appeared very gloom. I thought that they were about to tell me some bad news.

Luke spoke first, “Jay and I have been talking about your getting out of the hospital in a few days and my not being here to take care of you. Jay has agreed to stay at our house while I am gone and see after you. He will be working and you will be on your own for a number of hours at a time but he will be in and out to see about you. It is not fair for me to be gone for weeks at a time and leave you alone. I have told him that I want him to continue to satisfy your sexual needs. After I get back from Japan, there should not be anymore traveling for a long time and we can make up for the time I have to be away. I love you very much and I am sorry that I was not here when you needed me”. Luke kissed me on my lips and hugged me.

Jay said, “I have talked to your doctor and he thinks you will be going home day after tomorrow and said that within a week that you should be able to go back to work half time and within two weeks you should be able to work full time. He said the main thing now is for you to continue your exercises and walking and to regain your strength. I have talked to Luke and he as asked that we continue to keep him informed of everything that going on including our sexual activities which he has encouraged me to continue. Does our plan meet with your approval?”

I had difficulty in finding the right words to say. “Luke I love you more than you will ever know. I could not have found anyone more considerate and loving than you. I know that if I were in your shoes that I would never be able to be as understanding as you are. I thank you from the bottom of my heart for your trust and for your love”. “Jay, I have never known anyone like you before. I appreciate everything that you have done for me. You are truly a wonderful person and it is a privilege to have you as a friend. I will always be in depth to you.” “Now, Luke and Jay, your plan sounds great to me. Before I start crying would you guys please change the subject?”

Jay said he needed to get home and he told Luke that he would pick him up in the morning to take him back to the airport. He reminded Luke that his luggage was still in his car and asked him if he needed anything otherwise the luggage would be in the car ready to go to the airport tomorrow morning. Luke told him that he was fine that he would use my toiletries. He hugged both of us and waved goodbye on the way out the door.

Before Jay arrived to take Luke to the airport, Luke hugged and kissed me a long time telling me goodbye. I asked Luke, “I really do not understand your wanting me to have sex with Jay. I know you love me but please tell me how you could encourage Jay and I to do such a thing? Luke said, “You and I have been friends with Jay for a long time. I trust both of you. While I am away, as long as you guys tell me in detail what you are doing together, it does not bother me. If you would have sex with someone else behind my back then I would be very upset”. Before either of us had a chance to say anything else, Jay came into the room. Before leaving Luke hugged me and kissed me on my lips and we both had tears streaming down our cheeks. Jay handed each of us a tissue and hugged each of us and grabbed a tissue for himself.

After I was released from the hospital, Jay took me home. Jay made sure that I took my exercises and walks and often, if he had time, he would walk with me. I was able to return to work and was pleasantly surprised that my workload had not piled up because my coworkers had worked overtime to fill in for me. Whenever Jay and I were off at the same time we slept together and always sent Luke full details as to our sexual activities. I learned from Jay how to give massages and practiced on him as often as possible and looked forward towards applying my new talent on Luke when he returned home.

Some one is really missing a gem of a man by not having Jay as a lifetime mate. Anyone that is a patient in the hospital who has him as their nurse is most fortunate, especially if they are a gay male who enjoys and needs very special attention.

[unoponcho]

Fishing Guide’s Rod

By Kevin,


For many years, Ed and Les had been friends and often fished together and much too often so far as their wives were concerned. They were about ten years older than me and I had gone fishing with them a couple of times. Ed and Les were always sarcastic, arguing or criticizing each other and they thoroughly enjoyed their derogatory interaction between themselves. They were very interesting and enjoyable company when you were with them individually but not when they were together. Ed and Les knew that I was gay but that never bothered them and they accepted my lifestyle.

For several months they had planned a fishing trip to Sam Rayburn Lake in East Texas. They had hired a fishing guide, bought their airplane tickets and were planning on leaving in three days.

Two days before they were to leave, Les had a death in his family and was not going to be able to make the trip. Ed called me and invited me to go in Les’s place. Everything had been paid for and I could make the trip at no expense. I was not very enthusiastic about the fishing part but I knew that I would enjoy being out doors and seeing some to the country that I had never seen before, so I accepted the opportunity. It would only be a two-night trip meaning that I would be away from work for three or maybe four days. All I needed to take was my fishing rods, fishing clothes, and personal toiletry items.

Ed and I enjoyed a very pleasant very early morning flight to Dallas, Texas where we boarded a lightweight plane that took us to Lufkin, Texas. We were met at the airport by a middle age Hispanic whose name was Lucas and he drove us in a pickup to the fishing guides shack near the lake. Lucas was a very humorous man and kept us laughing all the way to the lake.

A real tall good-looking guy came out of the fishing shack and introduced himself as Jim and he was going to be our fishing guide. I said under my breath, “This is going to be a fishing trip to remember the rest of my life”.
Jim was about thirty years old, about my age, and he was barefooted, and wearing very short shorts, tank top and a cowboy hat. He had a wonderful dark tan and when smiling real big his very white teeth glisten. His long legs were the best-shaped and attractive legs I had ever seen and they went with his near perfect shaped body. I was immediately in love.

Jim told Ed and I to take any of our belongs that we did not need during our fishing trip and go to the shack and change into our fishing clothes and put our things in a locker which would be safe until we returned from our fishing expedition. While Ed and I changed our clothes, Lucas and Jim had loaded our fishing rods and things into the fishing boat and were waiting on us. Ed and I got into the boat with Jim and he started up the motor and Lucas pushed us away from the boat dock and waved to us as we took off.

Jim explained that we were headed to his fish camp and that on the way we would stop and fish during the afternoon. He reached in an ice chest and asked if we wanted a beer or soft drink to go with some sandwiches for lunch.

Shortly after we had finished our lunch, Jim pulled the boat up close to the shore and there were some trees hanging over the water. He gave instructions to put on the plugs he handed us and to cast underneath the trees and to try to land the plug about six feet from the shore line and reel in real slow. He said some big bass were under those trees. Ed and I both cast and both hit in the area that Jim had told us to aim for. We reeled our lines in and neither of us had a strike. Jim told us to do it again that there were bass there. The second time and we had no strikes. Jim stood up, picked up his rod and reel, put on the same type of plug that we had used and cast in the exact same spot that he and immediately caught a big bass. Jim reeled the fish in and got it in the boat. Ed was really pissed and expressed his feeling in no uncertain terms to Jim. Jim smiled real big and said, “It’s all in the way you hold your mouth”. Ed said some more sarcastic remarks to Jim and Jim retaliated and I knew that Ed had met his match.

Jim kept taking us to different locations and giving us detail instructions and was very patient giving us an opportunity to catch a big bass. Each time Ed and I would come up empty handed and Jim with one cast would pull in a big bass. Ed continued to try to give Jim a hard time but Jim always came back with some remark to make both Ed and I laugh.

As we were pulling into this one place that Jim wanted us to try, Ed accused Jim of having a trick rod and reel. Jim hand Ed his rod and reel and he took Ed’s. Jim again told us where to cast and Ed and I had tried four or five times.

Jim stood up on the bow of the boat, spread his feet so they were about two feet apart to balance himself because the boat was rocking, lit a cigarette, picked up Ed’s rod and reel, unzipped his pants and started pissing in the water while casting in the same spot that Ed had been hitting and immediately had a strike and reeled the fish in as he finished pissing.

Ed yelled out, “You son-of-a-bitch! You now have not only humiliated me about my damn inadequate fishing abilities and if that is not enough you have the gall to insult me more, smoking a cigarette and by bragging about your goddamn long pecker. Taking a piss while catching a fish and having a pecker so long that you don’t have to hold on to the damn thing while pissing. Of all the humiliation. That really gripes the hell out of me. You damn show off”. Jim smiled and me and winked, “Ed, my rod does some real nice tricks when it gets hard. Do you want to see?” Ed replied, “No you son-of-a-bitch. I certainly do not want to see your ugly pecker. You just keep on and on with your insults”.

To this day, I do not know why I said what I said but did so without thinking. “I would like to see”. Jim smiles as he was looking at me and said, “Only in a private showing for you”. Ed turned to me and said, “I bet you would you faggot”. I just assumed that all the remarks that had been made were in jest and nothing was meant by it. Jim’s appearance, demeanor, and the way he acted showed no indications that in any way that he may be gay or bi except is reply to my remark. I assumed that Jim was acknowledging the fact that I was gay and it was his way of being gay friendly and was teasing me.

It had begun to get cloudy as we pulled up on shore in front of Jim’s fish camp. Lucas was there to greet us and he took our things and placed them in our tents. There were four tents in a row several feet apart from one another. I saw Lucas put my things in the furthest tent and he skipped a tent and put Ed's things in the next tent. Later I learned that Jim’s tent was in between Ed and my tent and Lucas was on the far end from mine.

Lucas had prepared a delicious supper and he and Jim hurriedly put the food on the table. It was getting darker and looked like it would rain at any minute. While we were eating Jim pointed towards a wooden wall and told us that on the other side was an outdoor shower and told us were the toilets were located.

When we had finished eating, Lucas and Ed were trying to out do each other by telling wild exaggerated fish stories. Jim had excused himself and got a towel and headed to the shower. I set and listened to Ed and Lucas rave on and just relaxed.

I looked up and saw one of the most beautiful sights that I had ever seen and wished I had a camera because none of my gay friends would otherwise ever believe it.

Jim was walking towards us from the shower wearing nothing but his cowboy hat and jockstrap. He undoubtedly was the best specimen of a man that I had ever seen. I kept looking at his beautiful body and at the same time wonder how he could walk on the gravel with bare feet.

He walked up to Ed and patted him on the shoulder and said, “May be you will catch a fish tomorrow”. He leaned over and whispered in my ear, “A private showing later”. I did not know if his remark was a come on or if he was teasing me. I only knew that if he were gay that he was a big credit to the gay population.

I took my shower and as I passed Lucas and Ed, Ed told Lucas that it was his time to hit the shower. After going into my tent and getting the bedroll and things ready to go to bed I decided that I wanted another cup of coffee. Lucas had cleaned up after supper and set down and was talking to me when Ed returned from his shower. Ed asked Lucas to fix him a cup of coffee and bring his coffee to his tent and they would talk there. I had not seen Jim and I assumed that he had gone to bed.

I finished my coffee and smoking a couple of cigarettes and it began to rain. I went to my tent and undressed and lay down on my bedroll and listened to the rain and could hear Lucas and Ed talking and laughing. I fell asleep and was awaken by someone coming into my tent. I could not believe it but it was Jim and it was still raining and Jim only had on his jockstrap. He lay down beside me wet from the rain and whispered, “Showtime”.

He cuddled up to me and took a hold of my hard dick and began to stroke it.
As I started to reach for his pride and joy, he pulled the pouch of his jockey strap up so that the straps attached to the pouch came up over the base of his cock and was causing pressure making his cock stand straight out. When I took hold of him, I realized that his cock was huge and suited the rest of his body. He whispered again in my ear, “Play with my rod a while and I will show it to you and show you what it can do”. We both could feel each other’s bodies jerk as we quietly laughed.

The rain was pounding down on our tent and we could no longer hear Lucas and Ed so we assumed that they had gone to bed. Jim said, “This is nice. I hoped that you were gay when I first saw you but my gaydar was not working and I did not know”. I told him, “My gaydar is a piece of crap and I could have never imagine you being gay”. Jim said, “You have a very nice size cock to play with and I am enjoying what you are doing to mine. I would like to do this all night but to be a good fishing guide tomorrow; I will need a few hours sleep”.

Jim got up and straddled my chest and leaned over and began to give me head. His cock was hanging down in my face and I raised my head up and took it into my mouth. He lowered his rear so I could lay my head back down and began to slowly fuck me in the mouth while he continued to suck on my dick. I gripped his very firm buttocks and could guide him in the amount of penetration that was comfortable for me to swallow. I could smell the male scent from his jockstrap and his low handing nuts that were hitting me on my nose and eyes. From the position we were in I could not completely swallow Jim’s long cock but Jim let go of mine briefly and he told me to pull the straps around his butt which would put more pressure on the base of his cock. When I did this I could feel his cock get more ridged while in my mouth. I stretched his elastic strap out and let it smack against his butt and learned by his moaning that this was stimulating to him. I did this several more times and, each time, he would withdraw his cock from my mouth and quickly thrust it back in down my throat.

Jim was deep throating and sucking my dick real hard and we both were enjoying the moment of pleasure. I just could not believe that I was having sex with such a good-looking man and that he was worshiping my cock. The way he was giving me head, I knew that he was enjoying doing what he was doing and that it reflected in the jerking and throbbing of his cock.

Jim slowly removed his cock from my mouth and rolled over on his side. I reached over with one arm and took a hold of the straps of his jockstrap and again applied pressure to his cock and was able to swallow it to its base. Jim murmured, “Oh man! Oh man! You have no idea how good you are making me feel”. Jim and I continued to give each other a head and we each shot off in each other’s mouths. Just before Jim ejaculated, I again used his strap to smack his buttock and the stimulations resulted in Jim withdrawing from my mouth and pushing his cock as far as it would go down my throat and immediately shooting off. Jim turned around and got real close and hugged me. The rain still was coming down and it was so peaceful.

Jim asked, “Is it alright if I spend the rest of the night with you?” I told him that I would love to sleep close to him. Jim said, “Lucas knows that I am gay and will not be surprised that we spent the night together but what about Ed?” I answered, “Oh! Screw Ed.-- No don’t do that.--- The hell with Ed”. He put his arm around me and cuddled up real close and told me goodnight.

I woke up the next morning and it had stopped raining and I heard Lucas moving around fixing breakfast. Jim was still sound asleep with his arm around me and I did not want to disturb him. In a few minutes I heard Lucas lifting the flap of my tent and he set two cups of coffee on the floor of the tent and said, “Your Majesties, your coffee is served”. I thanked him and he told me to “Get Jim up and make him drink the coffee or he will not be worth a shit for the rest of the day”.

I moved Jim’s arm off me and got up and put on my briefs. Jim rolled over and adjusted his jockstrap and put his dick into the pouch. We drank our coffee and Jim got up and tied the flaps open to my tent while I finished dressing. I looked outside and Jim was standing outside my tent and had his arms above his head and was stretching, nude except his jockstrap and yelled, “What a wonderful fucking night! It was a great night!” I crawled out of my tent and realized that Jim’s remarks and actions were all for the benefit of Ed who had just come out of his tent.

Lucas had breakfast ready for us and poured each of us another cup of coffee. Jim had never bothered to get dress except he had put on his cowboy hat. As Ed started to set down at the table, Jim told Ed, “I offered to show you how my hard rod worked and you turned me down flat”. Ed mumbled something that no one understood. Lucas said, “Well it is going to be a hell of a day. I can tell that Jim is happy and all of us are going to suffer”. Jim put his arm around my shoulder and said, “Not all of you, I am going to show this man the time of his life. Last night was just a beginning of my private showing”.

Lucas had fixed us sandwiches for lunch and restocked the ice chest. We took off with the intent of having a great day of fishing. The first place we stopped I cast my line out and pow. I had a bigger bass than Jim had caught the day before. After I got the fish in the boat, Jim turned to Ed, “See I told you that you should see how my rod works. If you had listened to me you would have caught that fish”.

We stopped at three other places and I caught two more big bass and Jim caught one. Ed still zero and was getting more and more pissed both by the ribbing that Jim was giving him and because he had not even had a strike.

Just before noon, we could hear thunder and lighting not too far away from us, the wind was blowing and the water was getting rough. Jim told us that we needed to get back to camp and off the water. Jim started the motor and took off with the speed of light and the water was splashing up over the bow of the boat and we were completely wet by the time we reached camp. Soon it was beginning to rain, thundering and lighting striking all around us.

Jim told Ed and I to go to our tents and get some dry clothes on. After getting dress, I looked outside and Jim and Lucas was running around in the rain putting things under tarps and trying to protect everything during the storm. I saw Lucas and Jim grab some sandwiches and drinks out of the ice chest and Lucas ran to Ed’s tent and Jim came to my tent and handed me the food and told me he would be right back. I watched Jim go into his tent and in a few minutes he came out naked and had a towel and was running to my tent. I took his towel and he had a dry pair of jockstraps wrapped up in the towel. I dried him off and he tossed his jockstrap aside and set down and we ate our lunch.

The storm was making a lot of noise but we could still hear Lucas and Ed talking real loud and laughing. Jim asked me if Ed drank very much. I told him I did not know. Jim said, “Well if he drinks at all Lucas will have him higher than a kite before this afternoon is over. I saw Lucas take an ice chest full of beer into Ed’s tent. Lucas can out drink anybody”.

Jim was cold and told me to get undressed and get in the bedroll with him to help him get warm. After I got in bed, Jim cuddled up to me and put one of his legs over me and used one of his fingers and gently rubbed my lips and inserting his finger in my mouth a few times and then put his arm around my waist and his head on my chests. He lay there for a few minutes and asked if I were comfortable and I told him that I was completely relaxed and was enjoying him being so close. He told me, “Let’s take a nap like this and tonight we can have great sex together”. Jim fell asleep before I did and I could feel his hard cock touching my hip and that caused me to get a hard before I fell asleep.

Lucas woke us up and was standing at the entrance of the tent with his raincoat on and he set down a pot of hot coffee and two mugs. He told us that he would be right back. Lucas had obviously been drinking all afternoon. When he returned he had two huge bowls of steaming chili, crackers, and four bottles of beer. He said “I didn’t know if you like coffee or beer with your chili so I brought you both. If you would get your royal naked butts out of that bedroll and eat this chili, I will guarantee that both of
you will have raging stiffs all night long. Now if you and your royal cocks will excuse me I will go to my tent. That fucking Senior Ed got drunk and passed out on me”. Lucas attempted to take a bow and was so drunk that he almost lost his balance and fell into our tent. I looked outside to see if he made it to his tent. He first went to the kitchen tent and did a few things and stumbled to his tent.

By the time we had finished eating it was almost dark and the rain let up a little bit and both of us needed to take a leak. We got up and ran outside naked to a near by tree and pissed and quickly ran back inside and dried each other off. We jumped back into the warm bedroll and snuggled up to each other until we got warm.

Jim and I made passionate love to each other until sometime in the early morning. We both gave each other the ultimate amount of pleasure. For a big man like Jim, he could be so gentle and yet at the right times be just rough enough that it was delightful. For a couple of hours we did everything to build to the great moment of ejaculation. Then we snuggled up close and we both still had erections and we fondled and stroke each other’s cocks while we relaxed and enjoyed being close. For a long length of time we enjoyed this comfortable feeling and then began to make love again in earnest to reach our second climax.

The next morning, Lucas woke us up for breakfast, he looked into the tent and Jim and I were lying naked on top of the bedroll and both had erections. Lucas shook his head and said, “I told you. That damn chili will do it every time”.

I got up and dressed and Jim slipped on his jockstrap and told me that Mother Nature was calling and ran towards the john. I had to go to and met Jim coming out. When I finished, I joined everyone at the breakfast table. Lucas had fixed a huge breakfast for us and started apologizing for not being able to fix us a big super last night. He wanted to fry fish and have all the trimmings to go with it but could not do it in the rain. Jim excused himself from the table and as he was leaving, Lucas said, “You guys should feel honored. When it is just Jim and I here, he does not wear that strap thing. He runs around stark naked with that dumb cowboy hat of his”.

Jim put on another pair of short shorts, threw a tank top on his shoulder and had his hat on and began to prepare to take us fishing. We were going to fish on the way back to the fishing shack before we caught our plane to go home. Jim and Lucas packed Ed and my things back into the boat and we left Lucas at camp but Lucas was to meet us again at the fishing shack to drive us to Lufkin to catch our plane home.

While fishing on the way back to the fishing shack, Ed finally caught his first bass and I caught three more. Ed was suffering from a hangover and he was not in the mood to carry on with Jim like he normally did. Jim spent most of the time seated in the back of the boat. His lightly coated bleached out hairy legs were stretched out in front of him and were spread wide apart, showing a tremendous box, wearing no shirt with the same bleached out hair on his chest and stomach that was glistening in the bright sun, with his arms stretched out on the back of his seat and starring and smiling at me. When I caught a fish, he would jump up and help me get it into the boat. He seemed more thrilled about my catching the fish than I was.

After reaching the fishing shack, Ed and I went in and changed clothes while Jim and Lucas loaded our things in the pickup and they had cleaned the fish that Ed and I had caught that morning. Lucas had already cleaned the other fish that Jim and I had caught and had them iced down and he added those that were caught that morning and put the chest in the back of the pickup for us to take home.

Jim shook Ed’s hand and told him that he was sorry that he did not catch more fish and offered Ed a refund because of the bad weather. Ed backed off and said, “No fucking way. I finally met my match and you are just a better fisherman than I will ever be but if I ever fish with you again I want to see how that damn rod of yours works. It seemed to have done wonders for my fishing partner who caught most of the fish”. Jim came over to me and put his arms around me and lifted me off the ground. He put me down and ran his fingers through my hair while looking into my eyes and smiling. I reached up and pulled his cowboy hat off and put it on my head and asked Ed, “Does this make me look as handsome as Jim?” Ed’s replied, “Give Jim back his hat you fruitcake and get your ass in the pickup”. I put Jim’s hat back on him and put my arm around his neck and kissed him on his cheek and whispered in his ear, “I do not know what your fishing guide fee is but the memories and services you rendered me are priceless”. I put my hand up the back leg of his shorts, took hold of one of the straps of his jockstrap and stretched it out and let go causing it to whack his butt. Jim followed me to the pickup and as I was climbing in he swatted me on my rear, smiled and winked at me before closing the door.

Lucas got us to the airport on time and told us goodbye. On our flight home Ed had very little to say. I do not know if he was pissed off with me or what but I had a great time mostly because it rained and I got to see how Jim’s rod worked.

I have no proof about my theory but I do not think there is another fishing guide in the world as good-looking and nice as Jim. I do know for a fact that his very nice hard rod works perfectly and his fishing rod performs very well.

[unoponcho]

My Secretary’s Husband Is My Lover

By Kevin


Some very strange things happen in this world and somehow I seem to get myself involved in some of the strangest situations of them all.

After moving six hundred miles, buying and moving in a new house,
at the age of thirty-two, ambitious, and ready to set the world on fire, I reported to work as a new employee at a company as one of their executives. In my new position, I would have a couple hundred employees under my supervision. It was a big advancement for me and I would have a lot of problems and under a lot of stress but I had convinced myself that I could do the job.

The company was growing and all I had to do was to keep my head above the water and not make to many mistakes. The company was very conservative and would not tolerate homosexuals as employees. Even though it was against the law to discriminate against homosexuals the company found ways around the laws to fire any known homosexual employee. Therefore, I knew that I had to be extremely careful about my gay lifestyle.

The first tasked that I had was to hire a secretary. The secretary’s position was very important because I needed someone that was extremely efficient and who would be my right arm in order to being a success in my new position.

The company had arranged for me to interview ten applicants for the secretary’s job and that should have taken me all morning. The first applicant that showed up for the interview was Katherine. She had on a very feminine dress and her hair and makeup was perfection and she was very friendly, cheerful with a nice smile, appeared to be around thirty years old and made a wonderful impression. I thought to myself, “Okay, she certainly has the appearance but what about her secretary abilities”. I looked at her application and her previous experience was teaching for the past three years at a local Business College. She had been teaching Shorthand, Spelling and Grammar, Typing, and Office Responsibilities and Office Etiquette. I asked her why in the hell would she be interested in this job. She said, “I don’t like teaching and I prefer being a secretary”.

She had listed the President of the Business College as a reference and I picked up the phone and made a call and the President’s secretary answered the phone. I said, “Hello, I have Katherine Wilson in my office and she is interviewing for a secretary’s position and I wonder if you could tell me if she was employed by your institution and if you could tell me something about her qualifications? The secretary answered, “Oh she was the best teacher we ever had in fact I am one of her former pupils”.

I hung up the phone and asked Katherine when could she start to work.
Katherine pause a moment and I asker her what about now? She said, “Sure, where is my office and what do you want me to do first?” I showed her to her office and told her that when other applicants came in to see me that she was to tell them that the position was filled and their applications would be placed in the file incase other openings became available.

After working with Katherine for a couple weeks, she had proven without a doubt that she was the best secretary that I could ever expect to have. She had organized the office, was an extremely fast and accurate typist, and assisted me in keeping up with my appointments and helping me be better organized. Each day she would open and scan my mail and stack it on my desk according to what she thought was most important for me to read first.

I received a personal letter from my ex and when we broke up there were a lot of ill feelings and hostilities on both sides. The salutations of his note to me read, “Hello, you fucking Queer”. The contents of the note written on a 3” x 5” card left no doubt in anyone’s mind that read the note that I was gay. When I picked up the envelope the card fell out and landed on the floor. I wondered if the same thing happened when Katherine opened the oversized envelope and if it did happen, had she read the note. If so, I could be in trouble.

On a Friday evening, the company planned a dinner in honor of all the new employees and they were to be introduced and be given a brief time to say a few words. All the new employees were invited to bring their spouse or date. Katherine and I were expected to attend and be introduced. Katherine asked me to set with she and her husband.

When Katherine showed up for the dinner with her husband, I was impressed. Katherine had on a beautiful dress and looked like a fashion model and her husband was tall and handsome. Together they were a perfect couple, each complimenting the other. Katherine introduced her husband, Jack, to me and we immediately made eye contact and looked at each other for several moments before breaking eye contact and setting down at a table. I wondered if my gaydar was again giving off false signals. Jack was married and there were no visible appearances of him being gay in anyway.

Jack put his hand on my shoulder and told me, “Katherine has told me so much about you and how lucky she is to have you as a boss”. I even liked the way this man talked. He had a deep pleasant voice that was most pleasing to the ear. Before the program began Jack and I talked and we unintentionally ignored Katherine’s presents.

During our conversation, Jack asked me if I liked to play volleyball and I told him that I used to play and enjoyed the sport. He told me that he was on a team and they had lost a member and he invited me to play with his team Saturday night. If I was good, the team might invite me to fill the vacancy that they had recently obtained. I accepted his offer and he told me where the gym was and that he would meet me there. Jack was very friendly and I enjoyed talking with him and Katherine seemed very pleased that we got along and liked each other.

Saturday morning, I looked at my gym shorts and they were in terrible shape and should have been thrown in the trash a long time ago. I went to the sports store and bought a complete new gym outfit including new shoes, socks and jockstrap. I had my new gym things in a small bag and waited outside the gym for Jack.

Jack and I went inside the gym and to the locker room to change clothes. As we entered the locker room there was a very beautiful young man that was working behind the counter who was the locker room attendant. He was only wearing very brief shorts and as I passed the counter my gaydar was sending out signals everywhere. As I walked by our eyes locked and it was not until I ran into the wall that I could take my eyes off him. Jack had wittiness the whole scene and said, “That is George, and yes he is gay. It is obvious that he likes the way you look. You need to be careful or he will be in your pants before you leave tonight”.

As I was changing into my gym clothes, I looked over at Jack and he was standing naked near me stroking his semi hard cock. He turned and showed me his rear. Jack had a very eye appealing muscular athletic body and I could not do anything but stand there and gawk at him. He smiled at me and said, “I hope you like what you see. I certainly like what you have to offer. Let’s go play some volleyball and see how well you do playing my other favorite sport”. I thought “God, this is my secretary’s husband and he is coming on to me in a big way. How am I going to handle this problem?”

After Jack introduced me to his teammates, we played three games and won all three. I must have done all right because they invited me to join their team as a regular member.

We all went to the locker room and everyone was taking off their gym clothes and heading for the showers. I had taken all my clothes off and realized that I had not gotten a towel from the locker room attendant. I put back on my jockstrap and went to the counter to get a towel. George was standing there holding out a towel for me and he smiled at me as he handed me the towel, he told me that if I need another one or anything else to whistle.

When I got to the showers all the guys were in high spirits because of winning the games and were soaping themselves down and talking and laughing. Several of them were shampooing their hair and had their eyes close giving me an opportunity to take a good look at their great bodies. I obtain an erection and turned towards the wall trying to hide the fact. I felt someone’s hand on my shoulder and looked around and Jack said, “If you need any help with that just let me know”.

After getting out of the shower, I had dried off and Jack came up to me and invited me to go with him to the workout room that he wanted to workout for a while. I declined and told him that I was not used to all the exercise that I had had tonight and that I was going to go to the steam room. Jack whispered in my ear, “Let me warn you again about George. He gets into some pretty kinky stuff sometimes. Just be careful”.

I had my towel around me and was headed to the steam room and from nowhere, George appeared with a dry towel in his hand and he yanked the damp towel from my waist leaving me stark naked and he backed off and said, “You are one good-looking man and I certainly like what I see”. I took the dry towel and wrapped it around my waist and answered, “Well I have not seen you naked but I am sure I would like what I would see, but I am here with Jack tonight. Thanks for the towel”.

The steam room felt great and since no one was there except me, I removed my towel and lay down and just completely relaxed and enjoyed the quiet and peace of being alone. While lying there I had contemplated on the fact that I was completely confused by the way Jack was coming on to me and was trying to decide how to handle the situation.

I fell asleep and was awakened by someone giving me head. The steam room was dark and full of steam and it was hard to see. My first thought was that it was George and that I had not gotten my message across to him. I rose up on my elbow and said, “God man, that feels so fucking good but who in the hell is sucking my cock”. “It’s me, who did you think it was—George?” I of course recognized that it was Jack and he had my cock so fucking hard and feeling so great that there was no way I could have told him to stop.

Jack had me almost to the point that I was about to ejaculate and he stopped and lay down beside me so his cock was within my reach and I took a hold and began stroking. He had a thick cock that was close to eight inches or longer and as ridged as could be. As I was stroking him he began sucking me again until I could hardly put off my orgasm any longer. He took his mouth away from my cock and began rubbing my thighs, buttocks, stomach and chest and then began sucking my cock all the way to it’s base and back up completely releasing it from his mouth and going all the way back to the base over and over until I shot off my big load. Just as I started climaxing, I had been stroking Jack’s cock and he began shooting his cum onto my stomach and chests.

He turned around and lay beside me and rolled me on top of him and both of our still erected cocks were touching each other and I lay my head on his chest until we both recovered and our cocks became soft. After a period of silence, I said, “Jack we are going to have to talk about this”. He answered, “Yes we are. Let’s take another shower and go to the coffee shop and we can talk there”.

The conversation between Jack and I was most revealing and I was very surprised by what he told me. Both he and Katherine were gay and their marriage was a mutual agreement and was a convenient arrangement to further his career and cover up the fact that they were homosexuals from their employers, co-workers and Katherine’s family. It was most essential for Jack to be perceived as a married man to succeed in furthering his career with his company.

They had known each other since they were freshman in high school, had been very close friends, and always spent a lot of time together. After they were married, they tried to have sex one time and neither one really enjoyed the experience.

Katherine has a lover named Sally who has a secretary’s job with a very good salary at a law firm. She is a former student of Katherine and they have been lovers for two years. They have been very discreet and no one suspects that they are lovers instead of being just friends.

Jack had had a long time partner that he spent time with outside the city and they commuted to work and no one suspected their relationship. They had recently broken up because Jack was spending time with Katherine to keep the appearance of being happily married.

Katherine had read enough of the note from my ex to know that I was also gay and she had told Jack I was gay before we first met.

Monday morning I went to my office and I did not know what to say to Katherine or how to approach the problem. Shortly after I set down at my desk, Katherine came into my office and shut the door behind her and asked if she could talk to me. She said, “I know that Jack has put you in a terrible position, but, so far as I am concern, I think what happened between you and Jack is great. If you two want to take it any further that is up to both of you. I want you to know that I like working with you and what ever happens, I do not want it to affect our working relationship”. I told her that I appreciated her being upfront with me and that I was glad that she came in to talk to me because I was at lost to know how to approach her about what had taken place. We would just have to wait and see what developed between Jack and I.

On a number of different occasions, Jack and I got together and spent time getting to know each other. We found that we had a lot of common and were beginning to really get serious about our relationship. Jack spent the night with me several times and we had sex and had learned what each other like to do sexual wise.

Katherine came into my office one morning and asked me if I like ballroom dancing and I told her that I loved to dance. She said she had a real big favor to asked, “Sally’s law firm is having a formal dinner/dance and she does not have anyone to escort her to the dance. Jack and I have been invited. Would you consider being Sally’s escort and double dating with Jack and I?

It had been years since I had dated a female and I really did not know if it would be fun or not to go to this event. I put on my tuxedo, had a corsage for Sally, and waited for Jack and Katherine to pick me up and then go pickup and meet Sally for the first time.

Katherine and Sally in they’re evening gowns, were the most beautiful women at the dance and Jack was without a doubt was the most handsome man there.

Katherine and Jack were dancing together and everyone began to stop dancing and cleared the dance floor watching Katherine and Jack dance together and when they finished the dance they received a tremendous applause. It was breathe taking to watch them dance, as they were so graceful and danced so well together. Sally told me that they had been dancing together for years and had entered a number of ballroom dance contests and always won first place. I congratulated both of them on how well they danced together. Jack took my hand and said, “May I have the next dance with you?” Sally grinned, “I would like to see you two dancing together. Some of these old attorneys here would mess in their pants”.

Sally was also a wonderful dance partner and we had a wonderful evening together. After being Sally’s date to the dinner/dance, when either one of us needed a date to some event we needed to attend, we always felt free to call on each other and we enjoyed being together as friends.

When we got into the car to go home, Katherine asked me if I would mine having Jack to spend the night with me that she and Sally wanted to be together.

Jack did spend the night with me and spent the next five nights as well and we had sex as often as either or both could get erections. While Jack and I were together, Katherine and Sally spent time together.

Jack and I had fallen in love in a big way. Just looking at his face and wonderful body, hearing his voice or him touching me or me touching him would cause my cock to get hard. Jack told me that I had the same affect on him. We would spend hours just kissing, hugging and cuddling. There was nothing more pleasurable than swallowing his big eight-inch cock unless it was when he was swallowing my cock at the same time. When we gave each other blowjobs we were never in a hurry and just relaxed and took as much time as needed or we could stand before releasing out cum to each other. It was the same when we fucked each other. It was never a wham bam thing. It was making love and giving pleasure to both of us.

One evening while at home, Jack did ask me to dance with him again and as he whirled me around the floor doing these fancy footsteps for ten or fifteen minutes, he began to undress me and I in turned undress him and we danced in the nude with full erections for another half an hour. As Jack and I danced closed together, he removed his right hand and arm from my shoulder held and stroked both of our cocks at the same time, while still dancing, until we both ejaculated on to each other.

For Jack and Katherine to keep up the appearance of being married, Jack would spend a couple nights a week at home with Katherine. Otherwise he was living with me and Sally was with Katherine.

After Jack had spent one night at home with Katherine, he told me that he and Katherine had always had separate bedrooms and that they never slept together. The lady that lived next door was a busy body and was always spying on them and enjoyed gossiping. One of the neighbor’s windows was directly across from Katherine’s bedroom and Katherine never closed her blinds and the old bitty would set by her window and watch what went on in Katherine’s bedroom. On a couple occasions the busy body had seen Katherine and Sally in bed sleeping together and had started some rumors speculating what may be going on between the two.

Katherine was laying in her bed with her nightgown on reading and was not aware that her neighbor was watching. Jack had looked out his bedroom window and saw the old bitty setting in a chair in front of her window and spying on Katherine.

He knocked on Katherine’s door and walked over her bed and told Katherine that the old bitty was watching and he was going to give her something to talk about. He reached over and kissed Katherine on the cheek and walked over were the lady could not see him and he took off all his clothes and jumped in front of the window and put his foot on the window ledge giving her a full view of his frontal nudity and began to stroke his cock. He was watching the busy body as she began scooting her chair back from the window and her chair tipped over backwards and he could hear her screaming as she fell over backwards with her chair. Jack said since then the old bitty has always kept her window blinds closed and now Katherine also closes her blinds.

Jack had been promoted to Vice-President of his company and was receiving more than an adequate salary. He paid off the loan on the house that he and Katherine lived in and put the title in her name. He paid for all the household bills and gave Katherine enough money each month that she really did not have to work. For just being very close friends, his generosity may have seemed too much but he felt that his promotion was in part because of her.

Katherine is the greatest most efficient secretary that I have ever had or hope to have. She has been offered numerous opportunities to take other jobs at a tremendous advance in salary but she has turned them down because she says that she liked working for and with me.

I appreciate her loyalty, friendship, and most of all, for her sharing her husband with me.

[orient_al]

nice story.......fiction

[unoponcho]

Male Model

By Kevin

Part I

Like many other young people, I lived in New York trying to be a successful artist. I had a degree in art and had studied in Paris and Rome and had done all the things that should have prepared me for an art career but I was struggling to survive. I simply could not make a living painting and resorted to teaching art classes.

I had found a large open space on the third floor in an old building that I leased for a reasonable sum and turned it into my living quarters and studio/classroom. My living area was divided off from my studio and classroom by some crude screens which I had constructed. I had installed a small kitchen sink and tied the plumbing into the bathroom plumbing. My living area was an open space that provided me with only the bare essentials for living. I had a couch, lounge chair, small TV, bed, folding card table with 2 chairs were I ate my meals, a small kitchen cabinet, a two burner stove, microwave oven, small refrigerator and only the bare essentials of cooking utensils and plates and glasses. I installed a small hot water heater that I tied into the kitchen sink and to the makeshift shower. Everything in my living area was second hand or retrieved from the trash. The plumbing and electrical work that I had done in no way would meet the city code.

The studio and classroom was also furbished with second hand furnishing except some of the overhead light fixtures and spotlights. There was space for ten students and a platform for the model. Any of the students’ accidents or paint that landed on the floor only added to improve the décor of the space.

Within a year after I had begun teaching, I had sixty students and a waiting lists for others that wanted to study and be one of my students. Many of my students were very talented and I felt honored to have them in my classes. When I started my fee was very modest but as my reputation as teacher became widespread, I had tripled my fee. I now did not have anytime to do any painting on my own but I enjoyed teaching so much that I no longer cared.

My recent success as a teacher provided me with enough profit that I easily could improve my standard of living but I was happy with the way I was living and was establishing a sizeable savings account.

Obtaining people who were willing to model in the nude for a very minimum fee was never a problem. I would place an add in the paper and a dozen or so would show up for an interview. However, none of them would model for a long length of time. My classes generally were scheduled to run for ten lessons, two and a half hours each, and be completed within a three-week period. After I had a problem with one model quitting in the middle of a class period, I had to start to require the models to sign contracts that they would model for the full term of the contract or would not be paid.

I had placed a small add in the local paper for a male model between the age of twenty and thirty years of age. I was about to start two new classes and I needed a model for one of them. One of the new classes was to begin that afternoon but one of my stand-by models had signed a contract that he would be the model.

About an hour before the class was to begin the model called and said that he had gotten a full time job and would no longer be available. I did not know what to do. I was in a real bind.

Hans showed up answering my add and I asked him if he had ever modeled in the nude before. He replied, “No Sir. But I am willing to do anything for some money”. I asked him to go into my living area and remove his clothes so that I could see him in the nude.

I waited in the studio for a few minutes to give him a chance to remove his clothes and when I walked in and saw him all I could say was, “Oh My God”. Hans had the most perfect twenty-one-year-old body that I had ever seen and I for the first time in quiet a while wanted to capture his image on canvas. He was about six feet tall with brownish blonde hair, nice looking face and a beautiful proportioned body. Without any hesitation I asked, “Hans can you model for my class that will begin in about a half an hour?” Hans asked what kind of class and I explained that it was an art class and ten students would be sketching and painting him.

Hans was obviously embarrassed and said, “Well I have never been naked before in front of a lot of people.----But sure I will do it. I do need the money.---I was afraid this modeling thing was going to be some porn thing I have heard about. I sure am glad that it’s not”. I asked him if he would be available for the next three weeks and told him about the class schedule and he told me he would be available.

I rummaged around in a pile of my clothes and got a skin colored T back for him to put on and told him to come out to the studio when he was ready.

One of the things that concerned me about Hans was he had this drawn or haggard expression on his face and he never smiled but that should not prevent him from being a good model. I could just tell that he was very unhappy or sad for some reason.

I had put up a couple of white columns at different heights on the platform to use as props. Hans stood patiently watching what I was doing and when I finished, Hans said, “What do you want me to do? I have never done this before”. I asked him to get up on the platform and set on one of the columns and I stepped down off the platform and had him pose in several different positions. After I decided on the pose I wanted him to assume, I asked him if he were comfortable in that position and if he could stay in that position for twenty to thirty minutes at a time. He said he thought he could and I told him to hold the pose until I got the spotlights exactly right. When I got the lights on him I stood back to see how he looked. I could not believe what a beautiful specimen of a man that I was seeing.

Before Hans had a chance to move from his pose, two female students arrived for the class and when one of the women saw Hans, she screamed, “Is he going to be our model? –I’ve died and have gone to heaven”. I looked at Hans and he still had this serious expression on his face. I would have thought that kind of compliment would have caused him smile if any thing would.

The two and half hour class went very well and both the male and female students were very pleased with their new model. During the breaks, the students introduced themselves, praised and complemented Hans for his looks.

Hans went to put on his clothes and I had decided to ask him to also be a model for the class that would begin tomorrow. All the students had gone and I wondered what was taking Hans so long to get dressed. I went to check on him and Hans was partly dressed but lying on the floor unconscious.

I examined Hans trying to determine what had caused him to pass out. His breathing seemed to be normal and I checked his pulse that also seemed to be all right. I started to call the ambulance but decided to wash his face with cold water to see if I could revive him before calling for help. Hans did respond and after he came to I asked him what had happen and if he knew why he had passed out. Hans said, “Well it could have been because I have not eaten in four days”. I asked why and he told me that he did not have any money for food and this morning because he was behind in his rent that his landlord had kicked him out.

After I got Hans up and lying on my bed, I fixed a large meal for both of us. Hans seemed to not be able to eat fast enough but eventually had all he could eat. While we were eating I told him that he was welcomed to stay with me and sleep on the couch until he found a full time job and got back on his feet. For the first time since meeting Hans, he smiled and thanks me.

When we finished our dinner and had a couple cups of coffee, I looked at my watch and realized that I just had time to take a shower before getting ready for my evening class. Hans seemed to be much better but I told him to leave the dirty dishes and get some rest. I asked Hans if we needed to go somewhere and pick up his things and he told me that everything he had of any value was in a bag near a wall in the studio.

By the time I finished my shower and got dressed, Hans had washed the dishes and went with me into the studio to help me get set up for the class. While we were setting up the posing platform, the female model arrived. I introduced Shirley to Hans. She excused herself and went into my quarters to remove her clothes to get ready to model. She came back into the studio wearing a robe and set down and talked to us while we were working.

When the students started arriving, Hans went to the living area and I assumed that he was going to lie down and get some rest. During the class ever once in a while I would see Hans stick his head around the screen and observe what was going on in the studio and about thirty minutes before the class was over I heard Hans in the shower.

After the class was over Shirley went to put on her clothes and I was expecting Hans to come out into the studio while she was getting dressed. In a few minutes Shirley showed up dress and was smiling and said, “That beautiful hunk of a man is stretched out on your couch in his under shorts sound asleep. You would not believe what he has done”. I could not imagine what she was talking about. “You are in for the shock of your life. I have never seen your living area so clean and organized. He has picked up all your dirty clothes and crap, swept and mopped the floors, made up your bed and your place actually for a change, looks like someone could live there”.

After I locked the doors and turned out the lights in the studio, I went into my living quarters and Hans was lying on his back sound asleep. I looked around and did not dream that my place could look so good. I removed my clothes and before turning out the light I stared at Hans magnificent figure and was appreciate of having the privilege of being able to view him while he was sleeping so peacefully. I tried to resist having an erection but my dick was not cooperating and was sticking straight out.

It was so nice to get into my bed that had been made up and the sheets spread out like they should be instead of all wrinkled up around me. I finally got Hans image and my lust for his body and cock out of my mind and was just about asleep when I heard Hans beside my bed and asked quietly, “Are you asleep?” I told him I was still awake. He said, “Do you mind if I lay down by you and talk. I really need to be close to someone and talk. If you do not feel like talking I certainly will understand”. I told him to get his ass in bed with me and we would talk as long as he wanted. After Hans got in bed, I told him that my next class was tomorrow evening and that I wanted him to model for that class. Hans patted me on my arm and said, “Thanks Bud”.

Hans and I were laying close to each other and I waited for Hans to say something and when he didn’t I asked him to tell me about himself.
“Well Sir, I think it would help me to talk to you. I don’t have anyone else to share my problems with and I hope you will just listen and let me get some things off my chests.”

“I was reared on a small farm and after I finished high school, I continued to live with my parents and tried to help them with the farming. All my life we were poor and the farm for many years provided us with just the bare essentials. Our tractor and farming equipment was old and my dad and I were constantly making repairs and trying to keep them going. The past two years we had crop failures and my dad was behind in paying the notes on the bank loan”.

“Five weeks ago, my parents were killed in a car accident while coming home from talking to the loan officer at the bank. A lady and her husband who were our nearest neighbors learned about the accident and came to my house and told me about my parents’ deaths. The lady brought me food regularly for several days and her husband helped me dig my parents’ graves in an old cemetery on our property. I bought the best caskets that I could afford. I said that but actually they were the cheapest caskets that the funeral home had. After the funeral home put my parents bodies in the caskets, I hauled them to the cemetery and my neighbors and I buried my parents”.

Hans broke down and started crying and I put my arms around him and held him close to me and could feel his body shaking.

After a considerable amount of time, he continued, “A few days later the bank loan officer came to see me and even though he felt badly about what had happened, he told me that the bank was reposing the farm and that I needed to vacate the property within the week. I sold the old pickup, which was really not worth anything, to my neighbor and he insisted on giving me three hundred dollars for it. My dad and mother did have some money that they had been saving and I paid off the funeral expenses and had a hundred dollars left over.”

“I moved to New York City and found the cheapest room I could find and started to look for work. Since I have no skills or experience, I could not find a job and I ran out of money. I did work a couple days as a dishwasher in a restaurant but they told me I was too slow and took to long being sure that the dishes and pots and pans were clean and they let me go”.

“By this time I was very discourage and feeling sorry for myself but I had not reached bottom as yet. Since moving to New York, the worst thing happened last week. An old fat ugly nasty man had a room next to mine. He knew the financial problems I was having and he told me that he would give me twenty dollars if I would give him a blowjob. I had never had sex with a man in my life but as hungry as I was I agreed to his offer. I did my best and after he shot off he told me I was lousy at sucking cocks but did pay me. I was so disgusted with myself and nauseated by the ordeal that I threw up and could not eat or sleep that night.”

“Before I got here this morning, I had made up my mind that if I did not get a job today that I was going to kill myself before I would suffer the indignity of stooping any lower than I had already”.

I hugged Hans real tight for a long time while trying to think what I could say to this poor guy.

“Hans, today you have made a true friend and I am going to be here to help you. Your life and luck is going to change around and I am going to see to it that it does”. Han’s rose up and kissed me on my cheek, put his arms around me, and laid his head on my chest. I could feel his tears hitting my chest but knew this time they were tears of happiness and not sorrow. He lay there a few minutes before saying, “Thank You. Thank you for being a friend and for listening to me. I feel so much better now. I think I can go to sleep.” He started to get off me and I told him to stay where he was and go to sleep and wished him a goodnight.

The next morning I woke up and I was lying on my back and I had a roaring hard that was tenting the sheet. I looked over and Hans and he had breakfast cooked and waiting for me. He grinned at me and nodded towards my erection and said, “Man you are sporting a real big whopper down there”. I was embarrassed and just smiled back at him.

After breakfast, Hans got up from the table and began to wash the dishes and put things away. I told him that I appreciated breakfast and thanked him for cleaning up my place last night. Hans asked me if I would advance him some money from his modeling fee so he could take my dirty clothes to the laundry mat and pick up a few groceries. I got out eighty dollars and handed it to him. He said, “It’s not going to take that much money”. I told him to keep it and since I had the day off that I would go with him.

While I was shaving and showering, Hans striped the linens off the bed and had the dirty clothes ready and had finished shaving when I got out of the shower to dry off. Hans was waiting to get into the shower and had a semi-hard and my cock immediately became erect and Hans was aware of my erection. Hans grinned and as he was getting into the shower, he said, “Man you must be horny today or do you always get a hard on?” I quickly got dressed and waited on Hans. When he came out of the shower his cock was as hard as a rock. He was very adequately endowed with thick eight inches. He smiled and said that he must also be horny. He had some difficulty in keeping it in his shorts while getting dressed.

After we got back from doing the laundry and grocery shopping and put everything away, Hans said, “I noticed that your clothes are in pretty bad shape. You really need some new clothes. If you can afford some new threads, lets go to the mall and I will help you select some new things”. Clothes had never been my thing and I hated to go shopping but I told him “Let’s go. I would appreciate your help”.

By the middle of the afternoon, we had eaten lunch and were back home with several bundles of new clothes and shoes. After Hans had picked out clothes for me, I insisted that he pick out new clothes for himself that I would pay for them. The total bill was less than half what I thought it might be and I really liked our selection.

I was seated at the table drinking a coke and Hans came up in back of me and put a towel around my shoulders and said, “I am not a barber but I used to cut my dad’s hair and I am going to cut yours”. After he had finished, I looked in the mirror and hardly recognized myself and said, “Hans, you have done wonders. I look human. I am a good-looking man without all that hair. Thank you. This calls for a celebration. Let’s put on our new clothes and go to a restaurant for dinner before class this evening”.

We enjoyed our dinner and returned home and were ready for the class to begin. As I was setting up the props for Hans to pose, I told him that I really did not have the proper props worthy to show off his body. The only idea that I could think of was to put him on an old bicycle that I had. I was really not pleased with the idea but knew no matter what props I used that he would be pleasing to the eye. I had chosen the pose that I wanted Hans to assume and had set the spotlights the way I wanted them.

Hans went to take off his clothes and I told him to wait for me before coming out.

The large majority of the students had previously taken a number of my classes and I considered them all to be advanced students who were very talented. When the students began to come in and setting up their easels and canvases, I went back and put oil on Hans skin so it would be enhanced by the spot light. We could hear the students complaining and remarking about how hard it was going to be to paint a bicycle. I told Hans to stay there until I called him.

When I went out and stood on the platform, my old students began to complement my new clothes and new look. They gave me a round of standing applause. I took a bow and told them that our model for the class tonight was entirely responsible. I told them that I had overheard their remarks about how difficult it was going to be to paint a bicycle but they had not seen anything yet. If they could capture the true likeness of tonight’s model, they would be master artist.

I asked Hans to join us, and he strutted to the platform and took his pose. All the students were aghast and completely speechless and then one of them said, “Teach, you certainly have choose a winner. Talk about a challenge---My God he is beautiful”. Hans was smiling from ear to ear.

Pete was one of the students who had taken several class sessions and who was very successful in his chosen career. Painting was a hobby that he was developing and hope to pursue and spend more time with after he retired. Pete knew a lot of influential people and had good connections. After class Pete asked me about Hans and wanted to know what his plans were for the future. I briefly told him about Hans’s problem and that he was looking for any kind of a job that he could get.
Pete said he had a friend that was always looking for models for his clothing business and asked me if I would mind if he spoke to his friend about Hans. He said Hans may be what his friend was looking far and if so Hans may have a real future ahead of him. I told Pete that anything he could do for Hans would be appreciated by both of us.

I decided not to tell him about Pete’s interest and the possibility of future modeling jobs and wait and see what happens.

While I was closing up and putting things away in the studio, Hans took a shower to remove the oil I had put on his body. When I walked into the living area, Hans was still nude and sprawled out in a chair at the table drinking a coke. I told him, “Don’t you move a muscle. Stay exactly where you are. Please don’t move”. I grabbed my sketchpad and began to sketch. It only took me a few minutes and I thanked him and told him that someday in the near future that I was going paint what I just seen and sketched.

I was so absorbed in doing the sketch that I did not realize that my cock was again stiff and wanted to be released from the confines of my clothing. Hans spotted my condition right away and asked, “Am I the cause of your getting a hard? Are you gay?” I replied, “I am not going to lie to you. The answer to both of your questions is yes”. A big grin was on Hans face and he looked at me in the eye and said, “You know I must be gay to. A woman never has turned me on but you certainly turn me on. This afternoon when I was cutting your hair my cock got so hard that I shot off in my underwear and had to go to the bathroom and clean myself up. Would you have sex with me and show me how to give you a blowjob?”

Hans did not have to ask me twice. I yanked my clothes off and was in bed waiting on him to turn off the lights and come to bed. By the time he got in bed both of us were lusting for each other’s cocks and bodies. Hans lay down on his back and I straddled him and our cocks were hitting each other as I started kissing him. Hans had never kissed a man before and he was really turned on especially when I started kissing him with our mouths open and putting my tongue into his mouth. He began to return my kisses and using his tongue. While still kissing each other, I moved my ass up so his cock was touching my asshole and could feel him releasing precum on my hole.

I got off him and he lay there completely relaxed and I begin stroking his cock a few times before I was going to take it into my mouth. Hans took a hold of my pride and joy and was also jerking me off. When I went down for the first time on Hans, he screamed out at the top of his lungs, “Oh---My---God!” We could hear his voice echo through out the studio and we both started to laugh. Hans’s cock was so sensitive that I was afraid that he might have a pre mature ejaculation. I had never suck anyone cock who seemed to enjoy the feelings he had as much as he. Every time I took his cock down my throat and then released it and repeat the action again I could tell from his movements of his body that he was experiencing for the first time the most delightful feelings that he had ever had before. He was also showing his pleasures that he was getting by the way he was gripping and rapidly beating my meat.

We had each other almost to the peak of our ecstasy and I changed positions so I could hold and kiss him again. I rose up on my elbow and gently traced his lips with my finger and told him that I wanted him to shoot his cum in my mouth. I kissed him again on his lips and moved down and kissed and lick his very nice shaped nipples and when I did he said, “You better quite are I will shoot off now. Goddamn you are making me feel so good. Please suck on my cock some more”. I was more than happy to accommodate his request. I licked the shaft of his cock and then took his nuts in my mouth and sucked and twirled them around with my tongue. Hans began yelling, “Stop!, Stop!, Oh no. Shit! Don’t stop! Please! Don’t stop!—Hell, I am about to shoot”. I released his nuts and returned to his cock and completely swallowed it several times before he began to shoot volumes of cum down my throat. I continued to deepthoat him until he became so sensitive that he made me quite.

I lay down beside him and was going to kiss him but he was breathing real hard and he pulled my head down so my ear was close to his mouth and he whispered, “That was so fucking great. Thank you. You are a wonderful beautiful man. Thank you”. I laid my head down on his chest and could hear his heart still beating fasts and I reached down and took a hold of his still stiff cock and his body jerked to tell me that he was still very sensitive.

After Hans got his breath back he announced that it was his turn to try to do what I had just taught him. He tried to duplicate every move I had made even starting with kissing me and going step-by-step trying to please me as much as I had pleased him. The first time he tried to completely swallow my cock he gagged a little bit and removed my cock from his mouth and asked, “How can you take my cock down your throat and not gag when mine is longer than yours?” I said, “Practice, my man, practice”. He laughed and said, “Well I am going to do all my practicing on you. It may take awhile so just be patient with me. Look out cock, I am going to eat you”. He then went down on me all the way and continued until I was just about to cum and I warned him that I was about to shoot and for him to relax and he would not have any difficulty taking my load. I released my cum and he had no problem. When he finished, he lay down beside me and kissed me and said, “Do you always shoot that much cum? You know I rather liked the taste. I was expecting it to have terrible taste. The other day, that old ugly man’s cum was awful”.

Hans had me turn on my side and he snuggled up so close to my back that it seemed that we were glued together. He put his arm around me and kissed me on the back of my neck and said, “Thanks again. I cannot wait until I can practice some more. I want you to fuck me sometime soon so I will know how that feels. Goodnight friend”.

The next morning I got up before Hans and he was lying on his stomach stretched out sound asleep. I picked up my sketchpad and made several sketches before he rolled over on his side with his back to me and I did some more sketches. I just set there staring at the marvel of some one having a physique like his. When he started to wake up I had a stiff like I had never before experienced. I quickly turned my back to him so he could not see my erection. I was embarrassed that I had been looking at him so long while he was asleep.

Hans got up, put on his briefs and said good morning as he was headed to the bathroom. I got up and was going to fix our breakfast and Hans informed me that he was the one and only cook in that kitchen while he lived here.

After we finished breakfast, Hans cleared the table and cleaned up the kitchen area. He walked over in front of me and looked down and said, “Stand up. Drop you pants. Set back down. It is practice time”. Hans got down on his knees and gave me another blowjob. After I ejaculated, he stood up and kissed me and said, “Teach, I am going to learn to be a cocksucker that you will be proud of”.

While he was standing in front of me I took a hold of the waistband of his briefs and pulled his briefs down exposing his ridged member that was sticking out in front of my face. I got a firm grip on his buttocks and pulled him towards me and encouraged him to fuck my mouth. It did not take him long before he was nearing a climax and I slipped a finger up his asshole and he responded with loud moans as he squirted four or five rounds of cum down my throat. I patted him on the cheeks of his ass and told him, “This was the way to start off a beautiful day”. Hans said, “Friend, just wait until tonight and I will show you how to start it off”.

That evening class with Shirley as a model was the final night of that class period and I had chosen not to begin another class for a while. This left only the two classes with Hans as a model. I planned on devoting the extra time in doing painting of my own and my subject of course was Hans.

For the remainder of Hans’s period serving as a model for the classes, we had sex together many times. Hans was a great sex partner and both of us enjoyed our rememberable encounters together.

Pete’s friend in the men’s clothing and fashion business changed Hans’s future. With a lot of luck, making the right contacts, being at the right place at the right time within a year Hans was the most sought after model in the fashion industry. He was making enormous amount of money and was investing it wisely. Even though he had a very busy schedule, he started to college part time because he realized that his appearance and attractiveness as a model was only going to last for only a few years. By the time Hans modeling career was over, he had finished college and he was a rich man. Hans started a new career as an agent or managing other models and was tremendously successful in his endeavors.

Hans had a great influence on my life. With his encouragement and insistences along with Pete and his contacts, I moved my studio into a larger space and the interior was built to my specifications. I had my own living space, private studio and office, separate from the classroom. I reduce my teaching load to ten students and had a long waiting list of artists wanting to be in my class. I hired several other teachers who taught classes under my supervision varying from art history, oil and watercolor painting, landscapes, portraits, to modern and abstract art. In most cases all their class were always full.

My old habits never changed and I periodically allowed the maintenance crew who cleaned the classroom area to come into my living quarters and shovel out all the trash and clean up my mess. When Hans visited me he would always bring me a new wardrobe and trash my old clothes and he would cut my hair to make me halfway presentable.

My painting had begin to sell and I had all the commissions I could handle and this success was due to Hans, Pete, students and others who promoted my work.

Though out the years, Hans and I have been very close friends and we visit each other frequently. The greatest compliment I have ever had was when I visited Hans’s new home a number of years ago when he was a fashion model and hanging above his fireplace mantle was a painting I did of him laying on his stomach asleep in my bed. He had purchased the painting anonymously for ten thousand dollars, far more than the highest price for any painting I ever sold before. He knew that if I had known that he was interested in owning the painting that I would have gladly given it to him. Today the painting would appraise for much more than ten thousand dollars, so he did make a good investment even though that was not why he bought the painting.

Hans met the love of his life fifteen years ago and they are very happy living together. His mate is named Jeff and Jeff was also a model. Shortly after they first met, I enjoyed having the privilege of painting the two of them together in the nude.

In Hans’s lifetime, he has had many interesting and strange events that make interesting stories but his affair and living with Jeff is the most intriguing of them all.

PART II

Male Model and His Lover

By Kevin


The bond, friendship and love between Hans and I is incredible. We have
respect, trust and admiration for each other that are extremely rare.
As friends, we supported, advised, and help each other and there is nothing that we would not do to make each other’s lives a little happier.

After Hans started modeling men’s clothing, He visited me as often as he could. He kept me advised as to what was going on in his life and up to date on his new boyfriends and sexual encounters.

One afternoon, Hans paid an unexpected visit and was happier than I had ever seen him. He had just returned from Paris where he had been modeling for three weeks. He had met Jeff a few days after he first arrived and they were together every free minute that they were not busy modeling. Jeff was a French model and spoke very little English but they had very little difficulty in communicating especially in the bedroom.

Jeff’s background was similar to Hans. His parents had recently died and he had no living relatives and no close friends. His first gay sex was with Hans and Hans for a change was the teacher and according to Hans, “Jeff was an excellent, willing, obedient student who wanted to ‘practice’ and rehearse all the time”. “Jeff of course is very handsome and in France he primarily model men’s underwear and swim suits. He is very friendly, always happy and always smiling. He has a wonderful smile and dimples in his cheeks and his dark eyes sparkle. He is so cute and I think I am in love with him.”

Hans told me that Jeff would be flying to New York next week to be a model in some show for three weeks and Jeff was going to stay with him.
Hans said, “I can not wait for you to meet him. He is adorable and I know you will like him”.

The next week, Hans paid me another unexpected visit and this time he had Jeff with him. Hans had just picked him up at the airport and stopped by to introduce Jeff to me while on the way to Hans home. Jeff was everything that Hans had told me and I was very impressed. When Hans first arrived, I did what I always do, and I hugged and kissed him on the cheek not thinking anything about it. Then Hans introduce Jeff and I hugged him around the neck and told him I had heard about him and was glad to meet him. From the way Jeff was acting, I had the feeling that he had some resentment and disapproval towards me that I did not understand.

A little later, Jeff asked if he could use the bathroom and while he was gone, I asked Hans what was going on? “I have told Jeff about you and he very jealous and does not understand our friendship but when he gets to know you, he will be all right”.

Before Hans and Jeff left, I could tell that Jeff’s attitude towards me had improved somewhat but there still was reluctance on his part. Hans told me that he would be calling me in a few days so we could get together for dinner and that he was going to call Pete and see if he would join us. When they got to the door, I hugged Jeff and while I was hugging Hans neck, Hans said wait here I almost forgot. He ran out to his car and came back with a box and handed it to me and said, “I got you some clothes while in Paris and I want you to wear them when we go out for dinner. Okay?”

The box contained a beautiful suit, shirt, tie, belt, shoes, socks and underwear. I had not had a suit on for years.

The next day Hans called and gave me the time, date and place to meet them for dinner. I decided to really go all out for the occasion since I would be wearing a new suit. I went to the barber shop and got a shave, manicure, and hair cut and even went to the store a bought a bottle of cologne.

When I arrived for dinner, Pete, Jeff and Hans were seated at a table and I walked up to them and they did not recognize me at first. I walked around modeling for them and told them, “Take a good look because probably you will not see me in this monkey suit again until you see me in a casket”.
After the meal, we were having a good time talking and getting to know each other and Pete and I did our best to draw Jeff into the conversation and make him feel at ease. Jeff did not feel comfortable talking at first because of his broken English but before the evening was over, Jeff was chatting away often using French words that we did not understand but we got the meaning of what he was trying to say.

During the conversation, Hans asked Pete if he still had the painting that he did with him modeling on the bicycle. Hans told Pete that he liked his work and would like to buy the painting from him if it were for sale. He wanted to give it to Jeff as a present. Jeff rides a bicycle almost everywhere he goes in Paris. Pete told Hans, “I think I have the painting stored in a closet and I will look for it and get it to you. I have never sold one of my paintings and I do not want to break the tradition. I thank you for your complement”.

When Pete and Jeff were not looking Hans motioned to me to follow him to the restroom. When we got inside the restroom, Hans said, “Man, I got a big problem. I need help. I don’t know if all Frenchmen have a libido like Jeff but he wants to have sex twenty-four hours a day. He never stops. My cock has always been very sensitive but now it is so sore I cannot even touch it without it hurting. I tried to put medication on it but Jeff just sucks it off. I told him that I was having a problem and he stopped having oral sex with me for a while and started fucking my asshole instead and now it is real sore. I love the guy but I cannot go on much longer the way we have been going after it. I’ve tried giving him one blowjob after the other and I just cannot satisfy his sexual appetite. What would you suggest I do?” I could not keep from smiling and Hans said, “Hell man it is not funny. I am in pain. Help me out man”. The only thing I could think of to suggest was that they both should go see a doctor.

About a week later Hans called and told me that Jeff had decide to live in New York City for a while. He thought that he could get enough work here and did not want to go back to Paris. Besides that both of us think we are in love with each other and want to be sure and give it a chance. I asked about how they were doing and Hans replied, “Well I know what you are referring to and all I am going to say is that we are trying to work it out. BUT, Jeff’s English is improving. He has learned the words ‘fuck’ and ‘fucking’ and is real proud of the fact and is using them all the time. He sounds like a sailor’s foul mouth”.

Six weeks had passed and I had not seen or heard from Hans or Jeff. I had tried to call several times and received no answer and the last time I called the phone had been disconnected. I was really getting concerned.

Hans and Jeff showed up and they told me that they had made a commitment to each other and had bought and just finished moving into a new house. They were going to have a big party Saturday night to announce to their friends that they were tying the knot. They wanted me to come and be prepared to spend the night with them and be the first one to use their guest bedroom. Jeff put his arms around me and kissed me on both of my cheeks and then on my lips and looked me in the eye and said, “Please,---Come---Be---Our---Our---Best---uh---Best man---Fuck, I---rehearsed all the fucking afternoon--- what---I---was going--to say to you and I just fuck it all up. Will you be our best man?”

I hugged Jeff and told him that it would be my pleasure to be their best man and I wished them the best of everything. Now, Jeff if you think that you fucked things up, you should hear me say what I just said in French. Hans put his arms around both of us and said, “Jeff’s English is really improving especially when he doesn’t try so hard. But, I wished that he would forget how to say fuck and fucking”.

I asked if I should wear my new suit to the party? Hans said, “Certainly but do not wear that stinking cologne. I don’t know where you got it but you should flush it down the commode”.

When I arrived at Hans and Jeff’s new home, the outside of their house was very impressive and in a neighborhood with other beautiful homes. I was greeted at the door by Jeff dressed in a tuxedo and he pulled me inside and hugged me and kissed me on each cheek and said, “I’m so glad you are here. I do not know all these people and it is good to see a friend that I do know”.

When I stepped inside the interior was elegant and obviously had the touches of a very talented interior designer.

Jeff put his arm around my waist and said, “Come, I show house to you. We spent lot’s of money on house and furnishing---but I wish to show you the most valuable thing worth more to me than the house and furnishing put together”. He guided me to the entrance to the living room/den and the first thing you would see when you walked into the room was my painting of Hans asleep on his stomach in my bed. The interior designer had designed the room using the painting as a focal point. The only light in the room was a spotlight on the painting and lit candles on a table underneath the painting. I was so impressed and moved that tears were flowing freely down my cheeks. The room was full of people and I could not control my emotions. Jeff threw his arms around my neck and said, “I love that man almost as much as you do and I love you to”.

Hans walked up and put his arms around both of us and asked, “What is going on between you two?” Jeff reached in his pocket and handed me a handkerchief and reached over and kissed Hans on the cheek and left. In a few minutes he returned holding Pete’s hand and told me to come with them. He led Pete and I into their bedroom that was also lit only by a spotlight on Pete’s painting of Hans in the nude on the bicycle. Pete was also moved and had difficult in controlling his emotions. I handed Pete Jeff’s handkerchief and had to leave the room before I completely loss control.

I walked around by myself to see the rest of the house. There were people everywhere standing around talking, laughing, drinking and having an enjoyable evening. I spotted the back door and thought I would go outside to be alone for a while and when I got outside there were more people partying around a wonderful swimming pool, water fountain and fish pond. There were flowers in full bloom that were lit up by torches and the lights from the swimming pool and fountain. Beauty was all around me including all these men dressed in tuxedo and suits most of which were or had been models or connected with the men’s fashion industry and were acquaintances of Hans and Jeff. There were a few women in evening or cocktail dresses scattered around. From looking around at the people, I came to the conclusion that there were just as many straight as there were gays present.

Hans came to the sliding door and asked everyone to get a glass of champagne and join everyone in the living room for an announcement.

After everyone gathered in the living room, Hans and Jeff stood underneath the painting holding hands until everyone got quiet. Jeff left Hans and worked his way thru the crowd and came and got me by the hand and had me stand between he and Hans.

Jeff said to the crowd, “Ladies and Gentlemen, Please pardon my English. I am trying very hard to learn to speak your language. I am from France and am very glad to be in the United States and this New York City. I want to become a US citizen and live here.”

“Many of you have asked Hans and I about the painting that is behind us and the gentleman to my right is a very dear friend of Hans and me and he is the artist who painted the painting and of course maybe you know that Hans was the model. Everyone was clapping and Hans put his arm around my shoulder and told me to take a bow. After we both took our bows Hans whispered to me to stay where I was.

Hans spoke up and said, “I want to introduce you people to the man that is mainly responsible for me being where I am today. Pete would you raise your hand so everyone knows who you are?” There was a big round of applause.

Hans reached and took Jeff’s hand and they stepped up in front of me. Hans said, “Jeff and I have invited all of you here to see our new home but perhaps we have deceived you because the real reason we invited you here tonight is because we want you to witness Jeff and I making our lifelong vows and commitments to one another.

Hans and Jeff turn facing each holding hands and said in their own words how much they loved each other and their commitments to each other. Most of what Jeff said was spoken in French but everyone knew the gist of what he was saying. They kissed each other and turned kissed and hugged me. Pete purposed a toast and afterwards everyone came forward and congratulated Hans and Jeff.

The party continued for an hour or so and several of the guest had quiet a bit to drank and the music was blaring. With all the noise, I began to feel ill at ease and uncomfortable. Pete rescued me and we found a quieter place on the patio where we took our drinks and we had a very nice visit while ignoring everyone else.

After everyone left, Hans, Jeff and I picked up and put away some of the things but Hans had arranged for a maid to come in the morning to do the major cleaning of the house and patio area. Jeff took me by my hand and led me to the guest room where I was to spend the night. He went into the bathroom and turned the water on in whirlpool tub and got me a towel and told me to relax in the whirlpool that it would make me feel good. He said after I got out of the tub and ready for bed that he and Hans would come back that they had a favor to ask of me and that he had a favor to ask of both Hans and I.

The whirlpool was wonderful and did make me relax and I felt so much better. It was the first time I had ever been in a whirlpool and I knew that I was going to have to get one to use at home. I dried off and put on my briefs and lay on the bed and waited for Jeff and Hans. I could not imagine what kind of favor Jeff was talking about.

I heard them coming down the hall talking and laughing. They came into the room and they were in their briefs and with their arms around each other and had big smiles on their faces.

This was the first time I had seen Jeff without his clothes on and I knew right away why he was so successful in Paris for modeling underwear and swimsuits. The way he filled out his briefs left little to the imagination as to the sized of his big soft cock and nuts and the rest of his body was fantastically beyond belief. He and Hans was the ultimate match in perfection of the male human body.

I quickly set up in bed and put a pillow over my crouch to cover my erection. They jump upon the bed and were on their knees and Hans said, “We want to commission you to let us pose in the nude and you do a painting with us together. Would you please do it for us?” My answered startle them and their faces looked like I had slapped them when I said, “Absolutely not! ---- There is no way in hell that I would accept any compensation --- But it would be my pleasure to do the painting as a house-warming gift to you. I know that both of you are very busy and what I will do is for you to set up a time when you can come into the studio and I will arrange for a photographer to come in and take photographs of you posing. I now have equipment that I can use a photograph and project it on a screen in my studio and paint using the image on the screen rather than have you come in numerous times and set for me. I would also like to do this painting on a larger canvas than I normally use. How does that sound?”

They were jumping up and down on the bed making more noise than that was going on at the party. I could have offered them a million dollars and it would not made them happier. That was certainly a payment in full for doing the painting.

Jeff got a real serious expression on his face and he kept looking and me and then looking at Hans and he did this several times. I knew he wanted to say something but could not find the right words. I asked, “Jeff, you mentioned earlier that you had a favor to ask Hans and I. Why don’t you just tell us what is the favor you want from us?”

After Jeff said a few words in French to himself, Hans and I knew that Jeff had something on his mind that was really bothering him and was afraid that we would not understand or be offended by what he wanted desperately to tell us. He started speaking English to us very slowly trying to interpret his thoughts from French into English. “Hans you know that I love you more than anything and I never want to do anything that would make you dislike me. You guys have been friends a long time and have had sex together. I used to be jealous but no longer am jealous. Perhaps it may be a little envy. I don’t know. Perhaps neither of you is going to understand my reasoning for asking the favor that I am going to ask. I have thought about this a long time. It not going to make any sense to you guys, but I want to share the friendship and love that you two have together and I feel what I am going to ask will at least help me and may be you to. Hans, I know this is supposed to be our wedding night but would you guys please have sex with me just one time? I feel like an outsider when I am with you two and I badly want to be apart of your friendship. Please accept my love and friendship and do this for me.”

Hans looked at me and I looked at Hans. Both of us grinned at each other and shrugged our shoulders and jumped all over Jeff. I told Jeff that was the nicest proposal and offer of friendship that I had ever heard and his wish was granted. Hans knew where Jeff ticklish spots were and began to tickle him making him laugh and know that we may not completely understand his thinking but were willing to comply with his wishes.

This was a new experience for the three of us since none of us had ever had a three-way sex before. Since Jeff had been thinking about it for so long, he took charge and told us what to do to fulfill his fantasy.

Jeff got off the bed and went into to his bedroom and came back with a candle, condoms and lubricant. He lit the candle and turned off the overhead lights and removed his briefs. His cock was erect and he certainly was well endowed.

He lay down on the bed and asked me if I would suck his cock while he sucked Hans and Hans could suck mine. I thought Hans’s cock was big but Jeff also had an equal if not larger than Hans. Anyway he had a mouthful to offer and I was horny enough now that no matter how big his was I was going to take it all.

Having sex with the two most gorgeous hunks that I have ever seen was like I was in heaven. We were doing to each other what we would normally do if it were two guys in a six-nine position but the third guy had been added and instead of two guys moaning and expressing their pleasure, the addition of the third person only added more moans and heighten the lust of all involved.

Jeff’s rod was the first Frenchman that I ever made love to and I did my best to give it the best that my tongue, mouth and throat could offer. His response was definitely a show of approval. He was almost ready to ejaculate and he moved his ass back taking his cock out of my mouth. I took hold of his cock and just gripped it real tight.

I stopped Hans just before I was about to shoot my cum. The three of us got on our knees and started the hug and kiss each other. Jeff said that it was his turn to give head to my dick while Hans suck his and I could give head to Hans. For sometime we suck each other’s cocks until reaching another near climax. I can stay this. Hans was a good teacher for Jeff knew how to give pleasure to a cock and the practice on Hans was not waist of time.

The finale of our sexual encounter was when Jeff had me on the foot of the bed on my hands and knees while he fucked my asshole and Hans was laying underneath me sucking my dick while I sucked Hans’s big cock. I had the best position of the three by being fucked, sucked off and giving Hans a blowjob at the same time. Hans was the first to send jets of cum into my throat and shortly I shot off into Hans’s mouth and within minutes Jeff ejaculated far up my asshole. Hans had gotten out from under me and I scooted down on my stomach. Jeff fell on top of me and his still erected cock was between the crack of my butt and Hans got on top of Jeff and hugged both of us. Being on bottom with all their weight on me had me pined to the bed but I was very content to have had such a wonderful sexual experience with guys who would be my friends for the rest of my life.

I dozed off and they must have also because, when I woke up when they were getting off me, I felt like I had slept an hour or so. I rolled over on my back and Jeff was standing on one side of the bed and Hans on the other. They both had erections again and with each hand I held and stroked them a few times while each of them leaned over to kiss me goodnight. Softly in my ear Jeff said, “Thank you. I now know why Hans enjoyed having sex with you and I also enjoyed sex with you. I now know you and you know me. You are our friend now and Hans is going be sharing your friendship with me from now on. I love you very much”.

Hans and Jeff left the room the same as they came in, with their arms around each other but they had forgotten to put their briefs back on, but if they had they would have taken them off again as soon as they got to their bedroom.

Two different times during the night, they were having sex together and woke me up. The first time Jeff was yelling “Fuck! Fuck!” and then he was yelling something in French. The next time I heard Hans saying, “You shot your cum all over my face and you even got it in my hair”.

Hans and Jeff wasted no time in contacting me and arranging to come to the studio to pose for the photographer and me. I had them to set on the floor facing each other with Hans’s legs over Jeff’s legs and their crouches close to each other and their legs stretched out in opposite directions with their hands on each other shoulders and they were looking into each other’s eyes and smiling. With the aid of the oil that each of them applied to each other’s bodies, the spotlights showed off the muscles on their legs, rippling torsos and strong arms. It was a very sensual image in very good taste and I think even the heterosexuals would not object to the love and interaction shown or transpiring between these two gay men.

I arranged for the photographer to go to Hans and Jeff’s home and take photographs of the patio, swimming pool and fountain. I planned on using the image as a background for the painting.

I enjoyed doing the painting and think that it is the best work that I have ever done. Perhaps it was because I loved the guys that were the subjects for the painting. Jeff and Hans could not have been more pleased with my effort.

For the next two years, Hans, Jeff and I often got together to go out for dinner, movies, and concerts or just to visit with each other.

They had a houseguest for a week and they had me over to meet Paul. This was the first time I had spent the night at their house in two years. I shared the guest bedroom with Paul and we had sex together and our meeting led into a long time affair. That is another story yet to be told.

[bkozy54]

Your story was beautiful, touching, erotic & loving. I enjoyed it so very much! I hope more is to follow.

[unoponcho]

“Surprise! I’m Gay”

By Kevin


Occasionally, one may have misconceptions about an individual and it is a shock when you learn the truth. That is what happened to me when I learned the of the fallacies and deceptions regarding Ken Burns’ marriage.

Unfortunately, after learning the truth and getting to know and work with Ken our relationship was to end tragically.

I worked at the chief office of company in Dallas, Texas that had offices in Chicago, New York City, Atlanta, Miami, Seattle, Phoenix, Los Angles, and San Francisco. One of my responsibilities was to plan and organize conferences. These also involved people from related companies and organizations that not only sent delegates but also provided speakers.

Ken Burns worked out of the Chicago office and our paths had crossed a few times. We were colleagues and our interests were in the same field and we were both becoming respected and highly regarded and known for our expertise. Even so, we did not know each other very well on a personal level. At a nmber of conferences I had listened to some of his presentations and was impressed by his intelligence and knowledge. The only personal thing I knew about him was that he was happily married.

I was working on plans for a conference to be held in Dallas in two weeks tome. Everything was arranged except for getting in touch with Ken to invite him to be the first and last speaker during the three-day event. I could never catch Ken in his office but when I finally did reach him he agreed to join the the program and make the speeches. However, he said that he had an appointment in Chicago early in the morning of the first day but he could catch a plane to be in Dallas in time to make his first presentation provided I could meet him at the airport.

He also stated that he was tired of hotels and hated staying in them and asked if I had a guestroom so that he could stay with me. I told him I would pick him up at the airport and yes, I did have a guestroom that he could use. He said maybe that would give us time for me to read and offer my advice on a study that he was involved with as he would appreciate some help and input.

Fortunately, Ken’s flight was on time, the traffic to the conference site was not bad and so we arrived in good time for Ken to make his presentation. Once again I was impressed with his knowledge and talk.

While we were driving to my apartment, I asked Ken how his wife was doing? He smiled and said, “Well, we maybe getting a divorce. Some of the women at the office found out about it and they have been coming on to me like crazy so I may change my mind about it”. At the time, I thought his answer was a little strange, but let it slide.

On reaching the apartment, I helped Ken carry his things in, put them in the guestroom and I offered him a drink before we went to bed. He said, “Let me get out of these clothes and take a quick shower and I will be right with you”.

I had mixed the drinks and set down, was relaxing and enjoying my drink when Ken came into the den wearing only his jockey shorts and showing a big box.

We were about the same age and height but he was thin and lanky with some hair on his chest. Ken may not have had the greatest body in the world but he made that up by being out going with a big smile and great personality. You just could not help but like the guy.

After my second drink, I asked him if he needed anything before I took my shower and went to bed. He said he did not know of anything but was going to finish his drink and he would then turn off the lights before retirng.

I finished my shower and cracked open the shower door to reach for my towel but it was not where I had left it. I opened the shower door wider and Ken was standing there naked with a tremendous erection holding out the towel. He said, “Surprise! I’m gay and I am going to give you a blowjob so you will sleep better”. I was thoroughly confused but the sight of his cock caused me to get an erection. It had been a long time since I last had sex and as I had been so busy I had not masturbated in a couple of weeks so I was not going to refuse Ken’s offer. He pulled me from the shower, dried me off and led me to my bed.

Before he began giving oral sex, he told me, “Just completely relax and take it easy and enjoy. I am going to satisfy you and when I am through you will want to go to sleep. Tomorrow, night I want you to fuck me. Okay?”

From the moment he went down on me, I knew that it was going to be a blowjob that I would remember for a long time. I had his cock in my hand and was slowly masturbating him while he sucked me off. When I became tense he would massage my body without removing my cock from his mouth. I had not been jerking him off very long before he shot his wad but I did not stop masturbating him until he shot a second load. He told me to leave his cock alone and concentrate on relaxing and enjoying being sucked off. I readily complied and do not think I had ever enjoyed a blowjob more than I did that night. After I shot my cum into his mouth, almost immediately I fell into a deep sleep not knowing when he left my bed to go to his own.

The next morning, I got up shaved, showered, and dressed and was going to put the coffee pot to brew but Ken had beaten me to it. He was seated at the breakfast table fully dressed and had taken papers out of his brief case and stacked them before him. When I walked in he said, “How did you sleep last night? Did you have any wet dreams?” I smiled and said, “I must have because there are cum stains on my bed this morning”. We smiled at each other and that all that was mentioned about sex the previous night.

I set down at the breakfast table with my coffee. Ken pushed the stack of papers over and asked me read them and offer any suggestions or comments I might wish to offer. I began to read and when I didn’t understand something, I would question him about it. If I disagreed, I would say so and make a point or suggestion. He would take the page and make notes and tell me he agreed. We were both so involved with his study that we lost track of time and it was way past when we should have been on our way to the conference. Amazed at how well we worked together, we decided that in the future we should collaborate and co-author studies and papers and even maybe write a book.

We got into the car and were under way when I asked Ken what was the deal with his wife and the divorce. He smiled and said, “Well it is a long story and I am going to try to be brief. My marriage is a fallacy. I have never been married and never will be. I am as gay as they come. The marriage thing started when I was interviewed for my job and my boss for some reason assumed that I was married and I never denied it. At the office, he kept asking me about my wife and I kept telling him one lie after another and soon everyone assumed that I had a wife.

"A few months ago it occurred to me that I could spread the word around that I was getting a divorce thinking that would solve the issue. Several of the single women starting coming on to me asking me for dates and one of them even asked if she could spend the weekend with me. So I do not know whether to continue the deception or face the worst”.

I said, “My friend, I cannot help you with that one. You are on your own. But how did you know that I am gay?” Ken said, “It is a small world after all. I ran into an old fuck buddy of yours who also was an old fuck buddy of mine. You of course remember James, your roommate in college, well I met him at a party about a month ago and somehow your name came up and he mentioned you were gay and about the good times you two had together.

Everything went very smoothly at the conference that day. During one of the breaks, I took Ken to my office and showed him some of the projects that I had been working on.aHe was very interested and offered some very good advice as well as suggestions for improvements. We were even more convinced that we needed to work together in the future.

When we got home that night, we were tired and each took a shower and put on our underwear and joined up for drinks. I started reading Ken’s material that had was still on the breakfast table while he kept fixing me drinks. Soon both of us were beginning to feel no pain and Ken came over and took the paper out of my hand saying, “Enough of this shit for one day. Come to bed and fuck me”.

By the time we reached the bed, we had shed our shorts and were sporting wood. I lay on my back stroking myself. Ken straddled me and set down on my legs so that our cocks were touching and he began to masturbate them both simultaneously. I lay there with my eyes closed, completely relaxed, not exerting any energy enjoying the mutual pleasure. I was near to ejaculation and told Ken that he was about to make me shoot off. He released my cock but did not move from his position.

I looked down to see what he was doing and he was performing auto-fellatio. I could not believe it. I had heard about it but had never seen anyone who could suck himself off. He was quite a contortionist and could get almost two-thirds of his cock into his mouth. It only took him a minute or two before he shot off and cum was running out of his mouth onto his chin.

He raised his head up, smiling and wiping his chin and said, “I am now ready for you to fuck me. Do you have a condom and lubricant in here?” I pointed to the end table and he got a rubber and put it on me. He lubricated my cock and his asshole and returned to the same position only this time he was far enough up on me that he could set down on my cock. When he did set down on me, he took all I had up his asshole in one motion and he was tightening and loosing his asshole around the base of my shank. I felt I was being massaged by his asshole. He began to raise himself up and down fucking my cock and I hardly had to move.

Once he had got me so aroused that I would soon ejaculate, he again gripped his buttocks with his hands pulling his torso and head down and started sucking his own cock without ever slowing